|
THE TREATIES OF CANADA WITH THE INDIANS OF MANITOBA AND THE
NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES, INCLUDING THE NEGOTIATIONS ON WHICH
THEY WERE BASED, AND OTHER INFORMATION RELATING THERETO.
BY THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS, P.C., LATE LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR
OF MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES, AND KEE-WA-TIN.
TO HIS EXCELLENCY
The Right Honorable the Earl of Dufferin,
Her Britannic Majesty's Ambassador at St. Petersburg, K.P.P.C.,
K.C.B., G.C.M.G., &c., &c., &c.
My Lord,--
Encouraged by the earnest interest, your Lordship ever evinced, in
the work of obtaining the alliance and promoting the welfare of the
Indian tribes in the North-West of Canada, and in opening up the
Territories for settlement, by obtaining the relinquishment of the
natural title of the Indians to the lands of the Fertile Belt on
fair and just terms, I have the honor, by your kind permission, to
dedicate this collection of the treaties made with them, to your
Excellency, in the belief that its publication will be timely, and
that the information now supplied in a compact form, may prove of
service to the Dominion of Canada.
I have the honor to be
Your Lordship's obedient servant,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Late Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba, the North-West Territories, and
Kee-wa-tin.
TORONTO, March, 1880.
PREFACE
The question of the relations of the Dominion of Canada to the
Indians of the North-West, is one of great practical importance The
work, of obtaining their good will, by entering into treaties of
alliance with them, has now been completed in all the region from
Lake Superior to the foot of the Rocky Mountains. As an aid to the
other and equally important duty--that of carrying out, in their
integrity, the obligations of these treaties, and devising means
whereby the Indian population of the Fertile Belt can be rescued
from the hard fate which otherwise awaits them, owing to the speedy
destruction of the buffalo, hitherto the principal food supply of
the Plain Indians, and that they may be induced to become, by the
adoption of agricultural and pastoral pursuits, a self supporting
community--I have prepared this collection of the treaties made
with them, and of information, relating to the negotiations, on
which these treaties were based, in the hope that I may thereby
contribute to the completion of a work, in which I had considerable
part, that, of, by treaties, securing the good will of the Indian
tribes, and by the helpful hand of the Dominion, opening up
to them, a future of promise, based upon the foundations of
instruction and the many other advantages of civilized life.
M.
CONTENTS
Introduction
I. The Selkirk Treaty
II. The Robinson Treaty
III. The Manitoulin Island Treaty
IV. The Stone Fort and Manitoba Post Treaties, Numbers One
and Two
V. Treaty Number Three; or, the North-West Angle Treaty
VI. The Qu'Appelle Treaty, or Number Four
VII. The Revision of Treaties Numbers One and Two
VIII. The Winnipeg Treaty Number Five
IX. The Treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt
X. Treaty Number Seven; or, the Blackfeet Treaty
XI. The Sioux in the North-West Territories
XII. The Administration of the Treaties--The Half-breeds--The
Future of the Indian Tribes
APPENDIX--Texts of the Treaties and Supplementary
Adhesions thereto
THE TREATIES WITH THE INDIANS OF MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST
TERRITORIES, AND KEE-WA-TIN, IN THE DOMINION OF CANADA.
INTRODUCTION
One of the gravest of the questions presented for solution by the
Dominion of Canada, when the enormous region of country formerly
known as the North-West Territories and Rupert's Land, was
entrusted by the Empire of Great Britain and Ireland to her rule,
was the securing the alliance of the Indian tribes, and maintaining
friendly relations with them. The predecessors of Canada--the
Company of Adventurers of England trading into Hudson's Bay,
popularly known as the Hudson's Bay Company--had, for long years,
been eminently successful in securing the good-will of the
Indians--but on their sway, coming to an end, the Indian mind was
disturbed. The events, that transpired in the Red River region, in
the years 1869-1870, during the period when a provisional
government was attempted to be established, had perplexed the
Indians. They, moreover, had witnessed a sudden irruption into the
country of whites from without. In the West, American traders
poured into the land, and, freighted with fire-water, purchased
their peltries and their horses, and impoverished the tribes. In
the East, white men took possession of the soil and made for
themselves homes, and as time went on steamboats were placed on the
inland waters--surveyors passed through the territories--and the
"speaking wires," as the Indian calls the telegraph, were erected.
What wonder that the Indian mind was disturbed, and what wonder was
it that a Plain chief, as he looked upon the strange wires
stretching through his land, exclaimed to his people, "We have done
wrong to allow that wire to be placed there, before the Government
obtained our leave to do so. There is a white chief at Red River,
and that wire speaks to him, and if we do anything wrong he will
stretch out a long arm and take hold of us before we can get away."
The government of Canada had, anticipating the probabilities of
such a state of affairs, wisely resolved, that contemporaneously
with the formal establishment of their rule, there should be formed
alliances with the Indians. In 1870 the Parliament of Canada
created the requisite machinery for the Government of the Province
of Manitoba and of the North-West Territories respectively, giving
to the former a Lieutenant-Governor and Legislature, and to
the latter, a Lieutenant-Governor and Council, Executive and
Legislative--the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba being ex officio
Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories. Subsequently the
North-West Territories were erected into a distinct government,
with a Lieutenant-Governor and Executive, and Legislative Council.
The District of Kee-wa-tin, "the land of the north wind," was also
established, comprising the eastern and northern portions of the
Territories, and placed under the control of the Lieutenant-Governor
of Manitoba, and an Executive and Legislative Council. Since 1870,
no less than seven treaties have been concluded, with the Indian
tribes, so that there now remain no Indian nations in the North-West,
inside of the fertile belt, who have not been dealt with.
It is the design of the present work to tell the story of these
treaties, to preserve as far as practicable, a record of the
negotiations on which they were based, and to present to the many
in the Dominion and elsewhere, who take a deep interest in these
sons of the forest and the plain, a view of their habits of thought
and speech, as thereby presented, and to suggest the possibility,
nay, the certainty, of a hopeful future for them.
Prior to proceeding to deal, with the treaties of the Dominion of
Canada, it will render this book more complete to present the
reader, with information as to three treaties which preceded those
of the Dominion, viz., the treaty made by the Earl of Selkirk in
the year 1817, those popularly known as the Robinson Treaties, made
by the late Hon. William B. Robinson, of the City of Toronto, with
the Indians of the shores and islands of Lakes Superior and Huron
in the year 1850, and that made by the Hon. William Macdougall, for
the surrender of the Indian title, to the great Manitoulin Island,
both acting for and on behalf of the Government of the late
Province of Canada.
Ere however entering upon an explanation of these two first-mentioned
treaties, I submit a few brief observations.
The Indians inhabiting the region covered by the treaties in
question, extending in Canadian territory from Lake Superior to the
foot of the Rocky Mountains, are composed of distinct tribes having
different languages.
The Ojibbewas, Chippawas, or Saulteaux as they now call themselves,
are found in numbers in the District of Kee-wa-tin and the Province
of Manitoba. In the North-West Territories they are not numerous
except within the limits of Treaty number Four. These Indians
migrated from the older Provinces of Quebec and Ontario many years
ago.
The Crees, inhabit the North-West Territories and are divided into
Plain, Wood and Swampy Crees, according to the region of the
country they dwell in. The Swampy Crees reside in Manitoba and
Kee-wa-tin.
The Black Feet nation are to be found towards the slope of the
Rocky Mountains, in the region comprised within the limits of the
Treaty number Seven.
A few Chippawayans, or Northerners, dwell within the North-West
Territories.
The once powerful nation of the Assiniboines, or Stonies--a kindred
tribe to the Sioux--are greatly reduced in numbers, and are now
only to be met with in the North-West Territories.
The Sioux in the Dominion are refugees from the United States, the
first body having come over some fourteen years ago. A large influx
of similar refugees, have recently fled to the Dominion from, the
same country, as the issue of the recent war between the United
States and the Sioux.
CHAPTER I
THE SELKIRK TREATY
In the year 1811, the Earl of Selkirk purchased [Footnote:
Vide Appendix for copy of the agreement in question.] from the
Governor and Company of Adventurers trading into Hudson's Bay,
in consideration of ten shillings and certain agreements and
understandings contained in the Indenture, a large tract of
territory within Rupert's Land described in the Indenture as
follows:
"All that tract of land or territory being within and forming part
of the aforesaid lands and territories of the said Governor and
Company, bounded by an imaginary line running as follows, that
is to say, beginning on the western shore of the Lake Winnipic,
otherwise Winnipeg, at a point in fifty-two degrees and thirty
north latitude and thence running due west to the Lake Winnipegoos,
otherwise called Little Winnipeg, then in a southerly direction
through the said Lake so as to strike its western shore in latitude
fifty-two degrees, then due west to the place where the parallel of
fifty-two degrees north latitude intersects the western branch of
Red River, otherwise called Assiniboine River, then due south from
that point of intersection to the height of land which separates
the waters running into Hudson's Bay from those of the Missouri and
Mississippi, then in an easterly direction along the said height
of land to the source of the River Winnipic, or Winnipeg (meaning
by such last named river the principal branch of the waters which
unite in Lake Sagenagos), thence along the main stream of these
waters and the middle of the several lakes through which they
flow to the mouth of the Winnipic River and thence in a northerly
direction through the middle of Lake Winnipic to the place of
beginning." The deed is accompanied by a map intended to show the
tract of country, and there is an endorsement on the map that
as the surveys were not sufficient to ascertain with precision
whether, latitude 52 degrees does intersect the river called Red or
Assiniboine River, it was agreed, that in case the waters of of Red
River, shall on more accurate survey be found, not to extend so far
north as latitude 52 degrees, then the west boundary of the tract
of land intended to be within the grant, should be a line drawn due
north and south, through the post upon the Red River, marked on the
plan is "Carlton House."
The Company reserved the right to call upon the Earl to set off
one-tenth, however, of the tract for the use of the servants of
the Company--and the Earl covenanted, within ten years, to settle
within the tract one thousand families, each of them consisting of
one married couple at the least, on pain of revocation of the
grant, if on receipt of notice to that effect from the Company he
did not, within three years after the receipt of the notice,
complete the settlement of the one thousand families.
In pursuance of his obligations, Lord Selkirk, in the autumn of the
year 1811, sent out a number of families from the County of
Sutherland, in Scotland, who spent the winter at Fort Churchill on
the western shore of Hudson's Bay. On the arrival of spring, they
travelled thence to the confluence of the Assiniboine and Red
Rivers, and thus was commenced the interesting settlement of the
Red River, which is now included in the Province of Manitoba. It is
not my purpose to notice here the eventful history of the Selkirk
colonists, and I will only note the fact that in 1836, the Company
bought back the whole tract, from the heirs of Lord Selkirk, for
the sum of L84,000, the rights of colonists who had purchased land
between 1811 and 1836, being respected.
In the year 1817 the Earl of Selkirk, visited his wide domain,
and entered into negotiations with the Indian tribes, for the
extinction of their title, to a tract of land described as follows:
[Footnote: A large portion of the ceded territory is now
comprehended in the Territory of Dakota, United States.] "All
that tract of land adjacent to Red River and Assiniboine River,
beginning at the mouth of Red River and extending along the same
as far as Great Forks at the mouth of Red Lake River and along
Assiniboine River as far as the Musk Rat River, otherwise called
Riviere des Champignons, and extending to the distance of six miles
from Fort Douglas on every side, and likewise from Fort Doer, and
also from the Great Forks and in other posts extending in breadth
to the distance of two English statute miles back from the banks of
the river."
The Indians then inhabiting the region were described as being of
the Chippawa or Saulteaux and Killistine or Cree nations. They were
made to comprehend, the depth of the land they were surrendering,
by being told, that it was the greatest distance, at which a horse
on the level prairie could be seen, or daylight seen under his
belly between his legs. The consideration for the surrender, was,
the payment of one hundred pounds of good merchantable tobacco, to
each nation annually.
The treaty was signed by Lord Selkirk and by five Indian chiefs,
who affixed thereto drawings of the animals after which they were
named, by way of signature, a fac simile of which will be found
elsewhere. The surrender was to the Sovereign Lord, King George the
Third. The treaty was accompanied by a map which shows that the
tract surrendered extended to Grand Forks in what is now United
States territory. A copy of the treaty will be found in the
Appendix and will prove of interest.
CHAPTER II
THE ROBINSON TREATIES
In consequence of the discovery of minerals, on the shores of Lakes
Huron and Superior, the Government of the late Province of Canada,
deemed it desirable, to extinguish the Indian title, and in order
to that end, in the year 1850, entrusted the duty to the late
Honorable William B. Robinson, who discharged his duties with great
tact and judgment, succeeding in making two treaties, which were
the forerunners of the future treaties, and shaped their course.
The main features of the Robinson Treaties--viz., annuities,
reserves for the Indians, and liberty to fish and hunt on the
unconceded domain of the Crown--having been followed in these
treaties. A special feature of the Robinson Treaties, was the
adjustment of a claim made by the Indians to be paid, the amount
received, by the Government, for the sale of mining locations. This
was arranged, by Mr. Robinson, agreeing to pay them, the sum of
L4,000 and an annuity of about L1,000, thus avoiding any dispute
that might arise as to the amounts actually received by the
Government. The number of Indians included in the treaties were
stated by Mr. Robinson to be: on Lake Superior, 1240, including 84
half-breeds; and on Lake Huron 1422, including 200 half-breeds.
[Footnote: The census return of the Department of the Interior
for the year 1878 gives the numbers of these Indians as follows:
Chippawas of Lake Superior ... 1,947. Chippawas of Lake Huron ...
1,458.] The relations of the Indians and half-breeds, have long
been cordial; and in the negotiations as to these initial treaties,
as in the subsequent ones, the claims of the half-breeds, to
recognition, was urged by the Indians.
I cannot do better, in giving information with regard to these
treaties, than simply to reproduce the Report of Mr. Robinson to
the Honorable Colonel Bruce, Superintendent-General of Indian
Affairs, in which he describes the course of his negotiations and
communicates their results. A copy of the treaties will be found in
the Appendix. The Report is as follows:
TORONTO, 24th September, 1850.
Sir:--I have the honor herewith to transmit the Treaty which on
the part of the Government I was commissioned to negotiate with
the tribes of Indians inhabiting the northern shore of Lakes Huron
and Superior; and I trust that the terms on which I succeeded in
obtaining the surrender of all the lands in question, with the
exception of some small reservations made by the Indians, may be
considered satisfactory. They were such as I thought it advisable
to offer, in order that the matter might be finally settled,
without having any just grounds of complaint on the part of the
Indians.
The Indians had been advised by certain interested parties to
insist on such extravagant terms as I felt it quite impossible to
grant; and from the fact that the American Government had paid
very liberally for the land surrendered by their Indians on the
south side of Lake Superior, and that our own in other parts of the
country were in receipt of annuities much larger than I offered, I
had some difficulty in obtaining the assent of a few of the chiefs
to my proposition.
I explained to the chiefs in council the difference between the
lands ceded heretofore in this Province and those then under
consideration, they were of good quality and sold readily at
prices which enabled the Government to be more liberal, they were
also occupied by the whites in such a manner as to preclude the
possibility of the Indian hunting over or having access to them
whereas the lands now ceded are notoriously barren and sterile, and
will in all probability never be settled except in a few localities
by mining companies, whose establishments among the Indians,
instead of being prejudicial, would prove of great benefit as they
would afford a market for any things they may have to sell, and
bring provisions and stores of all kinds among them at reasonable
prices.
Neither did the British Government contemplate the removal of the
Indians from their present haunts to some (to them) unknown region
in the far West, as had been the case with their brethren on the
American side.
I told them that the two chiefs who were in Toronto last winter
(Shinguacouse and Nebennigoebing) only asked the amount which the
Government had received for mining locations, after deducting the
expenses attending their sale. That amount was about eight thousand
pounds which the Government would pay them without any annuity
or certainty of further benefit; or one-half of it down, and an
annuity of about one thousand pounds.
There were twenty-one chiefs present, about the same number of
principal men, and a large number of other Indians belonging to
the different bands, and they all preferred the latter proposition,
though two of them (Shinguacouse and Nebennigoebing) insisted on
receiving an annuity equal to ten dollars per head.
The chiefs from Lake Superior desired to treat separately for their
territory and said at once in council that they accepted my offer.
I told them that I would have the treaty ready on the following
morning, and I immediately proceeded to prepare it, and as agreed
upon they signed it cheerfully at the time appointed.
I then told the chiefs from Lake Huron (who were all present when
the others signed) that I should have a similar treaty ready for
their signature, the next morning when those who signed it would
receive their money; and that as a large majority of them had
agreed to my terms I should abide by them.
I accordingly prepared the treaty and proceeded on the morning of
the ninth instant to the council-room to have it formally executed
in the presence of proper witnesses--all the chiefs and others were
present. I told them I was then ready to receive their signatures;
the two chiefs, Shinguacouse and Nebennigoebing, repeated their
demand of ten dollars a head by way of annuity, and also insisted
that I should insert in the treaty a condition securing to some
sixty half-breeds a free grant of one hundred acres of land each.
I told them they already had my answer as to a larger annuity, and
that I had no power to give them free grants of land. The other
chiefs came forward to sign the treaty and seeing this the two who
had resisted up to this time also came to the table and signed
first, the rest immediately following.
I trust his Excellency will approve of my having concluded the
treaty on the basis of a small annuity and the immediate and final
settlement of the matter, rather than paying the Indians the full
amount of all moneys on hand, and a promise of accounting to them
for future sales. The latter course would have entailed much
trouble on the Government, besides giving an opportunity to evil
disposed persons to make the Indians suspicious of any accounts
that might be furnished.
Believing that His Excellency and the Government were desirous
of leaving the Indians no just cause of complaint on their
surrendering the extensive territory embraced in the treaty, and
knowing there were individuals who most assiduously endeavored to
create dissatisfaction among them, I inserted a clause securing to
them certain prospective advantages should the lands in question
prove sufficiently productive at any future period to enable the
Government without loss to increase the annuity. [Footnote: The
annuities under these treaties have recently been increased, the
following item having been inserted in the Supplies Act of Canada,
viz., "Annual grant to bring up annuities payable under the
Robinson Treaty to the Chippawas of Lakes Huron and Superior, from
96 cents to $4 per head, $14,000."] This was so reasonable and just
that I had no difficulty in making them comprehend it, and it in a
great measure silenced the clamor raised by their evil advisers.
In allowing the Indians to retain reservations of land for their
own use I was governed by the fact that they in most cases asked
for such tracts as they had heretofore been in the habit of using
for purposes of residence and cultivation, and by securing these to
them and the right of hunting and fishing over the ceded territory,
they cannot say that the Government takes from their usual means of
subsistence and therefore have no claims for support, which they no
doubt would have preferred, had this not been done. The reservation
at Garden River is the largest and perhaps of most value, but as
it is occupied by the most numerous band of Indians, and from its
locality (nine miles from the Sault) is likely to attract others
to it, I think it was right to grant what they expressed a desire
to retain. There are two mining locations at this place, which
should not be finally disposed of unless by the full consent of
Shinguacouse and his band; they are in the heart of the village and
shew no indications of mineral wealth, they are numbered 14 and 15
on the small map appended to Messrs. Anderson and Vidal's report.
I pledged my word on the part of the Government that the sale of
these locations should not be completed, and as the locatees have
not, I believe, complied with the conditions of the Crown Lands
Department there can be no difficulty in cancelling the
transaction.
The chiefs are desirous that their several reservations should
be marked by proper posts or monuments, and I have told them the
Government would probably send some one next spring for that
purpose. As I know many of the localities I shall be able to give
the necessary information when required.
When at Sault Ste. Marie last May, I took measures for ascertaining
as nearly as possible the number of Indians inhabiting the
north shore of the two lakes; and was fortunate enough to get
a very correct census, particularly of Lake Superior. I found
this information very useful at the council, as it enabled me
successfully to contradict the assertion (made by those who were
inciting the chiefs to resist my offers) that there were on Lake
Superior alone, eight thousand Indians. The number on that lake,
including eighty-four half-breeds, is only twelve hundred and
forty--and on Lake Huron, about fourteen hundred and twenty-two,
including probably two hundred half-breeds, and when I paid the
Indians they acknowledged they knew of no other families than
those on my list.
The number paid, as appears on the pay list, does not show the
whole strength of the different bands, as I was obliged at their
own request to omit some members of the very large families.
I have annexed to this Report the names of the chiefs, their
localities, and number of souls in each band as recognized by me
in apportioning the money, thinking it will be useful when paying
the annuity hereafter.
This information may I believe be fully relied on for Lake
Superior, but the census for Lake Huron is not so perfect; and I
would suggest that Captain Ironside should be furnished with copies
of that document and also of the pay-lists in order that he may
correct in time any errors that are found to exist.
As the half-breeds at Sault Ste. Marie and other places may seek to
be recognized by the Government in future payments, it may be well
that I should state here the answer that I gave to their demands on
the present occasion. I told them I came to treat with the chiefs
who were present, that the money would be paid to them--and their
receipt was sufficient for me--that when in their possession they
might give as much or as little to that class of claimants as they
pleased. To this no one, not even their advisers, could object,
and I heard no more on the subject. At the earnest request of the
chiefs themselves I undertook the distribution of the money among
their respective bands and all parties expressed themselves
perfectly satisfied with my division of their funds.
On my arrival at Penetanguishene I found the chiefs Yellowhead and
Snake, from Lake Simcoe, and Aissance, from Beausoleil's Island,
waiting to see me, to prefer their claim to a small tract of land
between Penetanguishene and the vicinity of the River Severn. I
was aware of their intending to make such a claim and took the
precaution of asking the chiefs assembled in council at the Sault
whether it was well founded, they emphatically declared that those
chiefs had no claim on Lake Huron, that they had long since ceded
their lands and were in the receipt of a large annuity, this I
believe to be the case and Captain Anderson, whom I met there,
is of the same opinion; but I promised to inquire into it and
give them an answer, and I will therefore thank you to cause the
necessary information from your office to be furnished to me on the
subject. Should it appear that these chiefs have any claim I think
I could get their surrender of it for a small amount, and there
remain sufficient funds at my disposal for the purpose.
The Canadians resident on the lands just surrendered at Sault Ste.
Marie are very anxious to obtain titles to the land on which they
have long resided and made improvements; they applied to me after
the treaty and I advised them to memorialize the Government the
usual way setting forth the manner in which they were put in
possession by the military authorities of the time, and that I had
little doubt that the Government would do them justice. I think the
survey of the tract should be made so as to interfere as little as
possible with their respective clearings and that those who can
show a fair claim to the favorable consideration of the Government
should be liberally dealt with.
It will be seen on referring to the treaty that I have kept within
the amount at my disposal. Of the L4,160 agreed by me to be paid
to the Indians of both lakes, there remains L75 unexpended. I could
not from the information I possessed tell exactly the number of
families I should have to pay, and thought it prudent to reserve a
small sum to make good any omissions, there may still be a few who
will prefer claims, though I know of none at present. If not, the
amount can be paid next year with the annuity to such families as
are most deserving; or it may be properly applied in extinguishing
the claim made by the Lake Simcoe Indians, should it appear on
inquiry to be just.
The whole amount given to me in August was L5,033 6s. 8d., of this
sum their remains L800, which I have placed in the Bank of Upper
Canada to the credit of the Receiver-General, and I have prepared
a detailed account of the whole, which with the proper vouchers, I
shall deliver to the Accountant of the Crown Lands Department.
I have much pleasure in acknowledging the valuable assistance
afforded me by all the officers of the Honorable the Hudson's Bay
Company resident on the lakes; and the prompt manner in which their
Governor, Sir George Simpson, kindly placed their services at my
disposal.
The report made last year by Messrs. Anderson and Vidal I found of
much use to me, and the long services and experience of the former
gentleman in Indian affairs enabled him to give me many valuable
suggestions.
Captain Cooper and his officers by attending at the council, and
otherwise, gave me most cheerfully all the aid in their power;
and Captain Ironside, of your Department, with his assistant,
Assickinach, were of essential service to me.
I found it absolutely necessary to have the aid of some one in
taking the census of the Lake Huron Indians at the time they were
receiving their presents at Manitoulin; and as Captain Ironside
was fully occupied in attending to his own duty, I requested Mr.
Keating, who had long known the Indians on that lake, to give me
his assistance. This he cheerfully and very efficiently did, and
afterwards was with me in distributing and paying out the money.
I have, in course of my negotiations with the Indians on the
present occasion, collected some information which may be useful
to your Department and will at an early day send it to you.
I will thank you to lay the two treaties accompanying this Report
before His Excellency, and trust they may meet with his approval.
I have, &c.,
(Signed) W. B. ROBINSON.
THE HON. COL. BRUCE,
Superintendent-General, Indian Affairs.
CHAPTER III
THE MANITOULIN ISLAND TREATY
Some years after the completion of the Robinson Treaties, the then
Government of the old Province of Canada deemed it desirable to
effect a treaty with the Indians dwelling upon the Great Manitoulin
Island in Lake Huron, as a complement to the former treaties, and
with the object of rendering available for settlement the large
tract of good land upon the Island. The duty was entrusted to the
Honorable William McDougall, then Superintendent-General of Indian
Affairs, who, in the month of October, 1862, proceeded to the
Island, accompanied by the late William Spragge, Esq., Deputy
Superintendent of Indian Affairs, and Mr. F. Assicknack, of the
Indian Office, Toronto, as interpreter. Mr. McDougall encountered
considerable difficulties, but by firmness and decision eventually
succeeded in obtaining a surrender from the Indians of the Island,
excluding however from the surrender that portion of it easterly of
Heywood Island and the Manitoulin Gulf.
The terms of the treaty, which will be found in the Appendix, were
adapted to the peculiar circumstances of the Indians and were well
and wisely framed. The result has been to render available for
settlement a large tract of land on the Island, much of which is
now occupied by a prosperous and thriving population. I conclude
this brief notice of an important treaty by submitting, to the
attention of the reader, the report of the Hon. W. McDougall, to
His Excellency the Governor-General in Council, of the results of
his mission.
MANITOULIN ISLAND, November 3rd, 1862.
The undersigned has the honor to state for the information of
His Excellency the Governor-General in Council, that, under the
authority of the Order in Council of the twelfth day of September,
1862, he proceeded early in the month of October last to visit the
Great Manitoulin Island, accompanied by William Spragge, Esq.,
Deputy Superintendent of Indian Affairs, and Mr. F. Assicknack of
the Indian Office, Toronto, as interpreter.
The resident agent, Captain Ironside, under instructions from the
Department, had caused the Indians residing on the Island to be
notified of the intended visit of the undersigned, and of its
object and had summoned them to attend at Manitowaning on the
fourth ultimo.
The Chiefs and principal men, with the exception of one or two
detained by illness and nearly all the males above the age of
eighteen years, were present at the council.
The undersigned stated the object of his visit, explained the
wishes of the Government in regard to the settlement of the Island,
and proposed the terms in respect to the Indians specified in the
Order in Council authorizing the negotiation. The Indians had
selected one of their Chiefs to reply to the overtures of the
Government, and without taking time to consider these overtures he
proceeded to announce the determination of the Indians to reject
them unconditionally.
The undersigned made some further explanations and directed an
ajournment of the council for an hour, during which time the
Indians were requested to consider the propositions he had made
with care and deliberation.
On re-assembling there was an evident disposition among the bands
living westwardly of the place of meeting to listen favorably to
the propositions of the Government, but the majority were still
unwilling to treat, and by intimidation and threats of violence
prevented any open expression of opinion except by the old war
Chief, Assicknack, who declared his full assent to the wishes of
the Government.
Ascertaining that the Chief's opposition came from Indians living
eastwardly of Heywood Sound, the undersigned determined to modify
the propositions of the Government, so as to meet in some degree
the objections from that quarter.
He accordingly adjourned the council until the following Monday,
the first day of meeting being Saturday, informing the Indians that
those who were disposed to continue the negotiations would remain
while those who had resolved to reject every proposition of the
Government might go home. He also informed them that no threats or
intimidation would be allowed, and that any one who should attempt
violence would be surely punished. Nearly all the Indians remained
or returned on Monday, and being apprised of the nature of the
proposition the undersigned intended to submit, namely, to exclude
that part of the island eastwardly of the Manitoulin Gulf and
Heywood Sound from the proposed agreement, they came to the
adjourned meeting in a more friendly mood and expressed their
willingness to surrender for sale and settlement all that part of
the island westwardly of the Gulf and Sound.
The undersigned submits herewith the deed or instrument which embodies
the agreement made and concluded between the respective parties. It
was executed by the undersigned and the Deputy-Superintendent of
Indian Affairs on behalf of the Government, and by nineteen of the
Chiefs and principal men on behalf of the Indians.
In consequence of the modification of the terms of agreement
authorized by the Order in Council as above-mentioned and the
addition of other terms deemed necessary to prevent future
difficulty, and which will be found in the instrument, the
undersigned caused a provision to be inserted that it was not to
take effect until approved by the Governor-General in Council.
The undersigned therefore now begs to submit the same for such
approval.
(Signed) WM. McDOUGALL,
Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs.
CHAPTER IV
THE STONE FORT AND MANITOBA POST TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO
In the year 1871, the late Honorable Joseph Howe, then Secretary of
State of Canada, recommended the appointment by the Privy Council
of Canada, of Mr. Wemyss McKenzie Simpson, as Indian Commissioner,
in consequence of "the necessity of arranging with the bands of
Indians inhabiting the tract of country between Thunder Bay and the
Stone Fort, for the cession, subject to certain reserves such as
they should select, of the lands occupied by them." Mr. Simpson
accepted the appointment, and in company with Messrs. S. J. Dawson
and Robert Pether visited the Ojjibewas or Chippawa Indians,
between Thunder Bay and the north-west angle of the Lake of the
Woods, and took the initiatory steps for securing a treaty with
them thereafter. On his arrival at Fort Garry, he put himself, as
directed by his instructions, in communication with his Honor, the
Hon. A. G. Archibald, then Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the
North-West Territories. A conference took place between His Honor,
Messrs. Simpson, Dawson and Pether, and the Hon. James McKay, a
member, at that time, of the Executive Council of Manitoba, and
himself a half-breed intimately acquainted with the Indian tribes,
and possessed of much influence over them. The Indians in Manitoba,
in the fall of 1870, had applied to the Lieutenant-Governor to
enter into a treaty with them, and had been informed that in the
ensuing year negotiations would be opened with them. They were
full of uneasiness, owing to the influx of population, denied
the validity of the Selkirk Treaty, and had in some instances
obstructed settlers and surveyors. In view of the anxiety and
uneasiness prevailing, those gentlemen were of opinion "that it was
desirable to secure the extinction of the Indian title not only
to the lands within Manitoba, but also to so much of the timber
grounds east and north of the Province as were required for
immediate entry and use, and also of a large tract of cultivable
ground west of the Portage, where there were very few Indian
inhabitants." It was therefore resolved to open negotiations at the
Lower Fort Garry, or Stone Fort, with the Indians of the Province,
and certain adjacent timber districts, and with the Indians of the
other districts at Manitoba Post, a Hudson's Bay fort, at the north
end of Lake Manitoba, the territory being occupied principally by
one nation, the Chippawas, of whom the Saulteaux of the lakes are a
branch, although there are also a number of Swampy Crees resident
within it.
Mr. Simpson accordingly issued proclamations, inviting the Indians
to meet him on the 25th of July and 17th of August, 1871, at
these points respectively, to negotiate an Indian treaty. The
Lieutenant-Governor also issued a proclamation forbidding the sale
or gift of intoxicating liquors during the negotiation of the
treaty, and applied to Major Irvine to detail a few of the troops
under his command to preserve order, which request was acceded to.
The Lieutenant-Governor and Mr. Simpson arrived at the Stone Fort
on the 24th of July, 1871, but as the Indians had not all arrived
the meeting was postponed till the 27th, when a thousand Indians
were found to have assembled, and a considerable number of
half-breeds and other inhabitants of the country were present,
awaiting with anxiety to learn the policy of the Government.
Lieutenant-Governor Archibald, after the Indians were assembled
opened the proceedings by delivering the following address:
"On the 13th September last, on my first arrival in the country,
I met a number of you at the mission, I told you I could not then
negotiate a Treaty with the Indians, but that I was charged by your
Great Mother, the Queen, to tell you that she had been very glad
to see that you had acted during the troubles like good and true
children of your Great Mother. I told you also that as soon as
possible you would all be called together to consider the terms of
a treaty to be entered into between you and your Great Mother.
"I advised you to disperse to your homes, and gave you some
ammunition to enable you to gain a livelihood during the winter
by hunting.
"I promised that in the spring you would be sent for, and that
either I, or some person directly appointed to represent your Great
Mother, should be here to meet you, and notice would be given you
when to convene at this place to talk over what was right to be
done.
"Early in the spring, Mr. Simpson, who sits beside me, was made
Commissioner. He left his home at once for this Province, by Rainy
Lake and the Lake of the Woods.
"The Indians of the lake districts meet, as you know, on Rainy
River yearly, about the 20th June, to fish for sturgeon, I and they
could not be called together sooner.
"Mr. Simpson met them there at that time, and talked over their
affairs with them, and made certain arrangements with them. He then
hurried on to see you, and reached this Province a week ago last
Sunday. He then sent messengers at once to all the Indians within
certain bounds, asking them to meet him here on the 25th day of
July. Some of you were unable to come so soon, and he has
therefore, at the instance of those who were here, waited till
to-day to open the talk. I believe that now you are all arrived,
and ready to proceed to business.
"It will be the duty of the Commissioner to talk to you on the
particular details of the treaty, and I will give place to him
presently, but there are one or two things of a general kind which
I would like, before I close, to bring to your notice, for you to
think about among yourselves.
"First. Your Great Mother, the Queen, wishes to do justice to all
her children alike. She will deal fairly with those of the setting
sun, just as she would with those of the rising sun. She wishes
order and peace to reign through all her country, and while her arm
is strong to punish the wicked man, her hand is also open to reward
the good man everywhere in her Dominions.
"Your Great Mother wishes the good of all races under her sway. She
wishes her red children to be happy and contented. She wishes them
to live in comfort. She would like them to adopt the habits of the
whites, to till land and raise food, and store it up against a
time of want. She thinks this would be the best thing for her red
children to do, that it would make them safer from famine and
distress, and make their homes more comfortable.
"But the Queen, though she may think it good for you to adopt
civilized habits, has no idea of compelling you to do so. This she
leaves to your choice, and you need not live like the white man
unless you can be persuaded to do so of your own free will. Many
of you, however, are already doing this.
"I drove yesterday through the village below this Fort. There I saw
many well-built houses, and many well-tilled fields with wheat and
barley and potatoes growing, and giving promise of plenty for the
winter to come. The people who till these fields and live in these
houses are men of your own race, and they shew that you can live
and prosper and provide like the white man.
"What I say in my drive is enough to prove that even if there was
not a buffalo or a fur bearing animal in the country, you could
live and be surrounded with comfort by what you can raise from
the soil.
"Your Great Mother, therefore, will lay aside for you 'lots' of
land to be used by you and your children forever. She will not
allow the white man to intrude upon these lots. She will make rules
to keep them for you, so that as long as the sun shall shine, there
shall be no Indian who has not a place that he can call his home,
where he can go and pitch his camp or if he chooses build his house
and till his land.
"These reserves will be large enough, but you must not expect them
to be larger than will be enough to give a farm to each family,
where farms shall be required. They will enable you to earn a
living should the chase fail, and should you choose to get your
living by tilling, you must not expect to have included in your
reserve more of hay grounds than will be reasonably sufficient for
your purposes in case you adopt the habits of farmers. The old
settlers and the settlers that are coming in, must be dealt with on
the principles of fairness and justice as well as yourselves. Your
Great Mother knows no difference between any of her people. Another
thing I want you to think over is this: in laying aside these
reserves, and in everything else that the Queen shall do for you,
you must understand that she can do for you no more than she has
done for her red children in the East. If she were to do more for
you that would be unjust for them. She will not do less for you
because you are all her children alike, and she must treat you all
alike.
"When you have made your treaty you will still be free to hunt over
much of the land included in the treaty. Much of it is rocky and
unfit for cultivation, much of it that is wooded is beyond the
places where the white man will require to go, at all events for
some time to come. Till these lands are needed for use you will
be free to hunt over them, and make all the use of them which you
have made in the past. But when lands are needed to be tilled or
occupied, you must not go on them any more. There will still be
plenty of land that is neither tilled nor occupied where you can
go and roam and hunt as you have always done, and, if you wish to
farm, you will go to your own reserve where you will find a place
ready for you to live on and cultivate.
"There is another thing I have to say to you. Your Great Mother
cannot come here herself to talk with you, but she has sent a
messenger who has her confidence.
"Mr. Simpson will tell you truly all her wishes. As the Queen has
made her choice of a chief to represent her, you must, on your
part, point out to us the chiefs you wish to represent you, as the
persons you have faith in.
"Mr. Simpson cannot talk to all your braves and people, but when he
talks to chiefs who have your confidence he is talking to you all,
and when he hears the voice of one of your chiefs whom you name he
will hear the voice of you all. It is for you to say who shall talk
for you, and also who shall be your chief men. Let them be good
Indians, who know your wishes and whom you have faith in.
"You will look to the Commissioner to fulfil everything he agrees
to do, and the Queen will look to the chiefs you name to us, to see
that you keep your parts of the agreement.
"It is our wish to deal with you fairly and frankly.
"If you have any questions to ask, ask them, if you have anything
you wish the Queen to know, speak out plainly.
"Now chiefs and braves and people, I introduce to you Mr. Simpson,
who will say anything he thinks fit in addition to what I have
said.
"When you hear his voice you are listening to your Great Mother the
Queen, whom God bless and preserve long to reign over us."
Mr. Simpson also addressed them, and thereafter, in compliance with
a request of the Lieutenant-Governor, the Indians retired to select
their chiefs and principal spokesmen.
On the next day the conference was resumed, the chiefs and
spokesmen being presented. The Indians, on being asked to express
their views, "stated that there was a cloud before them which made
things dark, and they did not wish to commence the proceedings till
the cloud was dispersed." On inquiry it was ascertained that they
referred to the imprisonment of four Swampy Cree Indians, who
had been convicted under a local law, of breach of contract, as
boatmen, with the Hudson's Bay Company, and on default of payment
of a fine, had been sent to prison. The Lieutenant-Governor, as a
matter of favor, ordered the release of these prisoners, and the
sky became clear. Next day the Indians met again and declared that
they would never again raise their voice against the enforcement
of the law, but much difficulty was experienced in getting them
to understand the views of the Government--they wishing to have
two-thirds of the Province as a reserve. Eventually on the 3rd
of August, 1871, a treaty was concluded, its principal features
being the relinquishment to Her Majesty of the Indian title; the
reserving of tracts of land for the Indians, sufficient to furnish
160 acres of land to each family of five; providing for the
maintenance of schools, and prohibition of the sale of intoxicating
liquors on the reserves; a present of three dollars per head to the
Indians and the payment to them of an annuity of three dollars per
head. [Footnote: In consequence of misunderstandings having arisen,
owing to the Indians alleging that certain promises had been made
to them which were not specified in these treaties, a revision of
them became necessary, and was effected in 1875, as will be seen
reported hereafter.] (See copy of treaty which will be found in
the Appendix.) On the 21st of August Mr. Commissioner Simpson,
accompanied by the Lieutenant-Governor, the Hon. James McKay,
and Mr. Molyneux St. John (lately Sheriff of the North-West
Territories), met the Indians at Manitoba Post, and found them
disposed to accept the terms of the treaty made at the Stone Fort,
with which they had already become familiar, so that little time
was lost in effecting a treaty with them as they had no special
terms to prefer. By these two treaties, there was acquired by the
Crown, the extinguishment of the Indian title in Manitoba, and in
a tract of country fully equal in resources beyond it.
Having submitted these preliminary remarks, I conclude my notice
of these treaties by quoting, as matter alike of historical record
and practical interest, the despatches of Lieutenant-Governor
Archibald and the excellent and instructive report, addressed to
the Secretary of State by Mr. Simpson, embracing as it does a full
and graphic narrative of the proceedings which took place at the
negotiation of these treaties, and of the difficulties which were
encountered by the Commissioner, and the mode in which they were
overcome.
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
SILVER HEIGHTS July 32nd, 1871.
Sir,--I have the honor to enclose you copy of a proclamation I have
caused to be issued with a view to prevent the danger arising from
intoxicating drinks being given to the Indians, on the occasion of
the meeting to negotiate a treaty.
I look upon the proceedings, we are now initiating as important
in their bearing upon our relations to the Indians of the whole
continent. In fact the terms we now agree upon will probably shape
the arrangements we shall have to make with all the Indians between
the Red River and the Rocky Mountains. It will therefore be well to
neglect nothing that is within our power to enable us to start
fairly with the negotiations.
With that view, I have, amongst other things, asked Major Irvine
to detail a few of his troops to be present at the opening of the
treaty. Military display has always a great effect on savages, and
the presence even of a few troops will have a good tendency.
I fear we shall have to incur a considerable expenditure for
presents of food, etc. during the negotiations; but any cost for
that purpose I shall deem a matter of minor consequence. The real
burden to be considered is that which has to be borne in each
recurring year.
I doubt if it will be found practicable to make arrangements upon
so favorable a basis as that prescribed by His Excellency the
Governor-General as the maximum to be allowed, in case of a treaty
with the Lake Indians.
Nor indeed would it be right, if we look to what we receive, to
measure the benefits we derive from coming into possession of the
magnificent territory we are appropriating here by what would be
fair to allow for the rocks and swamps and muskegs of the lake
country east of this Province.
But to this subject I shall probably take occasion to call your
attention at an early day.
I have etc.,
ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD.
THE HONORABLE
THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES,
Ottawa.
LOWER FORT GARRY, July 20th, 1871.
Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that on Monday last I came to
this Fort with the Commissioner to meet the Indians called here,
with a view to negotiate a treaty, intending to open the business
on Tuesday morning.
It appeared, however, on inquiry, that some bands of Indians had
not arrived on Tuesday morning, and we were therefore obliged to
postpone the opening of the meeting till Thursday. On that day the
Indians from all the sections of the country to which the
invitation extended were found present to the number of about one
thousand. A considerable body of half-breeds and other inhabitants
of the country were also present, awaiting with some anxiety to
learn what should be announced as the policy of the Government.
I enclose you a memorandum of the observations with which I opened
the meeting. On reading them you will observe one or two points
which may require some explanation.
At the time of the treaty with the Earl of Selkirk, certain Indians
signed as Chiefs and representatives of their people. Some of the
Indians now deny that these men ever were Chiefs or had authority
to sign the treaty.
With a view therefore to avoid a recurrence of any such question we
asked the Indians, as a first step, to agree among themselves in
selecting their Chiefs and then to present them to us and have
their names and authority recorded.
Furthermore, the Indians seem to have false ideas of the meaning
of a reserve. They have been led to suppose that large tracts of
ground were to be set aside for them as hunting grounds, including
timber lands, of which they might sell the wood as if they were
proprietors of the soil.
I wished to correct this idea at the outset.
Mr. Simpson followed me with some observations in the same strain,
after which the Indians retired to select their Chiefs and
spokesmen.
On Friday morning the Chiefs and spokesmen were duly presented,
and after their names were recorded, the Indians were invited to
express their views.
After some delay they stated that there was a cloud before them
which made things dark, and they did not wish to commence the
proceedings till the cloud was dispersed.
On inquiring into their meaning, I found that they were referring
to some four of their number who were prisoners in gaol. It seems
that some Swampy Indians had entered into a contract with the
Hudson's Bay Company as boatmen, and had deserted, and had been
brought up before magistrates under a local law of last session,
and fined, and in default of payment sent to prison for forty days.
Of this term some considerable part had expired. A few of the
offenders had paid their fines, but there were still four Indians
remaining in prison.
On learning the facts I told the Indians that I could not listen
to them if they made a demand for the release of the Indians as a
matter of right; that every subject of the Queen, whether Indian,
half-breed or white, was equal in the eye of the law; that every
offender against the law must be punished, whatever race he
belonged to; but I said that on the opening of negotiations with
them the Queen would like to see all her Indians taking part in
them, and if the whole body present were to ask as a matter of
grace and favor, under the circumstances, that their brethren
should be released, Her Majesty would be willing to consent to
their discharge; she would grant as a favor what she must refuse if
asked for on any other ground. They replied by saying that they
begged it as a matter of favor only. Thereupon I acceded to their
request, and directed the discharge of the four Indians. This was
received with great satisfaction. I explained again, that there
might be no misunderstanding about it, that henceforth every
offender against the law must be punished. They all expressed their
acquiescence in what I said. The discharge of the prisoners had an
excellent effect.
Next morning the Indians, through one of their spokesmen, declared
in presence of the whole body assembled that from this time they
would never raise their voice against the law being enforced. After
the order of the release, the Chiefs and spokesmen addressed us
questions were asked and answered, and some progress made in the
negotiations. Eventually the meeting adjourned till this morning
at ten o'clock.
A general acquiescence in the views laid down by Mr. Simpson and
myself was expressed, but it was quite clear by the proceedings of
to-day, that our views were imperfectly apprehended. When we met
this morning, the Indians were invited to state their wishes as
to the reserves, they were to say how much they thought would be
sufficient, and whether they wished them all in one or in several
places.
In defining the limits of their reserves, so far as we could see,
they wished to have about two-thirds of the Province. We heard them
out, and then told them it was quite clear that they had entirely
misunderstood the meaning and intention of reserves. We explained
the object of these in something like the language of the
memorandum enclosed, and then told them it was of no use for
them to entertain any such ideas, which were entirely out of
the question. We told them that whether they wished it or not,
immigrants would come in and fill up the country; that every year
from this one twice as many in number as their whole people there
assembled would pour into the Province, and in a little while would
spread all over it, and that now was the time for them to come to
an arrangement that would secure homes and annuities for themselves
and their children.
We told them that what we proposed to allow them was an extent of
one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that
proportion; that they might have their land where they chose,
not interfering with existing occupants, that we should allow an
annuity of twelve dollars for every family of five, or in that
proportion per head. We requested them to think over these
propositions till Monday morning.
If they thought it better to have no treaty at all, they might do
without one, but they must make up their minds; if there was to be
a treaty, it must be on a basis like that offered.
That under some such arrangements, the Indians in the east were
living happy and contented enjoying themselves, drawing their
annuities, and satisfied with their position.
The observations seemed to command the acquiescence of the
majority, and on Monday morning we hope to meet them in a better
frame for the discussion and settlement of the treaty.
I have, etc.,
ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD.
The Honorable
The Secretary of State for the Provinces.
LOWER FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, July 30th, 1871.
Sir,--I have the honor to inform you, for the information of His
Excellency the Governor-General, that I arrived in this Province on
the 16th instant, and, after consultation with the Lieutenant-Governor
of Manitoba, determined upon summoning the Indians of this part of the
country to a conference for the purpose of negotiating a treaty at
Lower Fort Garry, on Tuesday, the 25th instant, leaving for a future
date the negotiation with the Indians westward of and outside of the
Province of Manitoba.
Proclamations were issued, and every means taken to insure the
attendance of the Indians, and on Monday, the 24th instant, I
proceeded to Lower Fort Garry, where I met His Excellency the
Lieutenant-Governor.
On Tuesday, finding that only a small portion of the Indians had
arrived, we held a preliminary conference with Henry Prince--the
Chief of the Swampies and Chippewas residing on what is known as
the Indian Reserve, between Lower Fort Garry and Lake Winnipeg--at
which we arranged a meeting for the next day at twelve o'clock, for
the purpose of ascertaining the names of the Chiefs and head men of
the several tribes. At this preliminary conference, Henry Prince
said that he could not then enter upon any negotiations, as he was
not empowered to speak or act for those bands of Indians not then
present.
In the meantime it was found necessary to feed the Indians
assembled here, and accordingly provisions were purchased and
rations served out.
On Wednesday, the 26th, His Excellency the Lieutenant-Governor and
myself met those Indians who had arrived, in council, and addressed
them with the view of explaining the purport of my commission, and
the matters which were to form the subject of a treaty.
It having been reported that the Indians who had not then arrived
were on their road here, we agreed that another meeting should take
place on the following day, at which the Chiefs and head men were
to be presented to us.
On Thursday, pursuant to appointment, we again met the Indians,
when the Chiefs and head men of the several bands present were
named and presented. I then explained to them the nature of
Indian reserves, and desired them to determine, in council among
themselves, the locality in which they desired their reserves to
be laid out.
On Friday, the 28th, we again met the Indians, but they were not
then prepared to state their demands, and another meeting was
appointed for Saturday.
On Saturday, the 29th, we again met them, all having by this time
arrived. When the subject of reserves came up, it was found that
the Indians had misunderstood the object of these reservations, for
their demands in this respect were utterly out of the question.
After a prolonged discussion with them, I consulted with the
Lieutenant-Governor, and determined to let them at once understand
the terms that I was prepared to offer and I pointed out that the
terms offered were those which would receive Her Majesty's consent.
On further explanation of the subject, the Indians appeared to be
satisfied, and willing to acquiesce in our arrangements as
hereinafter mentioned, and having given them diagrams showing the
size of the lots they would individually become possessed of, and
having informed them of the amount of their annuity, it was finally
settled that they should meet on Monday, the 31st and acquaint me
with their decision.
The reserves will comprise sufficient land to give each family of
five persons one hundred and sixty acres, or in like proportion
together with an annual payment in perpetuity of twelve dollars
for each family of five persons, or in like proportion.
As far as I can judge, I am inclined to think that the Indians will
accept these terms.
I am happy to be able to say that the precautions taken to prevent
the introduction of liquor amongst the Indians have been wholly
successful, and that perfect order and contentment have prevailed
up to the present time.
I have etc.
WEMYSS M. SIMPSON,
Indian Commissioner.
The Honorable
The Secretary of State for the Provinces,
Ottawa.
OTTAWA, November 3rd, 1871.
TO THE HONORABLE
THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES,
Ottawa
Sir,--I have the honor to submit to you, for the information of
His Excellency the Governor-General, a report of my negotiations
with the Indians of the Province of Manitoba, and with certain of
the Indians of the North-West Territory, entered upon by me, in
accordance with your instructions, dated 3rd May, 1871.
Having, in association with S. J. Dawson, Esq., and Robert Pether,
Esq., effected a preliminary arrangement with the Indians of Rainy
Lake, the particulars of which I have already had the honor of
reporting to you in my Report, dated July 11th, 1871, I proceeded
by the Lake of the Woods and Dawson Road to Fort Garry, at which
place I arrived on the 16th July.
Bearing in mind your desire that I should confer with the
Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, I called upon Mr. Archibald, and
learned from him that the Indians were anxiously awaiting my
arrival, and were much excited on the subject of their lands being
occupied without attention being first given to their claims for
compensation. Amongst the settlers, also, an uneasy feeling
existed, arising partly from the often-repeated demands of the
Indians for a treaty with themselves, and partly from the fact that
certain settlers in the neighborhood of Portage la Prairie and
other parts of the Province, had been warned by the Indians not to
cut wood or otherwise take possession of the lands upon which they
were squatting. The Indians, it appeared, consented to their
remaining on their holdings until sufficient time had been allowed
for my arrival, and the conclusion of a treaty; but they were
unwilling to allow the settlers the free use of the country for
themselves or their cattle. Mr. Archibald and those residents in
the Province of Manitoba with whom I conversed on the subject,
appeared to think that no time should be lost in meeting the
Indians, as some assurances had already been given them that a
treaty would be made with them during the summer of 1871; and I
therefore, at once, issued notices calling certain of the Indians
together, naming two places at which I would meet them. The first
meeting, to which were asked the Indians of the Province and
certain others on the eastern side, was to be held on the 25th of
July, at the Stone Fort, a Hudson's Bay Company's Post, situated
on the Red River, about twenty miles northward of Fort Garry--a
locality chosen as being the most central for those invited. The
second meeting was appointed to be held on August 17th, at Manitoba
Post, a Hudson's Bay Company's Post, at the north-west extremity of
Lake Manitoba, as it was deemed that such of the bands of Indians
residing without the limits of the Province of Manitoba, as I
purposed to deal with at present, would meet there more readily
than elsewhere.
On Monday, the 24th of July, I met the Lieutenant-Governor of
Manitoba at the Stone Fort; but negotiations were unavoidably
delayed, owing to the fact that only one band of Indians had
arrived, and that until all were on the spot those present declined
to discuss the subject of a treaty, except in an informal manner.
Amongst these, as amongst other Indians with whom I have come in
contact, there exists great jealousy of one another, in all matters
relating to their communications with the officials of Her Majesty;
and in order to facilitate the object in view, it was most
desirable that suspicion and jealousy of all kinds should be
allayed. The fact of the Commissioner having arrived was sufficient
evidence of the good intentions of Her Majesty's Government, and it
seemed better to await the arrival of all whom I had summoned, than
to press matters to an issue while any were absent. This, however,
entailed the necessity of feeding those who were already there, and
others as they arrived.
It is customary in dealing with Indians to do so, and in this case
it was absolutely necessary, for, obviously, it would have been
impossible to invite those people from a distance, and then leave
them to starve at our doors, or, in search of food, to plunder the
neighborhood into which they had been introduced. At that season of
the year the Indians were not engaged in fishing or hunting, and
consequently large numbers of men, women and children attended at
the place of meeting, for all of whom food was provided. The price
of provisions, even at the lowest price for which they could be
obtained, was high, pork being fifty dollars a barrel, and flour
twenty shillings sterling per hundred, and such cattle as I was
able to purchase L16 per head, so that the expense of keeping
the Indians during the negotiation of treaty and payment of the
gratuity, which lasted eleven days, forms no small share of the
total expenditure. In addition to this expense, it was thought
necessary by the Lieutenant-Governor that Major Irvine commanding
the troops at Fort Garry should be requested to furnish a guard at
the Stone Fort during the negotiations, and that there should be at
hand, also, a force of constabulary, for the purpose of preventing
the introduction of liquor amongst the Indian encampments. Other
expenses of a somewhat similar nature were incurred, which would be
totally unnecessary upon any future occasion of payment being made
to the Indians of Manitoba. I may here refer to the apparently
prolonged duration of the first negotiation, and explain, in
reference thereto, the causes, or some of them, that entailed the
loss of time and attendant expense. For some time a doubt has
existed whether the Chief, nominally at the head of the Indians of
the Indian settlement, possessed the good will and confidence of
that band; and I thought it advisable to require that the several
bands of Indians should select such Chiefs as they thought proper,
and present these men as their authorized Chiefs, before anything
was said as to the terms of a treaty. The Indians having acquiesced
in this proposal, forthwith proceeded to such election; but the
proceeding apparently involved discussion and consideration amongst
themselves, and two days elapsed before the men chosen were
presented for recognition, and the business of the meeting
commenced.
When the peculiar circumstances surrounding the position of the
Indians of the Province were pointed out, the future of the country
predicted, and the views and intentions of the Government explained
by the Lieutenant-Governor and myself, the Indians professed a
desire for time to think over what had been said before making any
reply; and when their answer came it proved to contain demands of
such an exorbitant nature, that much time was spent in reducing
their terms to a basis upon which an arrangement could be made.
Every band had its spokesman in addition to its Chief, and each
seemed to vie with another in the dimensions of their requirements.
I may mention, as an illustration, that in the matter of reserves,
the quantity of land demanded for each band amounted to about three
townships per Indian, and included the greater part of the settled
portions of the Province. It was not until the 3rd of August, or
nine days after the first meeting, that the basis of arrangement
was arrived at, upon which is founded the treaty of that date.
Then, and by means of mutual concessions, the following terms were
agreed upon. For the cession of the country described in the treaty
referred to, and comprising the Province of Manitoba, and certain
country in the north-east thereof, every Indian was to receive a
sum of three dollars a year in perpetuity, and a reserve was to he
set apart for each band, of sufficient size to allow one hundred
and sixty acres to each family of five persons, or in like
proportion as the family might be greater or less than five. As
each Indian settled down upon his share of the reserve, and
commenced the cultivation of his land, he was to receive a plough
and harrow. Each Chief was to receive a cow and a male and female
of the smaller kinds of animals bred upon a farm. There was to be
a bull for the general use of each reserve. In addition to this,
each Chief was to receive a dress, a flag and a medal, as marks of
distinction; and each Chief, with the exception of Bozawequare, the
Chief of the Portage band, was to receive a buggy, or light spring
waggon. Two councillors and two braves of each band were to receive
a dress, somewhat inferior to that provided for the Chiefs, and
the braves and councillors of the Portage band excepted, were to
receive a buggy. Every Indian was to receive a gratuity of three
dollars, which, though given as a payment for good behaviour, was
to be understood to cover all dimensions for the past.
On this basis the treaty was signed by myself and the several Chiefs,
on behalf of themselves and their respective bands, on the 3rd of
August, 1871, and on the following day the payment commenced.
The three dollars gratuity, above referred to, will not occur in
the ordinary annual payments to the Indians of Manitoba, and,
though doubling the amount paid this year, may now properly be
regarded as belonging to a previous year, but only now liquidated.
A large number of Indians, entitled to share in the treaty, were
absent on the 3rd August, and in the belief that I should, almost
immediately, be able to obtain a more accurate knowledge than I
possessed of the numbers of the several bands, I paid to each
person present only three dollars--the gratuity--postponing for
a short time the first annual payment. Having completed this
disbursement, I prepared to start for Manitoba Post, to open
negotiations with the Indians on the immediate north and north-west
borders of the Province of Manitoba, promising however to visit the
several bands of the first treaty, in their own districts, and to
there pay them. By this means the necessity for their leaving their
own homes, and for the Government's feeding them while they were
being paid, and during their journey home, was avoided.
After completing the treaty at Manitoba Post, of which mention
is herein after made, I visited Portage la Prairie, the Indian
settlement at St. Peter's, Riviere Marais, and the Town of
Winnipeg, according to my promise, and at each place, with the
exception of Riviere Marais, found the Indians satisfied with the
treaty and awaiting their payment. At Riviere Marais, which was
the rendezvous appointed by the bands living in the neighborhood
of Pembina, I found that the Indians had either misunderstood the
advice given them by parties in the settlement, well disposed
towards the treaty, or, as I have some reason to believe had become
unsettled by the representations made by persons in the vicinity
of Pembina, whose interests lay elsewhere than in the Province of
Manitoba; for, on my announcing my readiness to pay them, they
demurred at receiving their money until some further concessions
had been made by me.
With a view to inducing the Indians to adopt the habits and labors
of civilization, it had been agreed, at the signing of the treaty
as before mentioned, to give certain animals as a nucleus for
stocking the several reserves, together with certain farming
implements; and it was now represented to me by the spokesman of
the bands, that as the Queen had, with that kindness of heart which
distinguished her dealings with her red children, expressed a
desire to see the Indians discard their former precarious mode of
living and adopt the agricultural pursuits of the white man, they
were desirous of acceding to the wish of their great Mother, and
were now prepared to receive the gifts she had been good enough to
speak of, through her Commissioner, in full. But, as it could make
no difference whatever to their great Mother whether these things
were given in kind or in money value, her red children of the
Pembina bands were resolved to receive them in the latter form.
I had put a valuation upon all the articles mentioned in the
supplement to the treaty, and could go no further in the matter
unless I was prepared to pay them for all these articles at the
rates they would now proceed to mention. I declined to comply
with the request, and they declined to receive their first annual
payment, whereupon I broke up my camp and returned to Winnipeg. As
I foresaw at the time this determination on their part was shortly
repented, and a number of their leading men were subsequently paid
at Winnipeg, while at the request of the Indians, the money for the
remainder, together with a pay sheet, was forwarded to the officer
in charge of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post at Pembina, with
instructions to pay the Indians as per list as each might present
himself. At Portage la Prairie, although the number paid at the
Stone Fort was largely increased, there still remained many who,
from absence or other causes, were not paid, and by the request of
the Chief the money was left for these with the officers in charge
of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post, in the same manner as was done
for the Pembina bands.
As I was unable to proceed to Fort Alexander, the payments for the
Indians or for such of them as were present at the signing of the
treaty, were sent in like manner to the officer in charge of the
Hudson's Bay Company's Post at Fort Alexander; but it may be as
well to mention that the number so paid will fall far short of the
total number belonging to that place. The latter remark will apply
to the Pembina band, for their payment was sent as per gratuity
list, and there must necessarily have been others who did not
receive payment. All these must receive their back payments during
the course of next year.
During the payment of the several bands, it was found that in some,
and most notably in the Indian settlement and Broken Head River
Band, a number of those residing among the Indians, and calling
themselves Indians, are in reality half-breeds, and entitled to
share in the land grant under the provisions of the Manitoba Act.
I was most particular, therefore, in causing it to be explained,
generally and to individuals, that any person now electing to be
classed with Indians, and receiving the Indian pay and gratuity,
would, I believed, thereby forfeit his or her right to another
grant as a half-breed; and in all cases where it was known that
a man was a half-breed, the matter, as it affected himself and
his children, was explained to him, and the choice given him to
characterize himself. A very few only decided upon taking their
grants as half-breeds. The explanation of this apparent sacrifice
is found in the fact that the mass of these persons have lived all
their lives on the Indian reserves (so called), and would rather
receive such benefits as may accrue to them under the Indian
treaty, than wait the realization of any value in their half-breed
grant.
The Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba having expressed a desire to
be present at the negotiation of the treaty at Manitoba Post. His
Honor, accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, proceeded thither
with me, in company with Mr. Molyneux St. John, the Clerk of the
Legislative Assembly of Manitoba, who had assisted me in the duties
connected with the former treaty and payments. I left Winnipeg on
the 13th August, but owing to adverse winds on Lake Manitoba did
not arrive until two days after the time appointed. I found that,
in the meanwhile, the officer in charge of the Hudson's Bay
Company's Post had been obliged to give some provisions to the
Indians pending my arrival, but on my speaking to the leading men
of the bands assembled, it was evident that the Indians of this
part had no special demands to make, but having a knowledge of the
former treaty, desired to be dealt with in the same manner and on
the same terms as those adopted by the Indians of the Province of
Manitoba.
The negotiation with these bands therefore occupied little time and
on the 21st August, 1871, a treaty was concluded by which a tract
of country three times as large as the Province of Manitoba was
surrendered by the Indians to the Crown. Payment in full, that is
to say, the gratuity and the first payment, was at once made; and
I have since written to the officers in charge of the Hudson's Bay
Company's Posts within the tract above referred to, requesting them
to procure for me a reliable census of the Indians, parties to this
treaty.
I have referred to the cost of effecting these treaties, and
remarked that it will prove to be exceptional. It may be regarded
as entirely so, as far as the Indians with whom the dealings were
held are concerned. In the future the annual payment will be only
one-half to each Indian of the amount paid this year, for the
gratuity was the same as the payment, and the heavy expense of
feeding the Indians while at the place of meeting and on their
journey home, will be avoided by the payment being made at or near
their own reserves.
All the collateral expenses, therefore, of this year, including
dresses, medals, presents to the Indians, etc., etc., will not
appear in the expenses attending during future payments.
But it is to be remembered that a large number of Indians, whose
lands were ceded by the second treaty, were not present. The
distance from the hunting grounds of some to Manitoba Post is
very great; but while their absence was to be regretted for some
reasons, it effected a very considerable saving in the item of
provisions.
During the ensuing season, these persons will probably be found at
the place where the payments will be made, and will then require
their payments as if they had been present at the signing of the
treaty.
Of the land ceded in the Province of Manitoba, it will be hardly
necessary for me to speak, as His Excellency the Governor-General
is already in possession of accurate information touching its
fertility and resources; but I may observe that, valuable as are
these lands, they are fully equalled if not exceeded by the country
of which the Government now comes into possession by virtue of
the treaty concluded at Manitoba Post. Already settlers from the
Provinces in Canada and elsewhere are pushing their way beyond the
limits of the Province of Manitoba; and there is nothing but the
arbitrary limits of that Province, and certain wood and water
advantages found in the territory beyond it, to distinguish one
part of the country from the other. The fertility that is possessed
by Manitoba is shared by the country and its confines. The water
courses of the Province are excelled by those of the territory; and
the want of wood which threatens serious difficulty in the one is
by no means so apparent in the other.
The Indians of both parts have a firm belief in the honor and
integrity of Her Majesty's representatives, and are fully impressed
with the idea that the amelioration of their present condition
is one of the objects of Her Majesty in making these treaties.
Although many years will elapse before they can be regarded as a
settled population--settled in the sense of following agricultural
pursuits--the Indians have already shown a disposition to provide
against the vicissitudes of the chase by cultivating small patches
of corn and potatoes. Moreover, in the Province of Manitoba, where
labor is scarce, Indians give great assistance in gathering in the
crops. At Portage la Prairie, both Chippawas and Sioux were largely
employed in the grain field; and in other parishes I found many
farmers whose employes were nearly all Indians.
Although serious trouble has from time to time occurred across the
boundary line, with Indians of the same tribes, and indeed of the
same bands as those in Manitoba, there is no reason to fear any
trouble with those who regard themselves as subjects of Her
Majesty. Their desire is to live at peace with the white man, to
trade with him, and, when they are disposed, to work for him; and I
believe that nothing but gross injustice or oppression will induce
them either to forget the allegiance which they now claim with
pride, or molest the white subjects of the sovereign whom they
regard as their Supreme Chief.
The system of an annual payment in money I regard as a good one,
because the recipient is enabled to purchase just what he requires
when he can get it most cheaply, and it also enables him to buy
articles at second hand, from settlers and others, that are quite
as useful to him as are the same things when new. The sum of three
dollars does not appear to be large enough to enable an Indian to
provide himself with many of his winter necessaries; but as he
receives the same amount for his wife or wives, and for each of his
children, the aggregate sum is usually sufficient to procure many
comforts for his family which he would otherwise be compelled to
deny himself.
* * * * *
I take this opportunity of acknowledging the assistance afforded
me in successfully completing the two treaties, to which I have
referred, by His Honor the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, the
Hon. James McKay, and the officers of the Hudson's Bay Company. In
a country where transport and all other business facilities are
necessarily so scarce, the services rendered to the Government by
the officers in charge of the several Hudson's Bay Posts has been
most opportune and valuable.
I have, etc.,
WEMYSS M. SIMPSON,
Indian Commissioner.
CHAPTER V
TREATY NUMBER THREE, OR THE NORTH-WEST ANGLE TREATY
In the year 1871 the Privy Council of Canada issued a joint
commission to Messrs. W. M. Simpson, S. J. Dawson and W. J. Pether,
authorizing them to treat with the Ojibbeway Indians for the
surrender to the Crown of the lands they inhabited--covering the
area from the watershed of Lake Superior to the north-west angle of
the Lake of the Woods, and from the American border to the height
of land from which the streams flow towards the Hudson's Bay. This
step had become necessary in order to make the route known as "the
Dawson route," extending from Prince Arthur's Landing on Lake
Superior to the north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, which
was then being opened up, "secure for the passage of emigrants
and of the people of the Dominion generally," and also to enable
the Government to throw open for settlement any portion of the
land which might be susceptible of improvement and profitable
occupation. The Commissioners accepted the appointment, and in
July, 1871, met the Indians at Fort Francis.
The tribes preferred claims for right of way through their country.
The Commissioners reported "that they had admitted these to a
limited extent and had made them presents in provisions and
clothing and were also to pay them a small amount in money, it
being fully and distinctly understood by the Indians that these
presents and clothing were accepted by them as an equivalent for
all past claims whatever." The Commissioners having explained to
them fully the intentions of the Government as to obtaining a
surrender of their territorial rights, and giving in return
therefor reserves of land and annual payments, asked them to
consider the proposals calmly* and meet the Commissioners the
succeeding summer to come to an arrangement. In 1872, the Indians
were found not to be ready for the making of a treaty and the
subject was postponed. In the year 1873 a commission was issued to
the Hon. Alexander Morris, then Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and
the North-West Territories, Lieut.-Col. Provencher, who had in the
interval been appointed Commissioner of Indian Affairs in the place
of Mr. Simpson, who had resigned, and Lindsay Russell Esq., but
the latter being unable to act, Mr. Dawson, now M.P. for Algoma,
was appointed Commissioner in his stead. These Commissioners
having accepted the duty confided to them, met the Indians at the
north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods in the end of September,
1873, and, after protracted and difficult negotiations, succeeded
in effecting a treaty with them. A copy of the treaty will be
found in the Appendix, and a brief record of the utterances of
the Indians and of the Commissioners, which was taken down in
short hand by one of the soldiers of the militia force, is hereto
subjoined. This treaty was one of great importance, as it not
only tranquilized the large Indian population affected by it, but
eventually shaped the terms of all the treaties, four, five, six
and seven, which have since been made with the Indians of the
North-West Territories--who speedily became apprised of the
concessions which had been granted to the Ojibbeway nation. The
closing scenes were striking and impressive. The chief speaker,
Mawe-do-pe-nais, thus winding up the conference on the part of
the Indians, in his final address to the Lieutenant-Governor and
his fellow Commissioners:
"Now you see me stand before you all: what has been done here to
day has been done openly before the Great Spirit and before the
nation, and I hope I may never hear any one say that this treaty
has been done secretly: and now in closing this council, I take off
my glove, and in giving you my hand I deliver over my birthright
and lands: and in taking your hand I hold fast all the promises you
have made, and I hope they will last as long as the sun rises and
the water flows, as you have said."
The conference then adjourned, and on re-assembling, after the
treaty had been read and explained, the Commissioners signed it
and the Lieutenant-Governor called on an aged hereditary Chief,
Kee-ta-kay-pi-nais, to sign next. The Chief came forward, but declined
to touch the pen, saying, "I must first have the money in my hand."
The Lieutenant-Governor immediately held out his hand and directed the
interpreter to say to the chief, "Take my hand and feel the money in
it. If you cannot trust me for half an hour do not trust me forever."
When this was repeated by the interpreter, the Chief smiled, took
the out-stretched hand, and at once touched the pen, while his mark
was being made, his last lingering distrust having been effectively
dispelled by this prompt action and reply. The other Chiefs followed,
and then the interpreter was directed to tell Kee-ta-kay-pi-nais,
the Chief, that he would be paid forthwith, but the Chief at once
replied, "Oh no, it is evening now, and I will wait till to-morrow."
The payments were duly made next day, and so was closed, a treaty,
whereby a territory was enabled to be opened up, of great importance
to Canada, embracing as it does the Pacific Railway route to the
North-West Territories--a wide extent of fertile lands, and, as is
believed, great mineral resources. I now quote the official despatch
of the Lieutenant-Governor, dated the 14th October, 1873, in which
will be found, a full narrative of the proceedings, connected with the
treaty, and a statement of the results thereby effected. I also submit
a short-hand report of the negotiations connected with the treaty.
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
FORT GARRY, October 14th, 1873.
Sir,--I have the honor to enclose copy of a treaty made by myself,
Lieut.-Col. Provencher, Indian agent and S. J. Dawson, Esq.,
Commissioner, acting on behalf of Her Majesty, of the one part,
and the Saulteaux tribe of Ojibbeway Indians on the other, at the
North-West Angle of the Lake of the Woods, on the 3rd of October,
for the relinquishment of the Indian title to the tract of land
therein described and embracing 55,000 square miles. In the first
place, the holding of the negotiation of the treaty had been
appointed by you to take place at the North-West Angle before you
requested me to take part therein, and Mr. Dawson had obtained the
consent of the Indians to meet there on the 10th of September, but
they afterwards changed their minds, and refused to meet me unless
I came to Fort Francis. I refused to do this, as I felt that the
yielding to the demand of the Indians in this respect, would
operate injuriously to the success of the treaty, and the results
proved the correctness of the opinion I had formed. I therefore
sent a special agent (Mr. Pierre Levaillier) to warn them that I
would meet them as arranged at the North-West Angle on the 25th,
or not at all this year, to which they eventually agreed.
I left here for the Angle on the 23rd September and arrived there
on the 25th, when I was joined by Messrs. Provencher and Dawson the
last named of whom I was glad to find had been associated with the
Commissioners in consequence of the resignation of Mr. Lindsey
Russell, thereby giving us the benefit as well of his knowledge of
the country to be dealt with, as of the several bands of Indians
therein. Mr. Pether, of Fort Francis, was also in attendance, and
Mr. Provencher was accompanied by Mr. St. John, of his department.
On arriving, the Indians, who were already there, came up to the
house I occupied, in procession, headed by braves bearing a banner
and a Union Jack, and accompanied by others beating drums. They
asked leave to perform a dance in my honor, after which they
presented to me the pipe of peace. They were then supplied with
provisions and returned to their camp. As the Indians had not all
arrived, and for other reasons, the 26th, 27th and 28th were passed
without any progress but on the 29th I sent them word that they
must meet the Commissioners next morning. Accordingly, on the 30th,
they met us in a tent, the use of which I had obtained from the
military authorities. I explained to them the object of the
meeting, but as they informed me that they were not ready to confer
with us, I adjourned the meeting until next day. On the 1st October
they again assembled. The principal cause of the delay was
divisions and jealousies among themselves. The nation had not met
for many years, and some of them had never before been assembled
together. They were very jealous of each other, and dreaded any of
the Chiefs having individual communications with me, to prevent
which they had guards on the approaches to my house and Mr.
Dawson's tent. On the 2nd October they again assembled, when I
again explained the object of the meeting, through Mr. McPherson,
an intelligent half-breed trader, whose services I secured. M.
Chatelan, the Government interpreter, was also present. They had
selected three spokesmen, and had also an Indian reporter, whose
duty was to commit to memory all that was said. They had also
secured the services of M. Joseph Nolin, of Point du Chene, to
take notes in French of the negotiations, a copy of which notes I
obtained from him and herewith enclose. The spokesmen informed me
they would not treat as to the land until we settled with them as
to the Dawson route, with regard to which they alleged Mr. Dawson
had made promises which had not been kept, and that they had not
been paid for the wood used in building the steamers, nor for the
use of the route itself. Mr. Dawson explained that he had paid them
for cutting wood, but had always asserted a common right to the use
of wood and the water way. He asked them what promise had not been
kept, and pointed out that the Government had twice before
endeavored to treat with them for a settlement of all matters. He
referred them to me as to the general question of the use of the
route. They were unable to name any promises which had not been
kept. Thereupon I told them I came on behalf of the Queen and the
Government of the Dominion of Canada to treat with them with regard
to the lands and all other matters, but that they refused to hear
what I had to say; they had closed my mouth; and as we would not
treat except for the settlement of all matters past and future I
could not speak unless they asked me to do so. They conferred among
themselves, and seeing that we were quite firm, the spokesman came
forward and said that they would not close my mouth, after which
they would make their demands. The Commissioners had had a
conference and agreed, as they found there was no hope of a treaty
for a less sum, to offer five dollars per head, a present of ten
dollars, and reserves of farming and other lands not exceeding one
square mile per family of five, or in that proportion, sums within
the limits of our instructions, though I had private advices if
possible not to give the maximum sum named, as the Government had
been under a misapprehension as to amounts given to the bands in
the United States. The Chiefs heard my proposal, and the meeting
adjourned until next day. On the 3rd October the Chiefs again
assembled and made a counter proposition, of which I enclose a
copy, being the demand they have urged since 1869. I also enclose
an estimate I had made of the money value of the demand, amounting
to $125,000 per annum. On behalf of the Commissioners I at once
peremptorily refused the demand. The spokesmen returned to the
Chiefs, who were arranged on benches, the people sitting on the
ground behind them, and on their return they informed me that the
Chiefs, warriors and braves were of one mind, that they would make
a treaty only if we acceded to their demand. I told them if so the
conference was over, that I would return and report that they had
refused to make a reasonable treaty, that hereafter I would treat
with those bands who were willing to treat, but that I would advise
them to return to the council and reconsider their determination
before next morning, when, if not, I should certainly leave. This
brought matters to a crisis. The Chief of the Lac Seul band came
forward to speak. The others tried to prevent him, but he was
secured a hearing. He stated that he represented four hundred
people in the north, that they wished a treaty, that they wished a
school-master to be sent them to teach their children the knowledge
of the white man; that they had begun to cultivate the soil and
were growing potatoes and Indian corn, but wished other grain for
seed and some agricultural implements and cattle. This Chief spoke
under evident apprehension as to the course he was taking in
resisting the other Indians, and displayed much good sense and
moral courage. He was followed by the Chief "Blackstone," who
urged the other Chiefs to return to the council and consider my
proposals, stating that he was ready to treat, though he did not
agree to my proposals nor to those made to me. I then told them
that I had known all along they were not united as they had said;
that they ought not to allow a few Chiefs to prevent a treaty, and
that I wished to treat with them as a nation and not with separate
bands, as they would otherwise compel me to do, and therefore urged
them to return to their council, promising to remain another day to
give them time for consideration. They spent the night in council,
and next morning having received a message from M. Charles Nolin, a
French half-breed, that they were becoming more amenable to reason,
I requested the Hon. James McKay (who went to the Angle three times
to promote this treaty), Charles Nolin and Pierre Levaillier to go
down to the Indian Council, and as men of their own blood, give
them friendly advice. They accordingly did so, and were received
by the Indians, and in about half an hour afterwards were followed
by Messrs. Provencher and St. John, who also took part in the
interview with the Council of Chiefs. The Chiefs were summoned to
the conference by the sound of a bugle and again met us, when they
told me that the determination to adhere to their demands had been
so strong a bond that they did not think it could be broken, but
they had now determined to see if I would give them anything more.
The Commissioners had had a conference, and agreed previously to
offer a small sum for ammunition and twine for nets, yearly--a few
agricultural implements and seeds, for any band actually farming
or commencing to farm, and to increase the money payment by two
dollars per head if it should be found necessary in order to secure
a treaty, maintaining a permanent annuities at the sum fixed. The
Indians on the other hand had determined on asking fifteen dollars,
with some other demands. In fixing the ten dollars the Commissioners
had done so as a sum likely to be accepted in view of three dollars
per head having been paid the Indians the first year the Dawson route
was used, and that they had received nothing since. In reply to the
Indians, I told them I was glad that they had reconsidered their
decision, and that as they had done so, being desirous of inducing
them to practice agriculture and to have the means of getting food
if their fishing and hunting failed, we would give them certain
implements, cattle and grain, once for all, and the extra two dollars
per head of a money payment. This proposal was received favorably, but
the spokesmen again came forward and said they had some questions to
ask before accepting my proposal. They wanted suits of clothing every
year for all the bands, and fifty dollars for every Chief annually.
This I declined, but told them that there were some presents of
clothing and food which would be given them this year at the close of
treaty. They then asked free passes forever over the Canada Pacific
Railway, which I refused. They then asked that no "fire-water" should
be sold on their reserves, and I promised that a regulation to this
effect should be introduced into the treaty. They then asked that they
should not be sent to war, and I told them the Queen was not in the
habit of employing the Indians in warfare. They asked that they should
have power to put turbulent men off their reserves, and I told them
the law would be enforced against such men. They asked what reserves
would be given them, and were informed by Mr. Provencher that reserves
of farming and other lands would be given them as previously stated,
and that any land actually in cultivation by them would be respected.
They asked if the mines would be theirs; I said if they were found on
their reserves it would be to their benefit, but not otherwise. They
asked if an Indian found a mine would he be paid for it, I told them
he could sell his information if he could find a purchaser like any
other person. They explained that some of their children had married
in the States, and they wished them to return and live among them, and
wanted them included in the treaty. I told them the treaty was not for
American Indians, but any bona fide British Indians of the class they
mentioned who should within two years be found resident on British
soil would be recognized.
They said there were some ten to twenty families of half-breeds who
were recognized as Indians and lived with them, and they wished
them included. I said the treaty was not for whites, but I would
recommend that those families should be permitted the option of
taking either status as Indians or whites, but that they could not
take both. They asked that Mr. Charles Nolin should be employed as
an Indian Agent, and I stated that I would submit his name to the
Government with favorable mention of his services on that occasion.
They asked that the Chiefs and head men, as in other treaties,
should get an official suit of clothing, a nag, and a medal, which
I promised. Mawedopenais produced one of the medals given to the
Red River Chiefs, said it was not silver, and they were ashamed
to wear it, as it turned black, and then, with an air of great
contempt, struck it with his knife. I stated that I would mention
what he had said, and the manner in which he had spoken. They
also stated the Hudson Bay Company had staked out ground at Fort
Francis, on part of the land they claimed to have used, and to be
entitled to, and I promised that enquiry would be made into the
matter. They apologized for the number of questions put me, which
occupied a space of some hours, and then the principal spokesman,
Mawedopenais, came forward and drew off his gloves, and spoke as
follows: "Now you see me stand before you all. What has been done
here to-day, has been done openly before the Great Spirit, and
before the nation, and I hope that I may never hear any one say
that this treaty has been done secretly. And now in closing this
council, I take off my glove, and in taking your hand, I deliver
over my birthright, and lands, and in taking your hand I hold fast
all the promises you have made, and I hope they will last as long
as the sun goes round, and the water flows, as you have said." To
which I replied as follows: "I accept your hand, and with it the
lands and will keep all my promises, in the firm belief that the
treaty now to be signed will bind the red man and the white man
together as friends forever." The conference then adjourned for an
hour to enable the text of the treaty to be completed in accordance
with the understanding arrived at. At the expiration of that period
the conference was resumed, and after the reading of the treaty,
and an explanation of it in Indian by the Hon. James McKay it was
signed by the Commissioners and by the several Chiefs, the first
signature being that of a very aged hereditary Chief. The next
day the Indians were paid by Messrs. Pether and Graham, of the
Department of Public Works; the latter of whom kindly offered
his services as Mr. Provencher had to leave to keep another
appointment. The negotiation was a very difficult and trying one,
and required on the part of the Commissioners great patience and
firmness. On the whole I am of opinion that the issue is a happy
one. With the exception of two bands in the Shebandowan District,
whose adhesion was secured in advance and the signatures of whose
Chiefs Mr. Dawson left to secure, the Indian title has been
extinguished over the vast tract of country comprising 55,000
square miles lying between the upper boundary of the Lake Superior
treaty, and that of the treaty made by Mr. Commissioner Simpson at
Manitoba Post, and embracing within its bounds the Dawson route,
the route of the Canada Pacific Railway and an extensive lumber and
mineral region. [Footnote: Mr. Dawson succeeded in obtaining the
adhesion to the treaty of the Chiefs in question.] It is fortunate,
too that the arrangement has been effected, as the Indians
along the lakes and rivers were dissatisfied at the use of the
waters, which they considered theirs, having been taken without
compensation, so much so indeed that I believe if the treaty had
not been made, the Government would have been compelled to place a
force on the line next year.
Before closing this despatch, I have much pleasure in bearing
testimony to the hearty co-operation and efficient aid the
Commissioners received from the Metis who were present at the
Angle, and who, with one accord, whether of French or English
origin, used the influence which their relationships to the Indians
gave them to impress them with the necessity of their entering into
the treaty. I must also express my obligations to the detachment of
troops under the command of Captain Macdonald, assigned me as an
escort, for their soldierly bearing and excellent conduct while at
the Angle. Their presence was of great value, and had the effect of
deterring traders from bringing articles of illicit trade for sale
to the Indians; and moreover exercised a moral influence which
contributed most materially to the success of the negotiations. I
have further to add, that it was found impossible, owing to the
extent of the country treated for, and the want of knowledge of the
circumstances of each band, to define the reserves to be granted to
the Indians. It was therefore agreed that the reserves should be
hereafter selected by officers of the Government, who should confer
with the several bands, and pay due respect to lands actually
cultivated by them. A provision was also introduced to the effect
that any of the reserves, or any interest in them, might hereafter
be sold for the benefit of the Indians by the Government with their
consent. I would suggest that instructions should be given to Mr.
Dawson to select the reserves with all convenient speed; and, to
prevent complication I would further suggest that no patents should
be issued, or licenses granted, for mineral or timber lands, or
other lands, until the question of the reserves has been first
adjusted.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient servant,
ALEXANDER MORRIS.
Lieut.-Governor.
Attention is called to the ensuing report of the proceedings
connected with the treaty, extracted from the Manitoban newspaper
of the 18th October, 1873, published at Winnipeg. The reports of
the speeches therein contained were prepared by a short-hand
reporter and present an accurate view of the course of the
discussions, and a vivid representation of the habits of Indian
thought.
NORTH-WEST ANGLE,
September 30, 1873.
The Lieutenant-Governor and party, and the other Commissioners
appointed to negotiate a treaty with the Indians, arrived here on
Thursday, 24th inst., having enjoyed delightful weather during the
entire trip from Fort Garry. The Governor occupies the house of the
officer in charge of the H. B. Post. The grounds around it have
been nicely graded and cleared of brush, and surrounded by rows of
evergreens planted closely, so as to completely screen the house
from wind, and at the same time contribute much to relieve the
monotony of the scenery. Immediately west of this, and likewise
enclosed by walls of evergreens, is the large marquee used as
a Council House, by the contracting parties; and immediately
surrounding it to the north and west are the tents of the other
officers of the Commission and the officers and men of the
Volunteers on detachment duty.
Situated to the eastward, and extending all along the river bank,
are the tents of the Indians to the number of a hundred, with here
and there the tent of the trader, attracted thither by the prospect
of turning an honest penny by exchanging the necessaries of Indian
life for such amounts of the price of their heritage as they can be
induced to spend.
The natives now assembled here number about 800 all told, and hail
from the places given below. Among them are many fine physically
developed men, who would be considered good looking were it not for
the extravagance with which they be-smear their faces with pigments
of all colors.
It was at first thought probable that the serious business of the
meeting would be begun on Friday, but owing to the non-arrival of
a large body of Rainy River and Lac Seul representatives, it was
decided to defer it until next day. Saturday came, and owing to the
arrival of a messenger from the Lac Seul band asking the Governor
to wait for their arrival, proceedings have further stayed until
Monday. But "hope deferred maketh the heart sick;" so the advent of
Monday brought nothing but disappointment, and this, coupled with
the disagreeable wet and cold weather that prevailed, made every
one ill at ease if not miserable. The Chiefs were not ready to
treat--they had business of their own to transact, which must be
disposed of before they could see the Governor; and so another
delay was granted. But Monday did not find them ready, and they
refused to begin negotiations. An intimation from the Governor that
unless they were ready on the following day he would leave for
home on Wednesday, hurried them up a little--they did wait on him
to-day, Tuesday, but only to say they had not yet finished their
own business, but that they would try and be ready to treat on
Wednesday. And so the matter stands at present--if the Indians
agree amongst themselves, the treaty will be opened to-morrow,
otherwise the Governor will strike camp and return to Fort Garry.
Divisions and local jealousies have taken possession of the Indian
mind. The difficulties are the inability of the Indians to select
a high or principal chief from amongst themselves, and as to the
matter and extent of the demands to be made.
It is many years since these people had a general council, and in
the interval many head men have died, while others have grown to
man's estate, and feel ambitious to take part in the proceedings.
But the fiat has gone forth, that unless a conclusion is arrived at
to-morrow negotiations will be broken off for this year.
BOUNDARIES OF THE LANDS TO BE CEDED
Beginning at the North-West Angle eastward, taking in all the Lake
of the Woods, including White Fish Bay, Rat Portage and north to
White Dog in English River; up English River to Lake Seul, and then
south east to Lake Nepigon; westward to Rainy River and down it
to Lake of the Woods, and up nearly to Lac des Mille Lacs; then
beginning at the 49th parallel to White Mouth River, thence down it
to the north, along the eastern boundary of the land ceded in 1871,
embracing 55,000 square miles.
In the neighborhood of Lac des mille Lacs and Shebandowan are
several bands, who have sent word that they cannot come as far as
this point, but will accept the terms made at this treaty and
ratify it with any one commissioner who will go there to meet them.
The whole number of Indians in the territory is estimated at
14,000, and are represented here by Chiefs of the following bands:
1. North-West Angle.
2. Rat Portage.
3. Lake Seul.
4. White Fish Bay on Lake of the Woods.
5. Sha-bas-kang, or Grassy Narrows.
6. Rainy River.
7. Rainy Lake.
8. Beyond Kettle Falls, southward.
9. Eagle Lake.
10. Nepigon.
11. Shoal Lake (three miles to the north of this point).
NORTH-WEST ANGLE,
October 1, 1873.
The assembled Chiefs met the Governor this morning, as per
agreement, and opened the proceedings of the day by expressing the
pleasure they experienced at meeting the Commissioners on the
present occasion. Promises had many times been made to them, and,
said the speaker, unless they were now fulfilled they would not
consider the broader question of the treaty.
Mr. S. J. Dawson, one of the Commissioners, reciprocated the
expression of pleasure used by the Chiefs through their spokesman.
He had long looked forward to this meeting, when all matters
relating to the past, the present, and the future, could be
disposed of so as to fix permanently the friendly relations between
the Indians and the white men. It was now, he continued, some years
since the white men first came to this country--they came in the
first place at the head of a great military expedition; and when
that expedition was passing through the country all the chiefs
showed themselves to be true and loyal subjects--they showed
themselves able and willing to support their Great Mother the
Queen. Subsequently, when we began to open up the road, we had to
call upon the Indians to assist us in doing so, and they always
proved themselves very happy to help in carrying out our great
schemes. He was, he continued, one of the Commission employed by
the Government to treat with them and devise a scheme whereby both
white men and Indians would be benefitted. We made to the Indians
the proposals we were authorized to make, and we have carried out
these proposals in good faith. This was three years ago. What we
were directed to offer we did offer, but the Indians thought it
was too little, and negotiations were broken off. Since this I
have done what was in my power to bring about this meeting with
new terms, and consider it a very happy day that you should be
assembled to meet the Governor of the Territory as representative
of Her Majesty. He would explain to them the proposals he had to
make. He had lived long amongst them and would advise them as a
friend to take the opportunity of making arrangements with the
Governor. When we arrange the general matters in question, should
you choose to ask anything, I shall be most happy to explain it,
as I am here all the time.
The Chief in reply said his head men and young men were of one
mind, and determined not to enter upon the treaty until the
promises made in the past were fulfilled, they were tired of
waiting. What the Commissioners called "small matters" were great
to them, and were what they wished to have settled.
The route that had been built through the country proved this,
and the Commissioners promised something which they now wanted.
This was taking the Commissioners on a new tack, but Mr. Dawson
promptly undertook to answer the objections. He said all these
questions had been discussed before; but if he had made any
promises that remained unfulfilled, he would be happy to learn
their nature. The Chief replied that all the houses on the line,
and all the big boats on the waters, were theirs, and they wanted
to be recompensed for them.
Mr. Dawson continued, saying he was glad they had now come to a
point on which they could deal. The Indians questioned the right
of the Government to take wood for the steamers. This was a right
which the speaker had all along told them was common to all Her
Majesty's subjects. He then referred them to the Governor if they
had anything more to say on that subject. Wood on which Indians had
bestowed labor was always paid for; but wood on which we had spent
our own labor was ours.
His Excellency then addressed them at some length. He understood
that they wanted to have the questions in which they were
interested treated separately. This was not what he came there for.
Wood and water were the gift of the Great Spirit, and were made
alike for the good of both the white man and red man. Many of his
listeners had come a long way, and he, too, had come a long way,
and he wanted all the questions settled at once, by one treaty. He
had a message from the Queen, but if his mouth was kept shut, the
responsibility would rest on the Indians, and not with him if he
were prevented from delivering it. He had authority to tell them
what sum of money he could give them in hand now, and what he could
give them every year; but it was for them to open his mouth. He
concluded his remarks, which were forcibly delivered, with an
emphatic "I have said."
The Chief reiterated that he and his young men were determined not
to go on with the treaty until the first question was disposed of.
What was said about the trees and rivers was quite true, but it
was the Indian's country, not the white man's. Following this the
Governor told the Council that unless they would settle all the
matters, the big and little, at once, he would not talk. He was
bound by his Government, and was of the same mind to treat with
them on all questions, and not on any one separately.
On seeing His Excellency so firm, and feeling that it would not do
to allow any more time to pass without coming to business the Chief
asked the Governor to open his mouth and tell what propositions he
was prepared to make.
His Excellency then said--"I told you I was to make the treaty on
the part of our Great Mother the Queen, and I feel it will be for
your good and your children's. I should have been very sorry if
you had shut my mouth, if I had had to go home without opening my
mouth. I should not have been a true friend of yours if I had not
asked you to open my mouth. We are all children of the same Great
Spirit, and are subject to the same Queen. I want to settle all
matters both of the past and the present, so that the white and red
man will always be friends. I will give you lands for farms, and
also reserves for your own use. I have authority to make reserves
such as I have described, not exceeding in all a square mile for
every family of five or thereabouts. It may be a long time before
the other lands are wanted, and in the meantime you will be
permitted to fish and hunt over them. I will also establish schools
whenever any band asks for them, so that your children may have the
learning of the white man. I will also give you a sum of money for
yourselves and every one of your wives and children for this year.
I will give you ten dollars per head of the population and for
every other year five dollars a head. But to the chief men, not
exceeding two to each band, we will give twenty dollars a-year for
ever. I will give to each of you this year a present of goods and
provisions to take you home, and I am sure you will be satisfied."
After consultation amongst themselves, the Councillors went to
have a talk about the matter and will meet the Governor to-morrow
morning, when it is expected the bargain will be concluded. Of
course the Indians will make some other demands.
Immediately after the adjournment as above, the Governor presented
an ox to the people in camp; and the way it disappeared would have
astonished the natives of any other land. Half-an-hour after it was
led into encampment, it was cut up and boiling in fifty pots.
THIRD DAY
Proceedings were opened at eleven o'clock by the Governor
announcing that he was ready to hear what the Chiefs had to say.
The Fort Francis Chief acted as spokesman, assisted by another
Chief, Powhassan.
MA-WE-DO-PE-NAIS--"I now lay down before you the opinions of those
you have seen before. We think it a great thing to meet you here.
What we have heard yesterday, and as you represented yourself,
you said the Queen sent you here, the way we understood you as a
representative of the Queen. All this is our property where you
have come. We have understood you yesterday that Her Majesty has
given you the same power and authority as she has, to act in
this business; you said the Queen gave you her goodness, her
charitableness in your hands. This is what we think, that the Great
Spirit has planted us on this ground where we are, as you were
where you came from. We think where we are is our property. I will
tell you what he said to us when he planted us here; the rules that
we should follow--us Indians--He has given us rules that we should
follow to govern us rightly. We have understood you that you have
opened your charitable heart to us like a person taking off his
garments and throwing them to all of us here. Now, first of all, I
have a few words to address to this gentleman (Mr. Dawson). When he
understood rightly what was my meaning yesterday, he threw himself
on your help. I think I have a right to follow him to where he flew
when I spoke to him on the subject yesterday. We will follow up
the subject from the point we took it up. I want to answer what
we heard from you yesterday, in regard to the money that you have
promised us yesterday to each individual. I want to talk about the
rules that we had laid down before. It is four years back since we
have made these rules. The rules laid down are the rules that they
wish to follow--a council that has been agreed upon by all the
Indians. I do not wish that I should be required to say twice what
I am now going to lay down. We ask fifteen dollars for all that you
see, and for the children that are to be born in future. This year
only we ask for fifteen dollars; years after ten dollars; our
Chiefs fifty dollars per year for every year, and other demands of
large amounts in writing, say $125,000 yearly."
ANOTHER CHIEF--"I take my standing point from here. Our councillors
have in council come to this conclusion, that they should have
twenty dollars each; our warriors, fifteen dollars; our population,
fifteen dollars. We have now laid down the conclusion of our
councils by our decisions. We tell you our wishes are not divided.
We are all of one mind." (Paper put in before the Governor for
these demands.)
CHIEF--"I now let you know the opinions of us here. We would not
wish that anyone should smile at our affairs, as we think our
country is a large matter to us. If you grant us what is written on
that paper, then we will talk about the reserves; we have decided
in council for the benefit of those that will be born hereafter.
If you do so the treaty will be finished, I believe."
GOVERNOR--"I quite agree that this is no matter to smile at. I
think that the decision of to-day is one that affects yourselves
and your children after, but you must recollect that this is the
third time of negotiating. If we do not shake hands and make our
Treaty to-day, I do not know when it will be done, as the Queen's
Government will think you do not wish to treat with her. You told
me that you understood that I represented the Queen's Government to
you and that I opened my heart to you, but you must recollect that
if you are a council there is another great council that governs a
great Dominion, and they hold their councils the same as you hold
yours. I wish to tell you that I am a servant of the Queen. I
cannot do my own will; I must do hers. I can only give you what she
tells me to give you. I am sorry to see that your hands were very
wide open when you gave me this paper. I thought what I promised
you was just, kind and fair between the Queen and you. It is now
three years we have been trying to settle this matter. If we do not
succeed to-day I shall go away feeling sorry for you and for your
children that you could not see what was good for you and for them.
I am ready to do what I promised you yesterday. My hand is open and
you ought to take me by the hand and say, "yes, we accept of your
offer." I have not the power to do what you ask of me. I ask you
once more to think what you are doing, and of those you have left
at home, and also of those that may be born yet, and I ask you not
to turn your backs on what is offered to you, and you ought to see
by what the Queen is offering you that she loves her red subjects
as much as her white. I think you are forgetting one thing, that
what I offer you is to be while the water flows and the sun rises.
You know that in the United States they only pay the Indian for
twenty years, and you come here to-day and ask for ever more than
they get for twenty years. Is that just? I think you ought to
accept my offer, and make a treaty with me as I ask you to do. I
only ask you to think for yourselves, and for your families, and
for your children and children's children, and I know that if you
do that you will shake hands with me to-day."
CHIEF--"I lay before you our opinions. Our hands are poor but our
heads are rich, and it is riches that we ask so that we may be able
to support our families as long as the sun rises and the water
runs."
GOVERNOR--"I am very sorry; you know it takes two to make a
bargain; you are agreed on the one side, and I for the Queen's
Government on the other. I have to go away and report that I have
to go without making terms with you. I doubt if the Commissioners
will be sent again to assemble this nation. I have only one word
more to say; I speak to the Chief and to the head men to recollect
those behind them, and those they have left at home, and not to go
away without accepting such liberal terms and without some clothing."
CHIEF--"My terms I am going to lay down before you; the decision of
our Chiefs; ever since we came to a decision you push it back. The
sound of the rustling of the gold is under my feet where I stand;
we have a rich country; it is the Great Spirit who gave us this;
where we stand upon is the Indians' property, and belongs to them.
If you grant us our requests you will not go back without making
the treaty."
ANOTHER CHIEF--"We understood yesterday that the Queen had given
you the power to act upon, that you could do what you pleased, and
that the riches of the Queen she had filled your head and body
with, and you had only to throw them round about; but it seems it
is not so, but that you have only half the power that she has, and
that she has only half filled your head."
GOVERNOR--"I do not like to be misunderstood. I did not say
yesterday that the Queen had given me all the power; what I told
you was that I was sent here to represent the Queen's Government,
and to tell you what the Queen was willing to do for you. You can
understand very well; for instance, one of your great chiefs asks
a brave to deliver a message, he represents you, and that is how I
stand with the Queen's Government."
CHIEF--"It is your charitableness that you spoke of yesterday--Her
Majesty's charitableness that was given you. It is our chiefs, our
young men, our children and great grand-children, and those that
are to be born, that I represent here, and it is for them I ask for
terms. The white man has robbed us of our riches, and we don't wish
to give them up again without getting something in their place."
GOVERNOR--"For your children, grand-children, and children unborn,
I am sorry that you will not accept of my terms. I shall go home
sorry, but it is your own doing; I must simply go back and report
the fact that you refuse to make a treaty with me."
CHIEF--"You see all our chiefs before you here as one mind; we have
one mind and one mouth. It is the decision of all of us; if you
grant us our demands you will not go back sorrowful; we would not
refuse to make a treaty if you would grant us our demands."
GOVERNOR--"I have told you already that I cannot grant your
demands, I have not the power to do so. I have made you a liberal
offer, and it is for you to accept or refuse it as you please."
CHIEF--"Our chiefs have the same opinion; they will not change
their decision."
GOVERNOR--"Then the Council is at an end."
CHIEF (of Lac Seule)--"I understand the matter that he asks; if he
puts a question to me as well as to others, I say so as well as the
rest. We are the first that were planted here; we would ask you to
assist us with every kind of implement to use for our benefit, to
enable us to perform our work; a little of everything and money. We
would borrow your cattle; we ask you this for our support; I will
find whereon to feed them. The waters out of which you sometimes
take food for yourselves, we will lend you in return. If I should
try to stop you--it is not in my power to do so; even the Hudson's
Bay Company--that is a small power--I cannot gain my point with it.
If you give what I ask, the time may come when I will ask you to
lend me one of your daughters and one of your sons to live with us;
and in return I will lend you one of my daughters and one of my
sons for you to teach what is good, and after they have learned, to
teach us. If you grant us what I ask, although I do not know you, I
will shake hands with you. This is all I have to say."
GOVERNOR--"I have heard and I have learned something. I have
learned that you are not all of one mind. I know that your
interests are not the same--that some of you live in the north far
away from the river, and some live on the river, and that you have
got large sums of money for wood that you have cut and sold to the
steamboats; but the men in the north have not this advantage. What
the Chief has said is reasonable; and should you want goods I mean
to ask you what amount you would have in goods, so that you would
not have to pay the traders' prices for them. I wish you were all
of the same mind as the Chief who has just spoken. He wants his
children to be taught. He is right. He wants to get cattle to help
him to raise grain for his children. It would be a good thing for
you all to be of his mind, and then you would not go away without
making this treaty with me."
BLACKSTONE (Shebandowan)--"I am going to lay down before you the
minds of those who are here. I do not wish to interfere with the
decisions of those who are before you, or yet with your decisions.
The people at the height of land where the waters came down from
Shebandowan to Fort Frances, are those who have appointed me to lay
before you our decision. We are going back to hold a Council."
MR. DAWSON--"I would ask the Chief who has just spoken, did the
band at Shebandowan--did Rat McKay, authorize him to speak for
them? Ke-ha-ke-ge-nen is Blackstone's own Chief; and I am perfectly
willing to think that he authorized him. What I have to say is that
the Indians may not be deceived by representations made to them,
and that the two bands met me at Shebandowan and said they were
perfectly willing to enter into a treaty."
GOVERNOR--"I think the nation will do well to do what the Chief has
said. I think he has spoken sincerely, and it is right for them to
withdraw and hold a Council among themselves."
Blackstone here handed in a paper which he alleged gave him authority
as Chief, but which proved to be an official acknowledgement of the
receipt of a letter by the Indian Department at Ottawa.
The Governor here agreed with the Council that it would be well for
the Chiefs to have another meeting amongst themselves. It was a
most important day for them and for their children, and His
Excellency would be glad to meet them again.
The Council broke up at this point, and it was extremely doubtful
whether an agreement could be come to or not. The Rainy River
Indians were careless about the treaty, because they could get
plenty of money for cutting wood for the boats, but the northern
and eastern bands were anxious for one. The Governor decided that
he would make a treaty with those bands that were willing to accept
his terms, leaving out the few disaffected ones. A Council was held
by the Indians in the evening, at which Hon. James McKay, Pierre
Leveillee, Charles Nolin, and Mr. Genton were present by invitation
of the Chiefs. After a very lengthy and exhaustive discussion, it
was decided to accept the Governor's terms, and the final meeting
was announced for Friday morning. Punctually at the appointed time
proceedings were opened by the Fort Francis Chiefs announcing to
His Excellency that they were all of one mind, and would accept his
terms, with a few modifications. The discussion of these terms
occupied five hours, and met every possible contingency so fully
that it would be impossible to do justice to the negotiators
otherwise than by giving a full report of the speeches on both
sides; but want of space compels us to lay it over until next week.
The treaty was finally closed on Friday afternoon, and signed on
Saturday, after which a large quantity of provisions, ammunition
and other goods were distributed.
When the council broke up last (Thursday) night, 3rd October, it
looked very improbable that an understanding could be arrived at,
but the firmness of the Governor, and the prospect that he would
make a treaty with such of the bands as were willing to accept
his terms, to the exclusion of the others, led them to reconsider
their demands. The Hon. James McKay, and Messrs. Nolin, Genton,
and Leveillee were invited in to their council, and after a most
exhaustive discussion of the circumstance in which they were
placed, it was resolved to accept the Governor's terms, with some
modifications. Word was sent to this effect, and at eleven o'clock
on Friday, conference was again held with His Excellency.
The Fort Francis Chief opened negotiations by saying:--"We present
our compliments to you, and now we would tell you something. You
have mentioned our councillors, warriors and messengers--every
Chief you see has his councillors, warriors and messengers."
GOVERNOR--"I was not aware what names they gave me--they gave
their chief men. I spoke of the subordinates of the head Chiefs;
I believe the head Chiefs have three subordinates--I mean the
head Chief and three of his head men."
CHIEF--"I am going to tell you the decision of all before you. I
want to see your power and learn the most liberal terms that you
can give us."
GOVERNOR--"I am glad to meet the Chiefs, and I hope it will be the
last time of our meeting. I hope we are going to understand one
another to-day. And that I can go back and report that I left my
Indian friends contented, and that I have put into their hands the
means of providing for themselves and their families at home; and
now I will give you my last words. When I held out my hands to you
at first, I intended to do what was just and right, and what I had
the power to do at once,--not to go backwards and forwards, but at
once to do what I believe is just and right to you. I was very much
pleased yesterday with the words of the Chief of Lac Seul. I was
glad to hear that he had commenced to farm and to raise things for
himself and family, and I was glad to hear him ask me to hold out
my hand. I think we should do everything to help you by giving
you the means to grow some food, so that if it is a bad year for
fishing and hunting you may have something for your children at
home. If you had not asked it the Government would have done it all
the same, although I had not said so before. I can say this, that
when a band settles down and actually commences to farm on their
lands, the Government will agree to give two hoes, one spade, one
scythe, and one axe for every family actually settled; one plough
for every ten families, five harrows for every twenty families, and
a yoke of oxen, a bull and four cows for every band; and enough
barley, wheat and oats to plant the land they have actually broken
up. This is to enable them to cultivate their land, and it is to be
given them on their commencing to do so, once for all. There is one
thing that I have thought over, and I think it is a wise thing to
do. That is to give you ammunition, and twine for making nets, to
the extent of $1,500 per year, for the whole nation, so that you
can have the means of procuring food.--Now, I will mention the last
thing that I can do. I think that the sum I have offered you to be
paid after this year for every man, woman and child now, and for
years to come, is right and is the proper sum I will not make an
change in that, but we are anxious to show you that we have a great
desire to understand you--that we wish to do the utmost in our
power to make you contented, so that the white and the red man will
always be friends. This year, instead of ten dollars we will give
you twelve dollars, to be paid you at once as soon as we sign the
treaty. This is the best I can do for you I wish you to understand
we do not come here as traders but as representing the Crown, and
to do what we believe is just and right. We have asked in that
spirit, and I hope you will meet me in that spirit and shake hands
with me day and make a treaty for ever. I have no more to say."
CHIEF--"I wish to ask some points that I have not properly
understood. We understand that our children are to have two dollars
extra. Will the two dollars be paid to our principal men as well?
And these things that are promised will they commence at once and
will we see it year after year?"
GOVERNOR--"I thought I had spoken fully as to everything, but I
will speak again. The ammunition and twine will be got at once for
you, this year, and that will be for every year. The Commissioner
will see that you get this at once; with regard to the things to
help you to farm, you must recollect, in a very few days the river
will be frozen up here and we have not got these things here now.
But arrangements will be made next year to get these things for those
who are farming, it cannot be done before as you can see yourselves
very well. Some are farming, and I hope you will all do so."
CHIEF--"One thing I did not say that is most necessary--we want a
cross-cut saw, a whip saw, grindstone and files."
GOVERNOR--"We will do that, and I think we ought to give a box of
common tools to each Chief of a Band."
CHIEF--"Depending upon the words you have told us, and stretched
out your hands in a friendly way, I depend upon that. One thing
more we demand--a suit of clothes to all of us."
GOVERNOR--"With regard to clothing, suits will be given to the
Chiefs and head men, and as to the other Indians there is a
quantity of goods and provisions here that will be given them at
the close of the treaty. The coats of the Chiefs will be given
every three years."
CHIEF--"Once more; powder and shot will not go off without guns. We
ask for guns."
GOVERNOR--"I have shewn every disposition to meet your view, but
what I have promised is as far as I can go."
CHIEF--"My friends, listen to what I am going to say, and you,
my brothers. We present you now with our best and our strongest
compliments. We ask you not to reject some of our children who have
gone out of our place; they are scattered all over, a good tasted
meat hath drawn them away, and we wish to draw them all here and be
contented with us."
GOVERNOR--"If your children come and live here, of course they will
become part of the population, and be as yourselves."
CHIEF--"I hope you will grant the request that I am going to lay
before you. I do not mean those that get paid on the other side of
the line, but some poor Indians who may happen to fall in our road.
If you will accept of these little matters, the treaty will be at
an end. I would not like that one of my children should not eat
with me, and receive the food that you are going to give me."
GOVERNOR--"I am dealing with British Indians and not American
Indians, after the treaty is closed we will have a list of the
names of any children of British Indians that may come in during
two years and be ranked with them; but we must have a limit
somewhere."
CHIEF--"I should not feel happy if I was not to mess with some of
my children that are around me--those children that we call the
Half-breed--those that have been born of our women of Indian blood.
We wish that they should be counted with us, and have their share
of what you have promised. We wish you to accept our demands. It is
the Half-breeds that are actually living amongst us--those that are
married to our women."
GOVERNOR--"I am sent here to treat with the Indians. In Red River,
where I came from, and where there is a great body of Half-breeds,
they must be either white or Indian. If Indians, they get treaty
money; if the Half-breeds call themselves white, they get land. All
I can do is to refer the matter to the Government at Ottawa, and to
recommend what you wish to be granted."
CHIEF--"I hope you will not drop the question; we have understood
you to say that you came here as a friend, and represented your
charitableness, and we depend upon your kindness. You must remember
that our hearts and our brains are like paper; we never forget.
There is one thing that we want to know. If you should get into
trouble with the nations, I do not wish to walk out and expose my
young men to aid you in any of your wars."
GOVERNOR--"The English never call the Indians out of their country
to fight their battles. You are living here and the Queen expects
you to live at peace with the white men and your red brothers, and
with other nations."
ANOTHER CHIEF--"I ask you a question--I see your roads here passing
through the country, and some of your boats--useful articles that
you use for yourself. Bye and bye we shall see things that run
swiftly, that go by fare--carriages--and we ask you that us Indians
may not have to pay their passage on these things, but can go
free."
GOVERNOR--"I think the best thing I can do is to become an Indian.
I cannot promise you to pass on the railroad free, for it may be a
long time before we get one; and I cannot promise you any more than
other people."
CHIEF--"I must address myself to my friend here, as he is the one
that has the Public Works."
MR. DAWSON--"I am always happy to do anything I can for you. I have
always given you a passage on the boats when I could. I will act as
I have done though I can give no positive promise for the future."
CHIEF--"We must have the privilege of travelling about the country
where it is vacant."
MR. McKAY--"Of course, I told them so."
CHIEF--"Should we discover any metal that was of use, could we have
the privilege of putting our own price on it?"
GOVERNOR--"If any important minerals are discovered on any of their
reserves the minerals will be sold for their benefit with their
consent, but not on any other land that discoveries may take place
upon; as regards other discoveries, of course, the Indian is like
any other man. He can sell his information if he can find a
purchaser."
CHIEF--"It will be as well while we are here that everything should
be understood properly between us. All of us--those behind us--wish
to have their reserves marked out, which they will point out, when
the time comes. There is not one tribe here who has not laid it
out."
COMMISSIONER PROVENCHER (the Governor being temporarily absent)--"As
soon as it is convenient to the Government to send surveyors to lay
out the reserves they will do so, and they will try to suit every
particular band in this respect."
CHIEF--"We do not want anybody to mark out our reserves, we have
already marked them out."
COMMISSIONER--"There will be another undertaking between the
officers of the Government and the Indians among themselves for the
selection of the land; they will have enough of good farming land,
they may be sure of that."
CHIEF--"Of course, if there is any particular part wanted by the
public works they can shift us. I understand that; but if we have
any gardens through the country, do you wish that the poor man
should throw it right away?"
COMMISSIONER--"Of course not."
CHIEF--"These are matters that are the wind-up. I begin now to see
how I value the proceedings. I have come to this point, and all
that are taking part in this treaty and yourself I would wish to
have all your names in writing handed over to us. I would not find
it to my convenience to have a stranger here to transact our
business between me and you. It is a white man who does not
understand our language that is taking it down. I would like a man
that understands our language and our ways. We would ask your
Excellency as a favor to appoint him for us."
GOVERNOR--"I have a very good feeling to Mr. C. Nolin, he has been
a good man here; but the appointment of an Agent rests with the
authorities at Ottawa and I will bring your representation to them,
and I am quite sure it will meet with the respect due to it."
CHIEF--"As regards the fire water, I do not like it and I do not
wish any house to be built to have it sold. Perhaps at times if I
should be unwell I might take drop just for medicine; and shall any
one insist on bringing it where we are, I should break the treaty."
GOVERNOR--"I meant to have spoken of that myself, I meant to put it
in the treaty. He speaks good about it. The Queen and her
Parliament in Ottawa have passed a law prohibiting the use of it in
this territory, and if any shall be brought in for the use of you
as medicine it can only come in by my permission."
CHIEF--"Why we keep you so long is that it is our wish that
everything should be properly understood between us,"
GOVERNOR--"That is why I am here. It is my pleasure, and I want
when we once shake hands that it should be forever."
CHIEF--"That is the principal article. If it was in my midst the
fire water would have spoiled my happiness, and I wish it to be
left far away from where I am. All the promises that you have made
me, the little promises and the money you have promised, when it
comes to me year after year--should I see that there is anything
wanting, through the negligence of the people that have to see
after these things, I trust it will be in my power to put them in
prison."
GOVERNOR--"The ear of the Queen's Government will always be open to
hear the complaints of her Indian people, and she will deal with
her servants that do not do their duty in a proper manner."
CHIEF--"Now you have promised to give us all your names. I want a
copy of the treaty that will not be rubbed off, on parchment."
GOVERNOR--"In the mean time I will give you a copy on paper, and as
soon as I get back I will get you a copy on parchment."
CHIEF--"I do not wish to be treated as they were at Red River--that
provisions should be stopped as it is there. Whenever we meet and
have a council I wish that provisions should be given to us. We
cannot speak without eating."
GOVERNOR--"You are mistaken. When they are brought together at Red
River for their payments they get provisions."
CHIEF--"We wish the provisions to come from Red River."
GOVERNOR--"If the Great Spirit sends the grasshopper and there is
no wheat grown in Red River, we cannot give it to you."
CHIEF--"You have come before us with a smiling face, you have shown
us great charity--you have promised the good things; you have given
us your best compliments and wishes, not only for once but for
ever; let there now for ever be peace and friendship between us. It
is the wish of all that where our reserves are peace should reign,
that nothing shall be there that will disturb peace. Now, I will
want nothing to be there that will disturb peace, and will put
every one that carries arms,--such as murderers and thieves--outside,
so that nothing will be there to disturb our peace."
GOVERNOR--"The Queen will have policemen to preserve order, and
murderers and men guilty of crime will be punished in this country
just the same as she punishes them herself."
CHIEF--"To speak about the Hudson's Bay Company. If it happens that
they have surveyed where I have taken my reserve, if I see any of
their signs I will put them on one side."
GOVERNOR--"When the reserves are given you, you will have your
rights. The Hudson's Bay Company have their rights, and the Queen
will do justice between you."
CHIEF OF FORT FRANCIS--"Why I say this is, where I have chosen for
my reserve I see signs that the H. B. Co. has surveyed. I do not
hate them. I only wish they should take their reserves on one side.
Where their shop stands now is my property; I think it is three
years now since they have had it on it."
GOVERNOR--"I do not know about that matter; it will be enquired
into. I am taking notes of all these things and am putting them on
paper."
CHIEF--"I will tell you one thing. You understand me now, that I
have taken your hand firmly and in friendship. I repeat twice that
you have done so, that these promises that you have made, and the
treaty to be concluded, let it be as you promise, as long as the
sun rises over our head and as long as the water runs. One thing I
find, that deranges a little my kettle. In this river, where food
used to be plentiful for our subsistence, I perceive it is getting
scarce. We wish that the river should be left as it was formed from
the beginning--that nothing be broken."
GOVERNOR--"This is a subject that I cannot promise."
MR. DAWSON--"Anything that we are likely to do at present will not
interfere with the fishing, but no one can tell what the future may
require, and we cannot enter into any engagement."
CHIEF--"We wish the Government would assist us in getting a few
boards for some of us who are intending to put up houses this fall,
from the mill at Fort Francis."
GOVERNOR--"The mill is a private enterprise, and we have no power
to give you boards from that."
CHIEF--"I will now show you a medal that was given to those who
made a treaty at Red River by the Commissioner. He said it was
silver, but I do not think it is. I should be ashamed to carry it
on my breast over my heart. I think it would disgrace the Queen, my
mother, to wear her image on so base a metal as this. [Here the
Chief held up the medal and struck it with the back of his knife.
The result was anything but the 'true ring,' and made every man
ashamed of the petty meanness that had been practised.] Let the
medals you give us be of silver--medals that shall be worthy of
the high position our Mother the Queen occupies."
GOVERNOR--"I will tell them at Ottawa what you have said, and how
you have said it."
CHIEF--"I wish you to understand you owe the treaty much to the
Half-breeds."
GOVERNOR--"I know it. I sent some of them to talk with you, and I
am proud that all the Half-breeds from Manitoba, who are here, gave
their Governor their cordial support."
The business of the treaty having now been completed, the Chief,
Mawedopenais, who, with Powhassan, had with such wonderful tact
carried on the negotiations, stepped up to the Governor and said:--
"Now you see me stand before you all; what has been done here
to-day has been done openly before the Great Spirit, and before
the nation, and I hope that I may never hear any one say that this
treaty has been done secretly; and now, in closing this Council, I
take off my glove, and in giving you my hand, I deliver over my
birth-right and lands; and in taking your hand, I hold fast all the
promises you have made, and I hope they will last as long as the
sun goes round and the water flows, as you have said."
The Governor then took his hand and said:
"I accept your hand and with it the lands, and will keep all my
promises, in the firm belief that the treaty now to be signed will
bind the red man and the white together as friends for ever."
A copy of the treaty was then prepared and duly signed, after which
a large amount of presents consisting of pork, flour, clothing,
blankets, twine, powder and shot, etc., were distributed to the
several bands represented on the ground.
On Saturday, Mr. Pether, Local Superintendent of Indian Affairs at
Fort Francis, and Mr. Graham of the Government Works, began to pay
the treaty money--an employment that kept them busy far into the
night. Some of the Chiefs received as much as one hundred and
seventy dollars for themselves and families.
As soon as the money was distributed the shops of the H. B. Co.,
and other resident traders were visited, as well as the tents of
numerous private traders, who had been attracted thither by the
prospect of doing a good business. And while these shops all did a
great trade--the H. B. Co. alone taking in $4,000 in thirty
hours--it was a noticeable fact that many took home with them
nearly all their money. When urged to buy goods there, a frequent
reply was: "If we spend all our money here and go home and want
debt, we will be told to get our debt where we spent our money."
"Debt" is used by them instead of the word "credit." Many others
deposited money with white men and Half-breeds on whose honor they
could depend, to be called for and spent at Fort Garry when "the
ground froze."
One very wonderful thing that forced itself on the attention of
every one was the perfect order that prevailed throughout the camp,
and which more particularly marked proceedings in the council.
Whether the demands put forward were granted by the Governor
or not, there was no petulance, no ill-feeling, evinced; but
everything was done with a calm dignity that was pleasing
to behold, and which might be copied with advantage by more
pretentious deliberative assemblies.
On Sunday afternoon, the Governor presented an ox to the nation,
and after it had been eaten a grand dance was indulged in. Monday
morning the river Indians took passage on the steamer for Fort
Francis, and others left in their canoes for their winter quarters.
The Governor and party left on Monday morning, the troops, under
command of Captain McDonald, who had conducted themselves with the
greatest propriety, and had contributed, by the moral effect of
their presence, much to the success of the negotiation, having
marched to Fort Garry on Saturday morning.
CHAPTER VI
THE QU'APPELLE TREATY, OR NUMBER FOUR
This treaty, is, so generally called, from having been made at
the Qu'Appelle Lakes, in the North-West Territories. The Indians
treated with, were a portion of the Cree and Saulteaux Tribes, and
under its operations, about 75,000 square miles of territory were
surrendered. This treaty, was the first step towards bringing
the Indians of the Fertile Belt into closer relations with the
Government of Canada, and was a much needed one. In the year 1871,
Major Butler was sent into the North-West Territories by the
Government of Canada, to examine into and report, with regard to
the state of affairs there. He reported, to Lieutenant-Governor
Archibald, that "law and order are wholly unknown in the region
of the Saskatchewan, in so much, as the country is without any
executive organization, and destitute of any means of enforcing
the law." Towards remedying this serious state of affairs, the
Dominion placed the North-West Territories under the rule of
the Lieutenant-Governor and Council of the Territories, the
Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, being, ex officio, Governor of the
Territories. This body, composed of representative men, possessed
executive functions, and legislative powers. They entered upon
their duties with zeal, and discharged them with efficiency.
Amongst other measures, they passed a prohibitory liquor law, which
subsequently was practically adopted by a Statute of the Dominion.
They proposed the establishment of a Mounted Police Force, a
suggestion which was given force to by the Dominion Cabinet, and
they recommended, that, treaties should be made, with the Indians
at Forts Qu'Appelle, Carlton and Pitt, recommendations, which, were
all, eventually, carried out. In the report of the Minister of
the Interior, for the year 1875, he states "that it is due to the
Council to record the fact, that the legislation and valuable
suggestions, submitted to your Excellency, from time to time,
through their official head, Governor Morris, aided the Government
not a little in the good work of laying the foundations of law
and order, in the North-West, in securing the good will of the
Indian tribes, and in establishing the prestige of the Dominion
Government, throughout that vast country." In accordance with these
suggestions, the Government of the Dominion, decided, on effecting
a treaty, with the plain Indians, Crees and Chippawas, who inhabit
the country, of which, Fort Qu'Appelle, was a convenient centre,
and entrusted the duty, to the Hon. Alexander Morris then
Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West Territories,
the Hon. David Laird, then Minister of the Interior, and now
Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, and the Hon. W.
J. Christie, a retired factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, and a
gentleman of large experience, among the Indian tribes.
In pursuance of this mission, these gentlemen left Fort Garry in
August, 1874, and journeyed to Lake Qu'Appelle (the calling or
echoing lake), where they met the assembled Indians, in September.
The Commissioners, had an escort of militia, under the command of
Lieut.-Col. Osborne Smith, C.M.G. This force marched to and from
Qu'Appelle, acquitted themselves with signal propriety, and proved
of essential service. Their return march was made in excellent
time. The distance, three hundred and fifty miles having been
accomplished in sixteen and a half days.
The Commissioners encountered great difficulties, arising, from the
excessive demands of the Indians, and from the jealousies, existing
between the two Nations, Crees and Chippawas, but by perseverance,
firmness and tact, they succeeded in overcoming the obstacles, they
had to encounter, and eventually effected a treaty, whereby the
Indian title was extinguished in a tract of country, embracing
75,000 square miles of territory. After long and animated
discussions the Indians, asked to be granted the same terms as were
accorded to the Indians of Treaty Number Three, at the North-West
Angle, hereinbefore mentioned. The Commissioners assented to their
request and the treaty was signed accordingly.
On the return, of the Commissioners to Fort Ellice, they met there,
the Chippawas of that vicinage, and made a supplementary treaty
with them. These Indians were included in the boundaries of Treaty
Number Two, but had not been treated with, owing to their distance
from Manitoba House, where that treaty was made. In 1875, the Hon.
W. J. Christie, and Mr. M. G. Dickieson, then of the Department of
the Interior, and subsequently, Assistant Superintendent of Indian
affairs, in the North-West Territories, were appointed to make the
payments of annuities, to the Indians, embraced in the Treaty
Number Four, and obtain the adhesion of other bands, which had
not been present at Qu'Appelle, the previous year. They met, the
Indians, at Qu'Appelle (where six Chiefs who had been absent,
accepted the terms of the treaty) and at Fort Pelly and at Shoal
River, where two other Chiefs, with their bands, came into the
treaty stipulations. A gratifying feature connected with the making
of this, and the other, North-Western Treaties, has been the
readiness, with which the Indians, who were absent, afterwards
accepted the terms which had been settled for them, by those, who
were able to attend. I close these observations, by annexing,
the reports of Lieutenant-Governor Morris, to the Honorable the
Secretary of State of Canada, of date 17th October, 1874, giving,
an account, of the making of the treaties at Qu'Appelle and
Fort Ellice, and an extract, from that of Messrs. Christie and
Dickieson, dated 7th October, 1875, describing its further
completion, and I also insert, accurate short-hand reports of the
proceedings at Qu'Appelle and Fort Ellice, which, were made, at
the time, by Mr. Dickieson, who, was present, at the treaty, as
secretary to the Commissioners. These will be found to be both
interesting and instructive.
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, October 17, 1874.
Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in compliance with the
request of the Government, I proceeded to Lake Qu'Appelle in
company with the Hon. David Laird, in order to act with him and W.
J. Christie, Esq., as Commissioners to negotiate a treaty with the
tribes of Indians in that region.
Mr. Laird and I left Fort Garry on the 26th of August, and arrived
at Lake Qu'Appelle on the 8th of September, Mr. Christie having
gone in advance of us to Fort Pelly.
We were accompanied on arriving by the escort of militia under the
command of Lieut.-Col. W. Osborne Smith, who had preceded us, but
whom we had overtaken.
The escort took up their encampment at a very desirable situation
on the edge of the lake, the Indians being encamped at some
distance.
The Commissioners were kindly provided with apartments by W. J.
McLean, Esq., the officer in charge of the Hudson Bay Company's
Post.
After our arrival, the Commissioners caused the Indians to be
summoned, to meet them, in a marquee tent adjoining the encampment
of the militia.
The Crees came headed by their principal Chief "Loud Voice," and
a number of Saulteaux followed, without their Chief, Cote. The
Commissioners, having decided that it was desirable that there
should be only one speaker on behalf of the Commissioners,
requested me owing to my previous experience with the Indian tribes
and my official position as Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West
Territories, to undertake the duty, which I agreed to do.
Accordingly, I told the Indians the object of our coming and
invited them to present to us their Chiefs and headmen. "Loud
Voice" stated that they were not yet ready and asked for a delay
till next day, to which we assented.
On the 9th, four Indian soldiers were sent to the Commissioners to
ask for two days delay, but we replied that when they met us in
conference they could prefer any reasonable request, but that we
expected them to meet us as agreed on the previous day, and further
that the Saulteaux had not conducted themselves with proper respect
to the Commissioners, as representatives of the Crown, as their
principal Chief Cote had not met us. Eventually, both the Crees and
the Saulteaux met us, with their Chiefs, when I addressed them.
They asked time to deliberate and we appointed the 11th at ten
o'clock for the next conference.
The Crees then left the tent suddenly, under constraint of the
Indian soldiers, who compelled the Chiefs to go.
On the 11th we sent a bugler round to summon the Indians to the
appointed conference, but they did not come.
Instead the Saulteaux sent word that they could not meet us except
in their own soldiers tent, distant about a mile from the militia
encampment, but we refused to do so.
The Crees were ready to proceed to the marquee, but were prevented
by the Saulteaux, a section of whom displayed a turbulent
disposition and were numerically the strongest party. We sent our
interpreter Charles Pratt, a Cree Indian, who was educated at
St. John's College here, and who is a catechist of the Church of
England, to tell the Indians that they must meet us as agreed upon.
In consequence, about four o'clock in the afternoon the Crees led
by "Loud Voice," came to the conference but the Saulteaux kept
away, though a number were sent to hear and report. On behalf of
the Commissioners, I then explained to the Crees the object of our
mission and made our proposals for a treaty, but as they were not
ready to reply, we asked them to return to their tents and meet us
next day.
On the 12th the Crees and Saulteaux sent four men from the soldiers
tent or council, which they had organized, to ask that the
encampment of the militia and the conference tents should be
removed half way, towards their encampment.
In consequence, we requested Lieut.-Col. Smith to proceed to the
Indian encampment and ascertain the meaning of this demand
authorizing him, if necessary, to arrange for the pitching of the
conference tent nearer the Indians, if that would give them any
satisfaction.
He reported, on his return, that the Indians wished the militia to
encamp with them, and that they objected to meet us anywhere on
the reserve of the Hudson Bay Company, as they said they could not
speak freely there.
He refused to remove the militia camp, as it was a very desirable
place where it had been placed, but with the assent of the Indians
selected a spot adjoining the reserve and at a suitable distance
from the Indian tents, on which the conference tent was to be daily
erected, but to be removed after the conferences closed.
We then summoned the Indians to meet us at one o'clock which they
did at the appointed place.
After the formal hand shaking, which ceremony they repeat at the
beginning and close of every interview the Commissioners submitted
their terms for a treaty, which were in effect similar to those
granted at the North-West Angle, except that the money present
offered was eight dollars per head, instead of twelve dollars as
there.
The Indians declined, however, to talk about these proposals, as
they said there was something in the way. They objected to the
reserve having been surveyed for the Hudson Bay Company, without
their first having been consulted, and claimed that the L300,000
paid to the Company should be paid to them. They also objected to
the Company's trading in the Territory, except only at their posts.
The Commissioners refused to comply with their demands, and
explained to them how the Company had become entitled to the
reserve in question, and the nature of the arrangement, that had
resulted in the payment by the Government of Canada of the
L300,000.
The conference adjourned to Monday the 14th, on which day the
Commissioners again met them, but the Cree Chief "Loud Voice" asked
for another day to consider the matter, and "Cote" or "Meemay" the
Saulteaux Chief, from Fort Pelly, asked to be treated with, at his
own place. They demanded, that the Company should only be allowed
to trade at their own posts, and not to send out traders into the
Territory--which was of course refused, it being explained to them
that all Her Majesty's subjects had equal right of trading. The
Commissioners then agreed to grant a final delay of another day,
for further consideration. Up to this period the position was very
unsatisfactory.
The Crees were from the first ready to treat, as were the Saulteaux
from Fort Pelly, but the Saulteaux of the Qu'Appelle District were
not disposed to do so and attempted to coerce the other Indians.
They kept the Chiefs "Loud Voice" and "Cote" under close
surveillance, they being either confined to their tents or else
watched by "soldiers," and threatened if they should make any
overtures to us.
The Saulteaux cut down the tent over the head of one of the Cree
Chiefs and conducted themselves in such a manner, that "Loud Voice"
applied to the Commissioners for protection, and the Crees
purchased knives and armed themselves.
The Saulteaux, one day went the length of placing six "soldiers,"
armed with rifles and revolvers, in the conference tent to
intimidate the other Indians, a step which was promptly counteracted
by Lieut.-Col. Smith, calling in six of the militiamen who were
stationed in the tent. In this connection, I must take the
opportunity of stating that the results proved the wisdom of the
course taken by the Commissioners in obtaining the escort of the
militia, as their presence exerted great moral influence, and I am
persuaded, prevented the jealousies and ancient feud between the
Crees and Saulteaux culminating in acts of violence.
The conduct of the whole force was excellent and, whether on the
march or in the encampment ground, they conducted themselves in a
most creditable manner.
Resuming, however, my narrative, on the 15th of September, the
Commissioners again met the Indians at eleven o'clock in the
forenoon.
The Crees had, in the interval, decided to treat with us
independently, and the Saulteaux, finding this, came to a similar
conclusion. After a protracted interview, the Indians asked to be
granted the same terms as were given at the North-West Angle. The
Commissioners took time to consider and adjourned the conference
until three o'clock.
In the interval, the Commissioners, being persuaded that a treaty
could not otherwise be made, determined on acceding to the request
of the Indians.
The Indians, having again met the Commissioners in the afternoon,
presented their Chiefs to them, when they asked to be informed what
the terms granted at the North-West Angle were. These were fully
and carefully explained to them, but after a request that all the
Indians owed to the Hudson Bay Company should be wiped out and a
refusal of the Commissioners to entertain their demands, they then
asked that they should be paid fifteen dollars per annum per head,
which was refused, and they were informed that the proposals of the
Commissioners were final, and could not be changed.
The Chiefs then agreed to accept the terms offered and to sign
the treaty, having first asked that the Half-breeds should be
allowed to hunt, and having been assured that the population in
the North-West would be treated fairly and justly, the treaty was
signed by the Commissioners and the Chiefs, having been first fully
explained to them by the interpreter.
Arrangements were then made to commence the payment and distribution
of the presents the next day, a duty which was discharged by Mr.
Christie and Mr. Dickieson, Private Secretary of the Hon. Mr. Laird.
I forward you to form an appendix to this despatch, a report
marked "A" and "B" extended from notes taken in short hand, by Mr.
Dickieson, of the various conferences and of the utterances of the
Commissioners and the Indians.
It is obvious that such a record will prove valuable, as it enables
any misunderstanding on the part of the Indians, as to what was
said at the conference, to be corrected, and it, moreover, will
enable the council better to appreciate the character of the
difficulties that have to be encountered in negotiating with the
Indians.
On the 17th I left for Fort Ellice, in company with Mr. Laird, Mr.
Christie and Mr. Dickieson remaining to complete the payments,
which were satisfactorily disposed of.
Before leaving, the Chiefs "Loud Voice" and Cote called on us to
tender their good wishes, and to assure us that they would teach
their people to respect the treaty.
The Commissioners received every assistance in their power from
Mr. McDonald of Fort Ellice, in charge of the Hudson Bay Company
District of Swan River, and from Mr. McLean, in charge of the
Qu'Appelle Post,--I also add, that the Half-breed population were I
believe generally desirous of seeing the treaty concluded and used
the influence of their connection with the Indians in its favor.
I forward in another despatch a copy of an address I received from
the Metis, or Half-breeds, together with my reply thereto.
The treaty was taken charge of by the Hon. Mr. Laird, and will be
by him placed on record in his Department and submitted to council
for approval.
I enclose herewith, however, a printed copy of it, marked "C," to
accompany this despatch.
The supplementary treaty made at Fort Ellice will form the subject
of another despatch.
Trusting that the efforts of the Commissioners to secure a
satisfactory understanding with the Western Indians will result in
benefit to the race, advantage to the Dominion, and meet the
approval of the Privy Council,
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient servant,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T.
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, October 17th, 1874.
Sir,--Referring to my despatch of the 17th inst., (No. 211) I have
the honor to report that Mr. Laird and I arrived at Fort Ellice
from Qu'Appelle Lakes, on Saturday the 19th of September.
On Monday, we met the band of Saulteaux Indians, who make their
headquarters at Fort Ellice, and who had remained there, instead of
going to Qu'Appelle at our request.
This band have been in the habit of migrating between the region
covered by the Second Treaty and that comprehended in the Fourth,
but had not been treated with.
We proposed to them to give their adhesion to the Qu'Appelle Treaty
and surrender their claim to lands, wherever situated, in the
North-West Territories, on being given a reserve and being granted
the terms on which the treaty in question was made. We explained
fully these terms and asked the Indians to present to us their
Chief and headmen. As some of the band were absent, whom the
Indians desired to be recognized as headmen, only the Chief and one
headman were presented. These, on behalf of the Indians accepted
the terms and thanked the Queen and the Commissioners for their
care of the Indian people. A supplement to the treaty was then
submitted and fully explained to them, by our acting interpreter,
Joseph Robillard, after which it was signed by Mr. Laird and
myself, and by the Chief and head man.
The original of the supplementary treaty will be submitted for
approval by Mr. Laird, but I annex a printed copy of it, as an
appendix to this despatch.
I also annex, notes of the conference with these Indians, extended
from the short hand report taken of the proceedings by Mr.
Dickieson, Private Secretary to the Hon. Mr. Laird.
In the afternoon, Mr. Christie and Mr. Dickieson arrived from Lake
Qu'Appelle, and shortly afterwards proceeded to make the payments
to the Indians, under the treaty.
It was satisfactory to have this band dealt with, as they asserted
claims in the region covered by the Manitoba Post Treaty, but had
not been represented at the time it was made.
On the 22nd of September the Commissioners left Fort Ellice and
arrived at Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 26th of that month,
having been absent a little over a month.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient Servant,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T.
THE HONORABLE
THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES,
Ottawa.
WINNIPEG, MANITOBA, 7th October, 1875.
Sir,--We have now the honor to submit, for your information, our
final report in connection with our missions to the Indians
included in Treaty No 4.
As former reports have made you fully acquainted with the
arrangements that had been entered into previous to our departure
from this place, any further reference to them is unnecessary.
Having left Winnipeg on the 19th August, we arrived at Fort Ellice
on the 24th, the day appointed for the meeting the Indians of
that place. The same evening we had an interview with, and fully
explained the terms and conditions of the treaty to some of the
Indians who were not present when the treaty was concluded last
year. Next morning, by appointment, we met all the Indians
and explained to them the object of our mission, and, after
considerable discussion, made arrangements to commence paying the
annuities next day. This, however, was prevented by heavy rains,
which continued more or less to retard our operations on the
two following days, the 27th and 28th, but everything was
satisfactorily concluded with this band on the evening of the
latter day, and on the following morning we started for the
Qu'Appelle Lakes, accompanied by an escort of fifteen men of the
Mounted Police Force, under the command of Sub-Inspector McIllree,
which had arrived at Fort Ellice on the evening of the 26th, and
reached our destination on the forenoon of the 2nd September.
As you are aware, we had heard before leaving Winnipeg, that the
number of Indians assembled at the Qu'Appelle Lakes would be very
large, but we did not anticipate that so many as we found (nearly
five hundred lodges) would be congregated.
We at once saw that the funds at our disposal to pay the annuities
and gratuities would be inadequate, and availed ourselves of the
opportunity presented by the return of Major Irvine to Winnipeg,
to forward a telegram on the 5th September, requesting a further
amount of six thousand dollars to be placed to our credit; and we
may state here, though out of the order of time, as we found after
the first two days payments that we had still underestimated the
number of Indians present, we transmitted a telegram to Winnipeg by
special messenger, on the 9th September, for a further credit of
fifteen thousand dollars.
On the 3rd September we met the Indians and explained the object
of our mission, and, for the benefit of those who were absent last
year, the terms and conditions of the treaty, and stated that
we were now ready to fulfil so many of the obligations therein
contained as the Government were bound to execute this year. The
Indians declined saying anything on this occasion, but wished to
meet and confer with in the following day, as they had something
they wished to speak about. They accordingly met us on the 4th,
and made several demands, one of which was that the annuities be
increased to twelve dollars per head. We replied that the treaty
concluded last year was a covenant between them and the Government,
and it was impossible to comply with their demands; that all we had
to do was to carry out the terms of the treaty in so far as the
obligations of the same required. An idea seemed prevalent among
the Indians who were absent last year that no treaty had been
concluded then; that all which had been done at that time was
merely preliminary to the making of the treaty in reality, which
they thought was to be performed this year. The prevalence of this
opinion amongst them operated very prejudicially to the furthering
of our business, and we saw that until this was done away with it
would be impossible to do anything towards accomplishing the real
object of our mission. After a great deal of talking on their
part, and explanation on ours, the meeting adjourned until Monday
morning, as it was necessary that provisions should be issued to
the different bands that evening for the following day.
On Monday (the 6th) we again met the Indians, and as they evidently
wished to have another day's talking to urge the same demands they
had made on Saturday, we assured them all further discussion on the
subject was useless; that if they declined to accept the terms of
the treaty we must return and report to the Government that they
had broken the promise made last year. They then asked that we
should report to the Government what they had demanded. This we
agreed to do. After some further explanation to those Chiefs who
had not signed the treaty, the payment of the annuities and
gratuities was commenced and continued by Messrs. Dickieson and
Forsyth on this and the three following days until completed,
during which time Mr. Christie conferred with the Chiefs as to
the locality of their reserves.
Six Chiefs who had not been present last year when the treaty was
concluded, agreed to accept the terms of the same, and signed their
adhesion previous to being paid. The instruments thus signed by
them are transmitted herewith.
The suits of clothes, flags, medals and copies of the treaty were
given to the Chiefs and headmen as they were paid, and on the 10th
the ammunition and twine were distributed, also provisions to each
band for the return journey to their hunting grounds. * * * * * *
We have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient servants,
W. J. CHRISTIE,
Indian Commissioner.
M. G. DICKIESON.
Report of the proceedings at the Conference between the Hon.
Alexander Morris, Lieut.-Governor of the North-West Territories,
the Hon. David Laird, Minister of the Interior, and W. J. Christie,
Esq., the Commissioners appointed by Order in Council to treat with
the Indians inhabiting the country described in the said Order in
Council, the first conference having been held at Qu'Appelle,
September 8th, 1874:
FIRST DAY'S CONFERENCE
At four o'clock the Commissioners entered the marquee erected for
the accommodation of themselves, and the Indians, who in in a short
time arrived, shook hands with the Commissioners, the officers of
the guard, and other gentlemen who were in the tent, and took their
seats.
It having been noticed that Cote, "the Pigeon," a leading Chief of
the Saulteaux tribe, had not arrived but that several of his band
were present and claimed that they had been sent to represent him,
His Honor the Lieut.-Governor instructed the (acting) interpreter,
William Daniel, to enquire why their Chief had not come to meet the
Commissioners, the white chiefs?
To this question they answered, that he had given no reason.
His Honor, through the interpreter, told them that the Queen had
sent him and the other Commissioners to see their Chief and their
nation, and that the least a loyal subject could do would be to
meet the messengers of the Queen.
His Honor then addressed the Crees as follows: "The Commissioners
having agreed that as Lieut.-Governor he should speak to them, as
we are sent here by the Queen, by the Great Mother--the Queen has
chosen me to be one of her Councillors, and has sent me here to
represent her and has made me Governor of all her Territories
in the North-West. She has sent another of her Councillors who
has come all the way from Ottawa. She has also sent with us Mr.
Christie, whom you all know, who has lived for a long time in this
country, but who had gone away from it to live in another part of
the Dominion of Canada. The Queen loves her Red children; she has
always been friends with them; she knows that it is hard for them
to live, and she has always tried to help them in the other parts
of the Dominion. Last year she sent me to see her children at the
Lake of the Woods. I took her children there by the hand, and the
white man and the red man made friends for ever. We have come here
with a message from the Queen and want to tell you all her mind. We
want to speak to you about the land and what the Queen is willing
to do for you, but before we tell you, we want you to tell us, who
your Chiefs and headmen are who will speak for you, while we speak
for the Queen, and we want to know what bands of Crees are here and
who will speak for them. We wish to know if the Crees are ready to
speak with us now?"
RA-KU-SHI-WAY, THE LOUD VOICE,--Said in reply: "I do not wish to
tell a lie. I cannot say who will speak for us; it will only be
known after consultation."
HIS HONOR THE LIEUT.-GOV.--"By to-morrow you will probably have
chosen whom you will have to speak for you and the Commissioners
will be glad to meet you after you have chosen your spokesmen, and
will meet you at ten o'clock. We want you to tell us openly what
you want and we will speak to you for the Queen in the same way.
The Colonel will send a man round to sound a bugle at ten o'clock
to let you know."
To the Saulteaux His Honor said: "We are here with a message from
the Great Mother and want you to open my mouth so that I can tell
you what I have to say. If you and your Chiefs will meet together
in council and talk it over we will be glad to meet you, if you
bring your Chief to-morrow. You must also choose your speakers who
will come with your Chief and speak for you."
LOUD VOICE--"I will tell the message that is given me to tell. I
have one thing to say, the first word that came to them was for the
Saulteaux tribe to choose a place to pitch their tents."
HIS HONOR--"This place was chosen because it is a good place for
my men--for the soldiers--there is plenty of water and grass, and
I will meet you here to-morrow. That is all at present."
After the departure of the main body of Cree Indians, Saulteaux,
from the Cypress Hills, entered the tent saying that they had no
Chief, and did not want to go with the main body of the nation,
that they had plenty of friends on the plains.
His Honor said they would hear the Queen's message with the rest of
the Indians.
SECOND DAY'S CONFERENCE
September 9, 1874.
The Indians, both Crees, Saulteaux and their Chiefs having arrived,
His Honor Lieut.-Governor Morris said: "I am glad to see so many
of the Queen's red children here this morning. I told those I
saw yesterday that I was one of the Queen's councillors, and had
another councillor with me from Ottawa and that the Queen had sent
Mr. Christie who used to live amongst you to help us. Yesterday the
Cree nation with their Chief were here, the Saulteaux did not come
to meet the Queen's servants, their Chief was not here. I thought
that the Saulteaux could not have understood that the Queen had
sent her servants to see them, or they would have come to meet
them. If Loud Voice or any other Chief came down to Fort Garry to
see me, and I sent one of my servants to meet them instead of
shaking hands with them, would they be pleased? I wanted you to
meet me here to-day because I wanted to speak to you before the
Great Spirit and before the world. I want both Crees and Saulteaux
to know what I say. I told those who were here yesterday that we
had a message from the Queen to them. Last year I made a treaty
with the Indians, 4,000 in number, at the Lake of the Woods. To-day
the Queen sends us here. I told you yesterday that she loves her
red children, and they have always respected her and obeyed her
laws. I asked you yesterday, and ask you now, to tell me who would
speak for you, and how many bands of each nation are represented
here. I have heard that you are not ready to speak to me yet but do
not know it, and I want you to say anything you have to say before
all, and I will speak in the same way. What I have to talk about
concerns you, your children and their children, who are yet unborn,
and you must think well over it, as the Queen has thought well over
it. What I want, is for you to take the Queen's hand, through mine,
and shake hands with her for ever, and now I want, before I say any
more, to hear from the Chiefs if they are ready with their men to
speak for them, and if they are not ready if they will be ready
to-morrow."
CAN-A-HAH-CHA-PEW, THE MAN OF THE BOW,--"We are not ready yet, we
have not gathered together yet. That is all I have to say."
PEI-CHE-TO'S SON--O-TA-HA-O-MAN, THE GAMBLER--"My dear friends,
do you want me to speak for you to these great men?" (the Indians
signified their consent). "I heard you were to come here, that was
the reason that all the camps were collected together, I heard
before-hand too where the camp was to be placed, but I tell you
that I am not ready yet. Every day there are other Indians coming
and we are not all together. Where I was told to pitch my tent that
is where I expected to see the great men in the camp. That is all."
HIS HONOR--"With regard to the camp, the Queen sent one of her
chief men of our soldiers with us, and he selected the best place
for the men, the place where we are now, and I think it is a good
place. At first he thought to have encamped across the river, but
he thought this was better ground and chose it. I think it just as
well that our tents should be at a little distance from your braves
and your camp. I want to say to the Indian children of the Queen
that if their people are coming in, that our men have walked a long
way here, and must go back again to Fort Garry, and I have other
things to do. Mr. Laird has to go back again to look after other
things for the Queen at Ottawa. I want to ask the Chiefs when they
will be ready to meet us to-morrow."
PEI-CHE-TO'S SON--"I have said before, we are not ready."
HIS HONOR--"Let them send me word through their Chiefs when they
are ready."
THIRD DAY'S CONFERENCE
September 11, 1874.
The Crees and their Chiefs met the Commissioners. The Saulteaux
Chief was not present, though most of the tribe were present.
An Indian, "the Crow," advised the assembled Crees, the Saulteaux
not having arrived, to listen attentively to what words he said.
His Honor the Lieut.-Governor then arose and said: "I am glad to
meet you here to-day. We have waited long and began to wonder
whether the Queen's red children were not coming to meet her
messengers. All the ground here is the Queen's and you are free to
speak your mind fully. We want you to speak to me face to face. I
am ready now with my friends here to give you the Queen's message.
Are your ears open to hear? Have you chosen your speakers?"
THE LOUD VOICE--"There is no one to answer."
HIS HONOR--"You have had time enough to select your men to answer
and I will give you the Queen's message. The Queen knows that you
are poor; the Queen knows that it is hard to find food for
yourselves and children; she knows that the winters are cold, and
your children are often hungry; she has always cared for her red
children as much as for her white. Out of her generous heart and
liberal hand she wants to do something for you, so that when the
buffalo get scarcer, and they are scarce enough now, you may be
able to do something for yourselves."
THE LOUD VOICE (to the Indians)--"I wonder very much at your
conduct. You understand what is said and you understand what is
right and good. You ought to listen to that and answer it, every
one of you. What is bad you cannot answer."
HIS HONOR--"What the Queen and her Councillors would like is this,
she would like you to learn something of the cunning of the white
man. When fish are scarce and the buffalo are not plentiful she
would like to help you to put something in the land, she would like
that you should have some money every year to buy things that you
need. If any of you would settle down on the land, she would give
you cattle to help you; she would like you to have some seed to
plant. She would like to give you every year, for twenty years,
some powder, shot, and twine to make nets of. I see you here before
me to-day. I will pass away and you will pass away. I will go where
my fathers have gone and you also, but after me and after you will
come our children. The Queen cares for you and for your children,
and she cares for the children that are yet to be born. She would
like to take you by the hand and do as I did for her at the Lake of
the Woods last year. We promised them and we are ready to promise
now to give five dollars to every man, woman and child, as long as
the sun shines and water flows. We are ready to promise to give
$1,000 every year, for twenty years, to buy powder and shot and
twine, by the end of which time I hope you will have your little
farms. If you will settle down we would lay off land for you, a
square mile for every family of five. Whenever you go to a Reserve,
the Queen will be ready to give you a school and schoolmaster, and
the Government will try to prevent fire-water from being sent among
you. If you shake hands with us and make a treaty, we are ready to
make a present at the end of the treaty, of eight dollars for every
man, woman and child in your nations. We are ready also to give
calico, clothing and other presents. We are ready to give every
recognized Chief, a present of twenty-five dollars, a medal, and a
suit of clothing. We are also ready to give the Chief's soldiers,
not exceeding four in each band, a present of ten dollars, and next
year and every year after, each chief will be paid twenty-five
dollars, and his chief soldiers not exceeding four in each band,
will receive ten dollars. Now I think that you see that that the
Queen loves her red children, that she wants to do you good, and
you ought to show that you think so. I cannot believe that you will
be the first Indians, the Queen's subjects, who will not take her
by the hand. The Queen sent one of her councillors from Ottawa, and
me, her Governor, to tell you her mind. I have opened my hands and
heart to you. It is for you to think of the future of those who are
with you now, of those who are coming after you, and may the Great
Spirit guide you to do what is right. I have only one word more to
say. The last time I saw you I was not allowed to say all I wanted
to say until you went away. What I wanted to say is this, I have
put before you our message, I want you to go back to your tents and
think over what I have said and come and meet me to-morrow.
Recollect that we cannot stay very long here. I have said all."
FOURTH DAY'S CONFERENCE
September 12, 1874.
In the morning four Indians, two Crees and two Saulteaux, waited on
the Commissioners and asked that they should meet the Indians half
way, and off the Company's reserve, and that the soldiers should
remove their camps beside the Indian encampment, that they would
meet the Commissioners then and confer with them; that there was
something in the way of their speaking openly where the marquee had
been pitched. Their request was complied with as regarded the place
of meeting only, and the spot for the conference selected by Col.
Smith and the Indians.
The meeting was opened by the Lieut.-Governor, who said, "Crees and
Saulteaux,--I have asked you to meet us here to-day. We have been
asking you for many days to meet us and this is the first time you
have all met us. If it was not my duty and if the Queen did not
wish it, I would not have taken so much trouble to speak to you. We
are sent a long way to give you her message. Yesterday I told the
Crees her message, and I know that the Saulteaux know what it was,
but that there may be no mistake, I will tell it to you again and I
will tell you more. When I have given my message understand that
you will have to answer it, as I and my friends will have to leave
you. You are the subjects of the Queen, you are her children, and
you are only a little band to all her other children. She has
children all over the world, and she does right with them all. She
cares as much for you as she cares for her white children, and the
proof of it is that wherever her name is spoken her people whether
they be red or white, love her name and are ready to die for it,
because she is always just and true. What she promises never
changes. She knows the condition of her people here; you are not
her only red children; where I come from, in Ontario and in Quebec,
she has many red children, and away beyond the mountains she has
other red children, and she wants to care for them all. Last year I
was among the Saulteaux; we have the Saulteaux where I came from.
They were my friends. I was the son of a white Chief who had a high
place among them, they told him they would do his work, they called
him Shekeisheik. I learned from him to love the red man, and it was
a pleasant duty and good to my heart when the Queen told me to come
among her Saulteaux children and I expect the Crees and the
Saulteaux to take my hand as they did last year. In our hands they
feel the Queen's, and if they take them the hands of the white and
red man will never unclasp. In other lands the white and red man
are not such friends as we have always been, and why? Because the
Queen always keeps her word, always protects her red men. She
learned last winter that bad men from the United States had come
into her country and had killed some of her red children, What did
she say? This must not be, I will send my men and will not suffer
these bad men to hurt my red children, their lives are very dear to
me. And now I will tell you our message. The Queen knows that her
red children often find it hard to live. She knows that her red
children, their wives and children, are often hungry, and that the
buffalo will not last for ever and she desires to do something for
them. More than a hundred years ago, the Queen's father said to the
red men living in Quebec and Ontario, I will give you land and
cattle and set apart Reserves for you, and will teach you. What has
been the result? There the red men are happy; instead of getting
fewer in number by sickness they are growing in number; their
children have plenty. The Queen wishes you to enjoy the same
blessings, and so I am here to tell you all the Queen's mind, but
recollect this, the Queen's High Councillor here from Ottawa, and
I, her Governor, are not traders; we do not come here in the spirit
of traders; we come here to tell you openly, without hiding
anything, just what the Queen will do for you, just what she thinks
is good for you, and I want you to look me in the face, eye to eye,
and open your hearts to me as children would to a father, as
children ought to do to a father, and as you ought to the servants
of the great mother of us all. I told my friends yesterday that
things changed here, that we are here to-day and that in a few
years it may be we will not be here, but after us will come our
children. The Queen thinks of the children yet unborn. I know that
there are some red men as well as white men who think only of
to-day and never think of to-morrow. The Queen has to think of what
will come long after to-day. Therefore, the promises we have to
make to you are not for to-day only but for to-morrow, not only for
you but for your children born and unborn, and the promises we make
will be carried out as long as the sun shines above and the water
flows in the ocean. When you are ready to plant seed the Queen's
men will lay off Reserves so as to give a square mile to every
family of five persons, and on commencing to farm the Queen will
give to every family cultivating the soil two hoes, one spade, one
scythe for cutting the grain, one axe and plough, enough of seed
wheat, barley, oats and potatoes to plant the land they get ready.
The Queen wishes her red children to learn the cunning of the white
man and when they are ready for it she will send schoolmasters on
every Reserve and pay them. We have come through the country for
many days and we have seen hills and but little wood and in many
places little water, and it may be a long time before there are
many white men settled upon this land, and you will have the right
of hunting and fishing just as you have now until the land is
actually taken up. (His Honor repeated the offers which had been
given to the Saulteaux on the previous day.) I think I have told
you all that the Queen is willing to do for you. It ought to show
you that she has thought more about you than you have about her. I
will be glad now to have those whom you have selected speak for you
and I again ask you to keep nothing back. This is the first time
you have had white chiefs, officers of the Queen, so high in her
Councils, so trusted by her among you. We have no object but your
good at heart, and therefore we ask you to speak out to us, to open
your minds to us, and believe that we are your true and best
friends, who will never advise you badly, who will never whisper
bad words in your ears, who only care for your good and that of
your children. I have told you the truth, the whole truth, and now
we expect to hear from the two nations and any other tribe who may
be represented here. My friend Mr. Laird reminds me that he has
come from an Island in the far off sea, that he has go back to
Ottawa and then go to his own home, that he was asked specially to
help me in speaking to you and advising me. He is obliged to go
away as I am, and therefore we want you to answer us."
COTE, or MEE-MAY (Saulteaux Chief)--"I cannot say anything to you.
It is that man (pointing to Loud Voice) will speak."
LOUD VOICE (Cree Chief)--"If I could speak, if I could manage to
utter my feelings there is reason why I should answer you back; but
there is something in my way, and that is all I can tell you. This
man (the Gambler) will tell you."
O-TA-KA-O-NAN, OR THE GAMBLER.--"This morning I saw the chief of
the soldiers, who asked me what is in your way that you cannot come
and meet the Queen's messengers; then I told him what was in the
way. And now that I am come in, what do I see? You were rather slow
in giving your hand. You said that the Queen spoke through you and
spoke very plainly, but I cannot speak about what you said at
present; the thing that is in the way that is what I am working
at."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We have come here for the purpose of knowing
what is in your mind. I held out my hand but you did not do as your
nation did at the Angle. When I arrived there the Chief and his men
came and gave me the pipe of peace and paid me every honor. Why?
Because I was the servant of the queen. I was not slow in offering
my hand, I gave it freely and from my heart, and whenever we found
I could please you by coming here, we sent the chief of the
soldiers to select a suitable place to meet you. You tell me there
is something in your mind. If there is anything standing between
us, how can we take it away or answer you unless we know what it
is?"
THE GAMBLER--"I told the soldier master you did not set your camp
in order, you came and staid beyond over there, that is the reason
I did not run in over there. Now when you have come here, you see
sitting out there a mixture of Half-breeds, Crees, Saulteaux and
Stonies, all are one, and you were slow in taking the hand of a
Half-breed. All these things are many things that are in my way. I
cannot speak about them."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Why are you here to-day? because we asked you
to come, because it was a good place to speak with them the reason
we wished to see them. I am now quite willing to tell you all about
Fort Pelly. The Queen heard that Americans had come into the
country and were treating her Indian children badly. I myself sent
her word that twenty-five of her Indian children, men, women and
children, had been shot down by the American traders, then she
resolved to protect her red children, for that reason she has
determined to have a body of men on horses as policemen to keep all
bad people, white or red, in order. She will not allow her red
children to be made drunk and shot down again as some of them were
a few months ago. Now you ought to be glad that you have a Queen
who takes such an interest in you. What are they doing now up at
Fort Pelly? The men must have some place to live in this winter,
they cannot live out of doors, and some men have gone to Fort Pelly
to build houses for them, and the Queen expects that you will do
all you can to help them because they are your friends. There was a
treaty before and Indians are paid under it, but we were told as we
passed Fort Ellice that there were a few Indians there who were not
included in that treaty, and had never been paid, and they agreed
to meet us when we go back, I do not quite understand another
point. We have here Crees, Saulteaux, Assiniboines and other
Indians, they are all one, and we have another people, the
Half-breeds, they are of your blood and my blood. The Queen cares
for them, one of them is here an officer with a Queen's coat on his
back. At the Lake of the Woods last winter every Half-Breed who was
there with me was helping me, and I was proud of it, and glad to
take the word back to the Queen, and her servants, and you may rest
easy, you may leave the Half-breeds in the hands of the Queen who
will deal generously and justly with them. There was a Half-breed
came forward to the table. He was only one of many here. I simply
wanted to know whether he was authorized by you to take any part in
the Council, as it is the Indians alone we are here to meet. He
told me you wanted him here as a witness. We have plenty of
witnesses here, but when I heard that, I welcomed him as I had done
you, and shook hands with him, and he ought to have told you that.
I have given our answer and I have always found this that it is
good for men to try to understand each other, and to speak openly,
if they do that and both are earnest, if their hearts are pure,
they will and can understand each other."
THE GAMBLER--"I have understood plainly before what he (the Hudson
Bay Company) told me about the Queen. This country that he (H. B.
Co.) bought from the Indians let him complete that. It is that
which is in the way. I cannot manage to speak upon anything else,
when the land was staked off it was all the Company's work. That is
the reason I cannot speak of other things."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We don't understand what you mean. Will you
explain?"
THE GAMBLER--"I know what I have to tell you. Who surveyed this
land? Was it done by the Company? This is the reason I speak of the
Company, why are you staying in the Company's house?"
LIEUT.-GOVERNOR MORRIS--"The Company have a right to have certain
lands granted them by the Queen, who will do what is fair and just
for the Company, for the Indians, for the Half-breeds, and for the
whites. She will make no distinction. Whatever she promises she
will carry out. The Company are are nothing to her except that they
are carrying on trade in this country, and that they are subjects
to her just as you are. You ask then why I went to the Company's
house? I came here not at my own pleasure. I am not so strong as
you are. I never slept in a tent in my life before and was only too
glad to find a home to go to."
The Gambler--"I understand now. And now this Company man. This is
the Company man (pointing to Mr. McDonald). This is the thing I
cannot speak of. The Cree does not know, the Saulteaux does not
know. It was never known when this was surveyed, neither by the
Cree nor the Saulteaux."
Lieut.-Gov. Morris--"The Company are trading in this country and
they require to have places to carry out their trade. If the Queen
gives them land to hold under her she has a perfect right to do it,
just as she will have a perfect right to lay off lands for you if
you agree to settle on them. I am sorry for you; I am afraid you
have been listening to bad voices who have not the interests of the
Indians at heart. If because of these things you will not speak to
us we will go away with hearts sorry for you and for your children,
who thus throw back in our faces the hand of the Queen that she has
held out to you."
The Gambler--"It is very plain who speaks; the Crees are not
speaking, and the Saulteaux is speaking, if the Queen's men came
here to survey the land. I am telling you plainly. I cannot speak
any other thing till this is cleared up. Look at these children
that are sitting around here and also at the tents, who are just
the image of my kindness. There are different kinds of grass
growing here that is just like those sitting around here. There is
no difference. Even from the American land they are here, but we
love them all the same, and when the white skin comes here from far
away I love him all the same. I am telling you what our love and
kindness is. This is what I did when the white man came, but when
he came back he paid no regard to me how he carried on."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I did not know till I came here that any
survey had been made because I had nothing to do with it; but my
friend, one of the Queen's Councillors, tells me it was done by the
authority of the Queen."
THE GAMBLER--"I want to tell you the right story. I waited very
much for the Queen's messenger when I saw what the Company did.
Perhaps he may know why he did so. Perhaps if I were to ask him now
he would say. That is what I would think. This is the reason. I am
so pleased at what I see here I cannot manage to speak because of
the Company."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We cannot see why you cannot speak to the
Queen's messengers because of the Company. The Company is no
greater in her sight than one of those little children is in yours,
and whatever she promises, either to the Company or the little
child, she will do. The Company ought not to be a wall between you
and us; you will make a mistake if you send us away with a wall
between us, when there should be none."
THE GAMBLER--"I do not send you away; for all this I am glad. I
know this is not the Queen's work. He (H. B. Co.) is the head; he
does whatever he thinks all around here, that is the reason I
cannot say anything."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am very sorry that you cannot answer."
THE GAMBLER--"The Company have stolen our land. I heard that at
first. I hear it is true. The Queen's messengers never came here,
and now I see the soldiers and the settlers and the policemen. I
know it is not the Queen's work, only the Company has come and they
are the head, they are foremost; I do not hold it back. Let this be
put to rights; when this is righted I will answer the other."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Company have not brought their soldiers
here. This man is not an officer of the Company. I am not an
officer of the Company. We did not come at the request of the
Company, but at that of the Queen. I told you that the Queen had
sent her policemen here. You see the flag there, then know that we
are the Queen's servants, and not the Company's, and it is for you
to decide on the message I have delivered to you."
THE GAMBLER--"When one Indian takes anything from another we call
it stealing, and when we see the present we say pay us. It is the
Company I mean."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What did the Company steal from you?"
THE GAMBLER--"The earth, trees, grass, stones, all that which I see
with my eyes."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Who made the earth, the grass, the stone, and
the wood? The Great Spirit. He made them for all his children to
use, and it is not stealing to use the gift of the Great Spirit.
The lands are the Queen's under the Great Spirit. The Chippewas
were not always here. They come from the East. There were other
Indians here and the Chippewas came here, and they used the wood
and the land, the gifts of the Great Spirit to all, and we want to
try and induce you to believe that we are asking for the good of
all. We do not know how the division between us is to be taken
away. We do not know of any lands that were stolen from you, and if
you do not open your mouths we cannot get the wall taken away. You
can open your mouths if you will; we are patient but we cannot
remain here always."
THE GAMBLER--"I cannot manage to speak of anything else. It is this
I am speaking. All the Indians know how the Company set their land
in order long ago. The Company is making it more and that is the
reason I am speaking."
LIEUT.-GOVERNOR MORRIS--"Many, many years ago, before we were born,
one of the Kings gave the Company certain rights to trade in this
country. The Queen thought that this was not just neither to the
white nor the red man. She considered that all should be equal; but
when the Queen's father's father's hand had been given she could
not take it back without the Company's consent; therefore she told
the Company that the time had come when they should no longer be
the great power in this country, that she would plant her own flag,
that she would send her own Governor and soldiers, and that they
must cease to have the only right to trade here (and I am glad to
know that some of you are good traders), the Queen then told the
Company that she would govern the country herself, and she told
them she would give them some land. They had their forts, their
places of trade where they raised cattle and grain, and she told
them they could keep them, and she will no more break with them
than she will with you. There is no reason why you should not talk
to us. The Company have no more power, no more authority to govern
this country than you have, it rests with the Queen."
THE GAMBLER--"This is the reason I waited for the Queen's
messengers to come here because I knew the Company was strong and
powerful, and I knew they would set every thing in order. Truly
since the Company came here they have brought me many things which
are good, but the Company's work is in my way and I cannot utter my
words."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What do you complain of? I can not tell."
THE GAMBLER--"The survey. This one (pointing to an Indian) did not
say so, and this Saulteaux and he was never told about it. He
should have been told beforehand that this was to have been done
and it would not have been so, and I want to know why the Company
have done so. This is the reason I am talking so much about it."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you before that the Queen had
promised to give the Company certain lands around the forts and
she gave them land around this fort. I have told you that what she
promised she will do. She has taken all the lands in this country
to manage; they were hers; they were her fathers; if she gives you
reserves they will be yours and she will let no one take them from
you unless you want to sell them yourselves. It will be a sorry
thing if this nation and that nation scattered all over the country
are to suffer because of this little piece of land I see around me.
What good is it going to do to raise up a question of this kind
and block the way to our understanding each other when the Queen's
hand, full of love and generosity is held out to you? The blame
rests with you; it is time for you to talk, to open your mouth,
because I cannot take away what shuts it, you must do it yourselves."
THE GAMBLER--"This is my chief, the Queen never told this man. If
this had been told him, I would not have said what I said just now.
The Company's store was only there at first. I do not push back the
Queen's hand. Let this be cleared up."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Once for all we tell you, whatever number of
acres the Queen has promised to the Company at this post, they will
receive no more and no less. We will ascertain what was promised,
and will take care to see that what was promised and that only will
be performed with regard to the land around this Fort. We can give
you no other answer."
THE GAMBLER--"I am telling you and reporting what I had to tell.
The Company have no right to this earth, but when they are spoken
to they do not desist, but do it in spite of you. He is the head
and foremost. These Indians you see sitting around report that they
only allowed the store to be put up. That is the reason I was very
glad when I heard you were coming. The Indians were not told of the
reserves at all. I hear now, it was the Queen gave the land. The
Indians thought it was they who gave it to the Company, who are now
all over the country. The Indians did not know when the land was
given."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am weary hearing about the country. You
might understand me now. You are stronger than that little boy over
there, and the Company is stronger than a single trader, but the
Company has its master, the Queen, and will have to obey the laws
as well as all others. We have nothing to do with the Company. We
are here to talk with you about the land, I tell you what we wish
to do for your good, but if you will talk about the Company I
cannot hinder you, I think it is time now you should talk about
what concerns you all."
THE GAMBLER--"That is the reason I waited so long. I cannot speak
of anything else, my mind is resting on nothing else I know that
you will have power and good rules and this is why I am glad to
tell you what is troubling me."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you before and tell you again that
the Queen cannot and will not undo what she has done. I have told
you that we will see that the Company shall obey what she has
ordered, and get no more and no less than she has promised. We
might talk here all the year and I could not give you any other
answer, and I put it to you now face to face--speak to me about
your message, don't put it aside, if you do the responsibility will
rest upon your nation, and during the winter that is coming, many
a poor woman and child will be saying, how was it that our
councillors and our braves shut their ears to the mouth of the
Queen's messengers and refused to tell them their words. This
Company, I have told you is nothing to us, it is nothing to the
Queen, but their rights have to be respected just as much as those
of the meanest child in the country. The Queen will do right
between you and them I can say no more than what I have said and
if the Indians will not speak to us we cannot help it, and if the
Indians won't answer our message, we must go back and tell the
Queen that we came here and did everything we could to show the
Indians we were in earnest in proving her love for them and that
when there was a little difficulty, I came at once to meet them
half way. What prevents you from coming out and speaking openly. I
cannot take away the difficulty you speak of, and if you will not
answer us, there is no use in talking."
THE GAMBLER--"I told the chief of the soldiers what was in our way,
what was troubling us and now we are telling you. It is that I am
working at."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What is troubling you?"
PIS-QUA (the plain) pointing to Mr. McDonald, of the Hudson's Bay
Company--"You told me you had sold your land for so much money,
L300,000. We want that money."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I wish our Indian brother had spoken before
what was in his mind. He has been going here and there, and we
never knew what he meant. I told you that many years ago the
Queen's father's father gave the Company the right to trade in the
country from the frozen ocean to the United States boundary line,
and from the Atlantic Ocean to the Pacific. The Company grew strong
and wanted no one to trade in the country but themselves. The
Queen's people said, "no, the land is not yours, the Queen's
father's father gave you rights to trade, it is time those rights
should stop." You may go on and trade like any other merchant, but
as it was worth money to you to say to this trader you shall not
buy furs at any post, the Queen would not act unjustly to the
Company. She would not take rights away from them any more than
from you; and to settle the question, she took all the lands into
her own hands and gave the Company a sum of money in place of the
rights which she had taken from them. She is ready to deal with you
justly. We are here to-day to make to you her good offers. We have
nothing to hide, nothing to conceal. The Queen acts in daylight. I
think it is time you are going to talk with us about the offers we
have made."
THE GAMBLER--"I have made up about no other article. I suppose,
indeed, I would make the thing very little and very small. When I
get back I will think over it."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have a word to say to you. In our land we
worship the Great Spirit, and do not work on Sunday. I am glad to
see that you are going back into council, and I will only ask you
to think of these things with single hearts desiring only to do
what is right and trusting my words. On Monday morning we will be
glad to meet you here and hope we will find then that your heart
has come to ours, that you will see that it is for your children's
good, to take our hands and the promises we have given. As I told
you before we would be glad to stay longer with you, but we are
obliged to go away. We ask you then to meet us on Monday morning
and Mr. Pratt will tell you so that there may be no mistake as to
what we have promised. He has it written down so that it may not be
rubbed out."
The conference then ended.
FIFTH DAY'S CONFERENCE
September 14.
Both nations, Crees and Saulteaux, having assembled, His Honor
Lieut.-Governor Morris again addressed them:--
"Children of our Great Mother, I am glad to see you again after
another day. How have you come to meet us? I hope you have come to
us with good thoughts, and hearts ready to meet ours. I have one or
two words to say to you. It is twenty days to-day since we left the
Red River. We want to turn our faces homewards. You told me on
Saturday that some of you could eat a great deal. I have something
to say to you about that. There are Indians who live here, they
have their wives and children around them. It is good for them to
be here, and have plenty to eat, but they ought to think of their
brothers; they ought to think that there are men here who have come
from a distance, from Fort Pelly and beyond, whose wives and
children are not here to eat, and they want to be at home with
them. It is time now that we began to understand each other, and
when there is something troubles us, I believe in telling it. When
you told us you were troubled about the situation of this tent, we
had it moved. Now we want you to take away our trouble, or tell us
what you mean. We are troubled about this. We are servants of the
Queen; we have been here many days giving you our message, and we
have not yet heard the voice of the nations. We have two nations
here. We have the Crees, who were here first, and we have the
Ojibbeways, who came from our country not many suns ago. We find
them here; we won't say they stole the land and the stones and the
trees; no, but we will say this, that we believe their brothers,
the Crees, said to them when they came in here: "The land is wide,
it is wide, it is big enough for us both; let us live here like
brothers;" and that is what you say, as you told us on Saturday, as
to the Half-breeds that I see around. You say that you are one with
them; now we want all to be one. We know no difference between
Crees and Ojibbeways. Now we want to ask you are you wiser, do you
know more, than the Ojibbeway people that I met last year? You are
a handful compared with them; they came to me from the Lake of the
Woods, from Rainy Lake, from the Kaministiquia, and from the Great
Lake. I told them my message, as I have told you; they heard my
words and they said they were good, and they took my hand and I
gave them mine and the presents; but that is not all. There was a
band of Ojibbeways who lived at Lake Seul, to the north of the Lake
of the Woods, 400 in number, and just before we came away we sent
our messenger to them. He told them I had shaken hands for the
Queen with all the Ojibbeways down to the Great Lake. He told them
what we had done for these, and asked them if they found it good to
take the Queen's hand through our messenger; they were pleased;
they signed the treaty; they put their names to it, saying, We take
what you promised to the other Saulteaux; and our messenger gave
them the money, just as our messengers will give your brothers who
are not here the money if we understand each other. Now, we ask you
again, are you wiser than your brothers that I have seen before? I
do not think that you will say you are, but we want you to take
away our last trouble. What I find strange is this: we are Chiefs;
we have delivered the message of our great Queen, whose words never
change, whose tongue and the tongues of whose messengers are never
forked; and how is it that we have not heard any voice back from
the Crees or Saulteaux, or from their Chiefs? I see before me two
Chiefs; we know them to be Chiefs, because we see you put them
before you to shake hands with us. They must have been made Chiefs,
not for anything we are talking about to-day, not for any presents
we are offering to you, not because of the land; then why are they
chiefs? Because I see they are old men; the winds of many winters
have whistled through their branches. I think they must have
learned wisdom; the words of the old are wise; why then, we ask
ourselves--and this is our trouble--Why are your Chiefs dumb? They
can speak. One of them is called "Loud Voice." He must have been
heard in the councils of the nation. Then I ask myself, why do they
not answer? It cannot be that you are afraid; you are not women. In
this country, now, no man need be afraid. If a white man does wrong
to an Indian, the Queen will punish them. The other day at Fort
Ellice, a white man, it is said, stole some furs from an Indian.
The Queen's policemen took him at once; sent him down to Red River,
and he is lying in jail now; and if the Indians prove that he did
wrong, he will be punished. You see then that if the white man does
wrong to the Indian he will punished; and it will be the same if
the Indian does wrong to the white man. The red and white man must
live together, and be good friends, and the Indians must live
together like brothers with each other and the white man. I am
afraid you are weary of my talking. Why do I talk so much? Because
I have only your good at heart. I do not want to go away with my
head down, to send word to the Queen, "Your red children could not
see that your heart was good towards them; could not see as you see
that it was for the good of themselves and their children's
children to accept the good things you mean for them." I have done.
Let us hear the voice of the people. Let us hear the voice of your
old wise men."
COTE--"The same man that has spoken will speak yet."
KA-KIE-SHE-WAY (Loud Voice)--"This is the one who will speak; after
he speaks I will show what I have to say."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Understand me, what I want to know is, does he
speak for the nations. If you prefer to speak by the voice of an
orator I am glad. All we want is to hear the voice of the people,
and I asked you at first to choose among yourselves those who would
speak for you; therefore I am glad to hear the man you have chosen,
and I am glad to hear that after he has done the Chief will speak
to us."
THE GAMBLER--"Saturday we met, we spoke to each other, we met at
such a time as this time, and again we said we would tell each
other something; now, then, we will report to each other a little
again. This Company man that we were speaking about, I do not hate
him; as I loved him before I love him still, and I also want that
the way he loved me at first he should love me the same; still, I
wish that the Company would keep at his work the same as he did;
that I want to be signed on the paper. I want you to put it with
your own hands. After he puts that there it is given to the
Indians, then there will be another article to speak about. The
Indians want the Company to keep at their post and nothing beyond.
After that is signed they will talk about something else."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I told you on Saturday that I had nothing to
do with the Company. The Company have a right to trade. I cannot
make them buy goods and bring them here, or stop them from bringing
them. I dare say some of you are traders; you do not ask me whether
you shall buy goods and sell them again, and I do not stop you. It
is the same way with the Company. If they make money in bringing
goods here they will bring them just as they used to do; and I want
you to understand it fully, the Company may have a little more
money than the white traders, or the Half-breeds, or the Indians,
but they have no more right, they have no more privileges, to trade
than the Indians, or the Half-breeds, or the whites; and that is
written with a higher hand than ours, and we have no power to write
anything, or to add anything, to what is written and remains in the
Queen's house beyond the sea."
THE GAMBLER--"I do not want to drive the Company anywhere. What I
said is, that they are to remain here at their house. Supposing you
wanted to take them away, I would not let them go. I want them to
remain here to have nothing but the trade. I do not hate them; we
always exchange with them, and would die if they went away."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I do not know whether we rightly understand or
not. I think you have spoken wise words; the Company helps you to
live, and they have a right to sell goods as other traders. I do
not know that I understand you rightly, that you do not want them
to sell goods anywhere except at the posts; to keep at their posts
there. If that is what you mean, I cannot say yes to that; they
have the same right to sell goods anywhere that you have. They are
no longer as they were once. The Government of the country, I think
I told you that before--understand me distinctly--the Government
have nothing to do with the Company, but the Company and all their
servants are subjects of the Queen and love and obey her laws. The
day has gone past when they made the laws. They have to hear the
laws the Queen makes, and like good subjects submit to them."
THE GAMBLER--"The Company is not to carry anything out into the
country, but are to trade in the Fort. That is what we want signed
on the paper; then we will talk on other subjects." LIEUT.-GOV.
MORRIS--"I have told you before, and I tell you again, that the
Company as traders have the right to sell goods anywhere they
please, just as you have, just as the whites have, just as the
Half-breeds have, and we have no power to take it away from them.
If the Company were to ask me to say to you that you were not to
trade anywhere except in their Fort by the lake, you would think it
very hard, and I would say to the Company, No, you shall not
interfere with the Indians throughout our land. I would like to
give you pleasure but I cannot do wrong; we won't deceive you with
smooth words. We will tell you the simple truth what we can do and
what we cannot do, but we cannot interfere as you ask us."
THE GAMBLER--"Cannot you sign such a paper?"
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"No; the Queen has signed the great paper, and
the Company have no more rights than any one else, but they have
the same."
KA-KIE-SHE-WAY (Loud Voice)--"I would not be at a loss, but I am,
because we are not united--the Crees and the Saulteaux--this is
troubling me. I am trying to bring all together in one mind, and
this is delaying us. If we could put that in order, if we were all
joined together and everything was right I would like it, I would
like to part well satisfied and pleased. I hear that His Excellency
is unwell, and I wish that everything would be easy in his mind. It
is this that annoys me, that things do not come together. I wish
for one day more, and after that there would not be much in my
way."
COTE--"You wanted me to come here and I came here. I find nothing,
and I do not think anything will go right. I know what you want; I
cannot speak of anything here concerning my own land until I go to
my own land. Whenever you desire to see me I will tell you what you
are asking me here. Now I want to return."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We asked the Chief to come here. He has as much
right to be here as another Indian. We cannot go there and ask the
people of the two great tribes to meet in one place as they have
done when they were asked to meet us. You have had many days to talk
together. If the Saulteaux are determined that they want an agreement
to prevent the Company from trading, it cannot be given. I think the
Chief here spoke wisely. He says he is in trouble because you do not
understand each other. Why are you not of one mind? Have you tried to
be of one mind? Must we go back and say we have had you here so many
days, and that you had not the minds of men--that you were not able
to understand each other? Must we go back and tell the Queen that we
held out our hands for her, and her red children put them back again?
If that be the message that your conduct to-day is going to make us
carry back, I am sorry for you, and fear it will be a long day before
you again see the Queen's Councillors here to try to do you good.
The Queen and her Councillors may think that you do not want to be
friends, that you do not want your little ones to be taught, that you
do not want when the food is getting scarce to have a hand in yours
stronger than yours to help you. Surely you will think again before
you turn your backs on the offers; you will not let so little a
question as this about the Company, without whom you tell me you
could not live, stop the good we mean to do. I hope that I am
perfectly understood; when we asked the chief here we wanted to speak
with him about his lands at his place; when we asked "Loud Voice"
here we wanted to speak with him about the land at his place; so when
we asked the other chiefs here we wanted to speak with them about the
lands at their places. Why? because we did not want to do anything
that you would not all know about, that there might be no bad
feelings amongst you. We wanted you to be of one mind and heart in
this matter, and that is the reason you are here to-day. Now it rests
with you; we have done all we could. Have you anything more to say to
us, or are we to turn our backs upon you, and go away with sorry
hearts for you and your children? It remains for you to say."
THE GAMBLER--"We do not understand you and what you are talking
about. I do not keep it from you; we have not chosen our Chiefs; we
have not appointed our soldiers and councillors; we have not looked
around us yet, and chosen our land, which I understand you to
tell us to choose. We do not want to play with you, but we cannot
appoint our Chiefs and head men quickly; that is in the way. Now it
is near mid-day, and we cannot appoint our Chiefs. This Chief who
got up last--the Queen's name was used when he was appointed to be
Chief--he wants to know where his land is to be and see it, what
like it is to be, and to find the number of his children; that is
what is in his mind. He says he came from afar, he had a good mind
for coming, and he takes the same good mind away with him. I have
not heard him say to the Saulteaux to keep back their land."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I think I understand you. We do not want to
separate in bad feeling, or to avoid any trouble in coming to an
understanding with you; because I do not believe that if we do not
agree it will ever be my good fortune to endeavor to do so again.
"Loud Voice," the Chief, has told us he wants a day to think it
over. The Chief "Cote," from the north, would like to go home, but
I am sure he will stop a day and try to understand his brothers,
and agree as the others did at the Lake of the Woods. I put my
name, and the Chiefs and the head men put theirs, and I gave the
Chief a copy, and I told him when I went home to Red River I would
have it all written out, a true copy made on skin, that could not
be rubbed out, that I would send a copy to his people so that
when we were dead and gone the letter would be there to speak for
itself, to show everything that was promised; and that was the
right way to do. I did so, and sent a copy of the treaty written
in letters of blue, gold, and black to the Chief "Maw-do-pe-nais,"
whom the people had told to keep it for them. He who speaks for the
Saulteaux tells us they have not made up their minds yet about the
land--he tells us they have not decided to refuse our hands. I am
glad to hear him say that, and if it will please my Indian brethren
here we will be glad to wait another day and meet them here
to-morrow morning, if they will promise me with the words of men
that they will look this matter straight in the face; that they
will lay aside every feeling except the good of their people, and
try to see what is right, and that they will come back and say, 'We
have done our best, we have tried to be of one mind, and considered
what was best for now, and to-morrow, and the years that are to
come when we have all passed away. This is our answer. We are very
much in earnest about this matter.' The Chief said I was not very
well, yet I am here. Why? Because the duty was laid upon me I was
afraid of the journey, but when a Chief has a duty to do he tries
to do it, and I felt that if I could do you any good, as I believed
I could, I ought to be here. I tell you this, trust my words, they
come from the heart of one who loves the Indian people, and who is
charged by his Queen to tell them the words of truth."
SIXTH DAY'S CONFERENCE
The Crees having come and shaken hands, His Honor Lieut.-Gov.
Morris rose and said:
"My friends, I have talked much; I would like to hear your voices,
I would like to hear what you say."
KA-KU-ISH-MAY, (Loud Voice--a principal chief of the Crees)--"I am
very much pleased with that, to listen to my friends, for certainly
it is good to report to each other what is for the benefit of each
other. We see the good you wish to show us. If you like what we lay
before you we will like it too. Let us join together and make the
Treaty; when both join together it is very good."
The Saulteaux arrived at this juncture, when the Lieut.-Governor
said:
"I will say to the two tribes what I said to the Crees before the
Saulteaux came. You have heard my voice for many days, you know its
sound. You have looked in my face, you have seen my mind through my
face, and you know my words are true and that they do not change.
But I am not here to talk to-day, I am here to listen. You have had
our message, you have had the Queen's words. It is time now that
you spoke. I am here to listen, my ears are open. It is for you to
speak."
KAMOOSES--"Brothers, I have one word and a small one, that is the
reason I cannot finish anything that is large. You do not see the
whole number of my tribe which is away at my back, that is the
reason I am so slow in making ready."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I want to hear the voice of those who are
here, they can speak for themselves and for those who are away."
CHE-E-KUK (the Worthy One)--"My ears are open to what you say. Just
now the Great Spirit is watching over us; it is good. He who has
strength and power is overlooking our doings. I want very much to
be good in what we are going to talk about, and our Chiefs will
take you by the hand just now."
The Chiefs now rose and shook hands with the Commissioners.
KA-HA-OO-KUS-KA-TOO (he who walks on four claws)--"It is very good
to meet together on a fine day, father. When my father used to
bring me anything I used to go and meet him, and when my father had
given it to me I gave it to my mother to cook it. When we come to
join together one half at least will come."
CHE-E-KUK (the Worthy)--"Now I am going to tell you, and you say
your ears are open. You see the Qu'Appelle Lake Indians that you
wished to see, you hear me speak but there are many far away, and
that is the reason I cannot speak for these my children who are
away trying to get something to eat; the Crees my child is not
here, the Saulteaux my child is not here, the Young Dogs are not
here, the Stonies my children are not here, this is not the number
that you see; I am only telling you this, I think I have opened my
mind."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I know you are not all here. We never could
get you all together, but you know what is good for you and for
your children. When I met the Saulteaux last year we had not 4,000
there, but there were men like you who knew what was good for
themselves, for their wives, for their children, and those not
born. I give to those who were there, and they took my hand and
took what was in it, and I sent to those who were away, and I did
for them just as I did for those who were present. It is the same
to-day. What we are ready to give you will be given to those who
are not here. What is good for you, what you think will be good for
you will be good for them. It is for you to say, not for us; we
have done all that men who love their red brothers can do, it is
for you now to act, on you rests the duty of saying whether you
believe our message or not, whether you want the Queen to help you
or not, whether or not you will go away and let the days and the
years go on, and let the food grow scarcer, and let your children
grow up and do nothing to keep off the hunger and the cold that is
before them. It is for you to say that, not for us; if we had not
your good at heart we would not have been here, and we would not
have labored these many days, if our hearts were not warm towards
you, and if we did not believe what we are doing, would be for your
good as children of our Queen. I have said all."
KAN-OO-SES--"Is it true you are bringing the Queen's kindness? Is
it true you are bringing the Queen's messenger's kindness? Is it
true you are going to give my child what he may use? Is it true you
are going to give the different bands the Queen's kindness? Is it
true that you bring the Queen's hand? Is it true you are bringing
the Queen's power?"
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Yes, to those who are here and those who are
absent, such as she has given us."
KAMOOSES--"Is it true that my child will not be troubled for what
you are bringing him?"
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Queen's power will be around him."
KAMOOSES--"Now, I am going to ask you that the debt that has been
lying in the Company's store, I want that to be wiped out. I ask it
from the great men of the Queen."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I told you before we have nothing to do with
the Company, we have nothing to do with its debts. I have told you
what we will do for you, what the Queen will do for you forever.
But the money that the Indian owes the Company is just like the
money that the Indians owe to each other or to any trader and is
not due to the Queen. We have no power to put money in your hands
and your children's to pay your debts, and it would not be right
for the Queen to come in and take away either what is between you
and the Company, or what is between you and the traders, or what
is between you and each other. If one of you owes the Chief is it
right that the Queen should wipe it out? I would be very glad if we
had it in our power to wipe out your debts, but it is not in our
power. All we can do is to put money in your hands and promise to
put money in the hands of those who are away, and give you money
every year afterwards, and help you to make a living when the food
is scarce. I have told you from the first that whether my words
please you or not I will tell you only the truth, and I will only
speak as far as the Queen has given us power."
(He who walks on four claws)--"Whenever you give to these my
children what they desire, then you will get what you want."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We will give them what we have power to give.
We are ready to hear."
KAMOOSES--"Yes, I understand and my heart also, but it is not
large, it is small, and my understanding is small; that is the word
I tell you."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you what we are ready to do for
you. Your understanding is large enough to know what is good for
you. We have talked these many days, and I ask you now to talk
straight, to tell me your mind, to tell me whether you wish to take
our offers or not, it is for you to say."
KEE-E-KUK--"Twenty dollars we want to be put in our hand every
year, this we have heard from the others. Twenty-five dollars to
each chief."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"If I understand you aright you are mistaken.
The Saulteaux did not get twenty-five dollars per head. They get
five dollars every year. We promised them five dollars every year,
and a messenger was sent this year to pay them that sum. I may tell
you that my children at the Lake of the Woods had big hearts to
ask. You say you have small. I told them that if the Queen gave
them all they asked I would have to ask her to allow me to become
an Indian, but I told them I could not give them what they asked,
and when they understood that, and understood the full breadth and
width of the Queen's goodness, they took what I offered, and I
think if you are wise you will do the same."
(A proposition was made here by an Indian that they should receive
five dollars per head every second year for fifty years, but he
must have done so without authority as it was not acceded to by the
other Indians who expressed their dissent strongly as soon as the
offer was made.)
KAMOOSES--"I am going to speak for Loud Voice and for the other
chiefs. Some chiefs are not here, they are absent, hereafter you
will see them. I myself will tell them, and my child that is at my
back will tell them also. Will you receive that which I am asking?
I want to clear up what the Indians and I want to try and put it
right, what my child will say. Well, can you give me that. We want
the same Treaty you have given to the North-West Angle. This I am
asking for."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Who are you speaking for? Is it for the whole
of the Indians? (They expressed their assent.) Are you ready to
carry it out? (They again assented.) Are your chiefs ready to sign
this afternoon if we grant you these terms? (The Indians assented
unanimously.) It is now after twelve, we will speak to you this
afternoon."
The Conference here ended to allow the Commissioners time to
consult.
AFTERNOON CONFERENCE
The Indians having assembled, presented the Chiefs, whose names
appear on the Treaty to the Commissioners as their Chiefs.
KAMOOSES--"To-day we are met together here and our minds are open.
We want to know the terms of the North-West Angle Treaty."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Do we understand that you want the same terms
which were given at the Lake of the Woods (The Indians assented.) I
have the Treaty here in a book. You must know that the steamboats
had been running through their waters, and our soldiers had been
marching through their country, and for that reason we offered the
Ojibbeways a larger sum than we offered you. Last year it was a
present, covering five years; with you it was a present for this
year only. I paid the Indians there a present in money down of
twelve dollars per head. I have told you why we offered you less,
and you will see there were reasons for it. That is the greatest
difference between what we offered you and what was paid them, but
on the other hand there were some things promised you that were not
given at the Lake of the Woods. (His Honor then explained the terms
granted in that Treaty.) We promised there that the Queen would
spend $1,500 per year to buy shot and powder, ball and twine. There
were 4,000 of them. I offered you $1,000 although you are only
one-half the number, as I do not think you number more than 2,000.
Your proportionate share would be $750 which you shall receive.
Then at the Lake of the Woods each Chief had their head men; we
have said you would have four who shall have fifteen dollars each
per year, and as at the Lake of the Woods each Chief and head man
will receive a suit of clothing once in three years, and each Chief
on signing the treaty will receive a medal and the promise of a
flag. We cannot give you the flag now, as there were none to be
bought at Red River, but we have the medals here. Now I have told
you the terms we gave at the North-West Angle of the Lake of the
Woods, and you will see that the only difference of any consequence
between there and what we offered you is in the money payment that
we give as a present, and I have told you why we made the
difference, and you will see that it was just. We had to speak with
them for four years that had gone away. We speak to you only for
four days. It was not that we came in the spirit of traders, but
because we were trying to do what was just between you and the
Queen, and the other Indians who would say that we had treated you
better than we had treated them because we put the children of this
year on the same footing as these children through whose land we
had been passing and running our steamboats for four years. You see
when you ask us to tell you everything, we show you all that has
been done, and I have to tell you again that the Ojibbeways at Lake
Seul who number 400, when I sent a messenger this spring with a
copy of those terms made at the North-West Angle with their nation,
took the Queen's hand by my messenger and made the same treaty. I
think I have told you all you want to know, and our ears are open
again."
KAMOOSES--"I want to put it a little light for all my children
around me, something more on the top. For my chief thirty dollars,
for my four chief head men twenty dollars, and each of my young
children fifteen dollars a year."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am afraid you are not talking to us
straight; when we went away you asked us to give you the terms
given at the Lake of the Woods; you asked to know what they were,
and the moment I told you, you ask three times as much for your
children as I gave them. That would not be right; and it is well
that you should know that we have not power to do so; we can give
you no more than we gave them. We hope you are satisfied. I have
one word more to say, we are in the last hours of the day you asked
us for and we must leave you. The utmost we can do, the furthest we
can go or that we ought to go is, to do what you asked, to give you
the terms granted last year at the Lake of the Woods. We can do no
more, and you have our last words. It is for you to say whether you
are satisfied or not."
KAMOOSES--"We ask that we may have cattle."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We offered you cattle on the first day, we
offered your Chief cattle for the use of his band--not for himself,
but for the use of his band; we gave the same at the Lake of the
Woods. We can give no more here."
KAMOOSES--"We want some food to take us home."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"When you sign the treaty, provisions will be
given to take you home. Now I ask you, are you ready to accept the
offer, the last offer we can make, you will see we have put you on
the same footing as the Indians at the Lake of the Woods, and we
think it is more than we ought to give, but rather than not close
the matter we have given it, we have talked long enough about this.
It is time we did something. Now I would ask, are the Crees and the
Saulteaux and the other Indians ready to make the treaty with us.
Since we went away we have had the treaty written out, and we are
ready to have it signed, and we will leave a copy with any Chief
you may select and after we leave we will have a copy written out
on skin that cannot be rubbed out and put up in a tin box, so that
it cannot be wet, so that you can keep it among yourselves so that
when we are dead our children will know what was written."
KAMOOSES--"Yes, we want each Chief to have a copy of the treaty, we
ask that the Half-breeds may have the right of hunting."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We will send a copy to each Chief. As to the
Half-breeds, you need not be afraid; the Queen will deal justly,
fairly and generously with all her children."
The Chiefs then signed the treaty, after having been assured that
they would never be made ashamed of what they then did.
One of the Chiefs on being asked to do so signed; the second called
on said he was promised the money when he signed, and returned to
his seat without doing so. The Lieutenant-Governor called him
forward--held out his hand to him and said, take my hand; it holds
the money. If you can trust us forever you can do so for half an
hour; sign the treaty. The Chief took the Governor's hands and
touched the pen, and the others followed. As soon as the treaty was
signed the Governor expressed the satisfaction of the Commissioners
with the Indians, and said that Mr. Christie and Mr. Dickieson, the
Private Secretary of the Minister of the Interior, were ready to
advance the money presents, but the Indians requested that the
payment should be postponed till next morning, which was acceded
to. The Chiefs then formally approached the Commissioners and shook
hands with them, after which the conference adjourned, the
Commissioners leaving the place of meeting under escort of the
command of Lieut.-Col. Smith, who had been in daily attendance.
Report of the interview at Fort Ellice between the Indian
Commissioners and certain Saulteaux Indians not present at
Qu'Appelle, and not included in Treaty Number Two, the Chief being
Way-wa-se-ca-pow, or "the Man proud of standing upright:"
Lieut.-Governor Morris said he had been here before, and since that
time he had met the Crees and Saulteaux nations, and had made a
treaty with them. The Indians there were from Fort Pelly and as far
distant as the Cypress Hills. He wished to know the number of the
Saulteaux to be found in this locality.
The Chief said there were about thirty tents who were not at
Qu'Appelle, and ten who were there.
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Commissioners here are representing the
Queen. I made a treaty with the Saulteaux last year at the Lake of
the Woods. They were not a little handful; but there were 4,000 of
them--and now we have made a treaty with the Crees and Saulteaux at
Qu'Appelle. There is not much need to say much--it is good for the
Indians to make treaties with the Queen--good for them and their
wives and children. Game is getting scarce and the Queen is willing
to help her children. Now we are ready to give you what we gave the
Saulteaux at the Lake of the Woods and the Saulteaux and Crees at
Qu'Appelle. It will be for you to say whether you will accept it or
not." His Honor then explained the treaty to them.
"What we offer will be for your good, as it will help you, and not
prevent you from hunting.
"We are not traders. I have told you all we can do and all we will
do. It is for you to say whether you will accept my hand or not. I
cannot wait long. I think you are not wiser than your brothers. Our
ears are open, you can speak to us."
LONG CLAWS--"My father--I shake hands with you, I shake hands with
the Queen."
SHAPONETUNG'S FIRST SON--"I find what was done at Qu'Appelle was
good, does it take in all my children?"
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Yes."
SHAPONETUNG'S FIRST SON--"I thank you for coming and bringing what
is good for our children."
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I forgot to say that we will be able to give
you a small present, some powder and shot, blankets and calicoes.
Each band must have a Chief and four headmen, but you are not all
here to-day. I want to-day to know the Chief and two headmen.
"Now I want to know will you take my hand and what is in it."
The Indians came up and shook hands in token of acceptance.
LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am glad to shake hands with you; the white
man and the red man have shaken hands and are friends. You must be
good subjects to the Queen and obey her laws."
The Indians introduced as their Chief, Way-wa-se-ca-pow; and as
their headmen, Ota-ma-koo-euin and Shaponetung's first son.
His Honor then explained the memorandum to them, when it was
signed.
CHAPTER VII
THE REVISION OF TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO
When Treaties, Numbers One and Two, were made, certain verbal
promises were unfortunately made to the Indians, which were not
included in the written text of the treaties, nor recognized
or referred to, when these Treaties were ratified by the Privy
Council. This, naturally, led to misunderstanding with the Indians,
and to widespread dissatisfaction among them. This state of matters
was reported to the Council by the successive Lieut.-Governors
of Manitoba, and by the Superintendent of Indian Affairs. On
examination of the original Treaty Number One, the Minister of the
Interior reported that a memorandum was found attached to it signed
by Mr. Commissioner Simpson, His Hon. Governor Archibald, Mr.
St. John and the Hon. Mr. McKay, purporting to contain their
understanding of the terms upon which the Indians concluded the
treaty. This memorandum was as follows:
Memorandum of things outside of the Treaty which were promised at
the Treaty at the Lower Fort, signed the 3rd day of August, A.D.
1871.
For each Chief that signed the treaty, a dress distinguishing him
as Chief.
For braves and for councillors of each Chief, a dress: it being
supposed that the braves and councillors will be two for each
Chief.
For each Chief, except Yellow Quill, a buggy.
For the braves and councillors of each Chief, except Yellow Quill,
a buggy.
In lieu of a yoke of oxen for each reserve, a bull for each, and a
cow for each Chief; a boar for each reserve, and a sow for each
Chief, and a male and female of each kind of animal raised by
farmers; these when the Indians are prepared to receive them.
A plow and a harrow for each settler cultivating the ground.
These animals and their issue to be Government property, but to be
allowed for the use of the Indians, under the superintendence and
control of the Indian Commissioner.
The buggies to be the property of the Indians to whom they are
given.
The above contains an inventory of the terms concluded with the
Indians.
WEMYSS M. SIMPSON,
MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN,
A. G. ARCHIBALD,
JAS. McKAY.
The Privy Council, by Order in Council, agreed to consider this
memorandum as part of the original treaties, and instructed the
Indian Commissioner to carry out the promises therein contained,
which had not been implemented. They also agreed to offer to raise
the annuities from three to five dollars per head, to pay a further
annual sum of twenty dollars to each chief, and to give a suit of
clothing every three years to each chief and head man, allowing
four head men to each band, upon the distinct understanding
however, that any Indian accepting the increased payment, thereby
formally abandoned all claims against the Government, in connection
with the verbal promises of the Commissioners, other than those
recognized by the treaty and the memorandum above referred to.
The Government then invited Lieut.-Gov. Morris, in conjunction with
the Indian Commissioner, Lieut.-Col. Provencher, to visit the
several bands interested in the treaties, with a view to submit to
them the new terms, and obtain their acceptance of the proposed
revision of the treaties. His Honor accordingly placed his
services at the disposal of the Government, and was at his request
accompanied by the Hon. Mr. McKay, who had been present at the
making of the original treaties, and was well versed in the Indian
tongues. In October 1875, these gentlemen entered upon the task
confided to them, and first proceeded to meet the large and
important band of St. Peters, in the Province of Manitoba. The
matter was fully discussed with the Indians, the Order in Council,
and memorandum read and explained to them, and their written assent
to the new terms obtained. After their return from St. Peters,
owing to the advanced season of the year, it was decided to
divide the work, the Lieutenant-Governor requesting the Indian
Commissioner to proceed to Fort Alexander on Lake Winnipeg, and to
the Broken Head and Roseau Rivers, while Messrs. Morris and McKay,
would undertake to meet the Indians included in Treaty Number Two
at Manitoba House on Lake Manitoba. Colonel Provencher met the
Indians at the places above mentioned, and obtained the assent of
the Indians of the three bands to the revised treaty. Messrs.
Morris and McKay proceeded by carriage to Lake Manitoba, and thence
in a sail boat, where they met the Indians of the six bands of
Treaty Number Two, and after full discussion, the Indians cordially
accepted the new terms, and thus was pleasantly and agreeably
closed, with all the bands of Treaties One and Two, except that of
the Portage band, who were not summoned to any of the conferences,
a fruitful source of dissension and difficulty. The experience
derived from this misunderstanding, proved however, of benefit with
regard to all the treaties, subsequent to Treaties One and Two, as
the greatest care was thereafter taken to have all promises fully
set out in the treaties, and to have the treaties thoroughly and
fully explained to the Indians, and understood by them to contain
the whole agreement between them and the Crown. The arrangement,
however, of the matter with the Portage band was one of more
difficulty. This band had always been troublesome. In 1870, they
had warned off settlers and Governor MacTavish of the Hudson's Bay
Company had been obliged to send the Hon. James McKay to make
terms for three years with them for the admission of settlers. In
1874, they twice sent messengers with tobacco (the usual Indian
credentials for such messengers) to Qu'Appelle to prevent the
making of the treaty there. Besides the claims to the outside
promises, preferred by the other Indians, they had an additional
grievance, which they pressed with much pertinacity. To obtain
their adhesion to Treaty Number One, the Commissioners had given
them preferential terms in respect to their reserve, and the
wording in the treaty of these terms enhanced the difficulty. The
language used was as follows: "And for the use of the Indians of
whom Oo-za-we-kwun is Chief, so much land on the south and east
side of the Assiniboine, as will furnish one hundred and sixty
acres for each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or
smaller families, reserving also a further tract enclosing said
reserve, to contain an equivalent to twenty-five square miles of
equal breadth, to be laid out around the reserve." The enclosure
around the homestead reserve led to extravagant demands by them.
They did not understand its extent, and claimed nearly half of the
Province of Manitoba under it.
The Indians constantly interviewed the Lieutenant-Governor on
the subject, and when the Hon. Mr. Laird, then Minister of the
Interior, visited Manitoba, they twice pressed their demands upon
him. The Government requested the Hon. Messrs. Morris and McKay to
endeavor to settle the long pending dispute, and they proceeded to
the Round Plain on the river Assiniboine with that view. They met
the Indians, some five hundred in number, but without result. The
Indians were divided among themselves. A portion of the band had
forsaken Chief Yellow Quill and wished the recognition of the Great
Bear, grandson of Pee-qual-kee-quash, a former chief of the band.
The Yellow Quill band wanted the reserve assigned in one locality;
the adherents of the Bear said that place was unsuited for farming,
and they wished it to be placed at the Round Plain, where they had
already commenced a settlement. The land to which they were
entitled under the treaty was 34,000 acres, but their demands were
excessive.
The Chief Yellow Quill was apprehensive of his own followers,
and besides the danger of collision between the two sections was
imminent. The Commissioners finally intimated to the band that they
would do nothing with them that year, but would make the customary
payment of the annuities under the original treaty and leave them
till next year to make up their minds as to accepting the new
terms, to which the Indians agreed.
In 1876, the Government again requested Mr. Morris to meet these
Indians and endeavor to arrange the long pending dispute with them,
and in July he travelled to the Long Plain on the Assiniboine with
that object in view. He had previously summoned the band to meet
there, and had also summoned a portion of the band known as the
White Mud River Indians, dwelling on the shores of Lake Manitoba,
who were nominally under the chieftainship of Yellow Quill, and
were, as such, entitled to a portion of the original reserve, but
did not recognize the Chief. Mr. Morris was accompanied by Mr.
Graham, of the Indian Department, Secretary and Paymaster. On
arrival at his destination, the Lieutenant-Governor found the
Indians assembled, but in three camps. Those adhering to Yellow
Quill, the Bear, and the White Mud River Indians, being located
on different parts of the plains, Mr. Reid, Surveyor, was also
present, to explain the extent and exact dimensions of the proposed
reserve.
The next day the Indians were assembled, and the conference lasted
for two days. The Yellow Quill band were still obstructive, but the
other two sections were disposed to accept the terms. The question
of the reserve was the main difficulty. The Yellow Quill band still
desired a reserve for the whole. The others wished to remain, the
Bear's party at the Round Plain, and the White Mud River Indians at
Lake Manitoba, where they resided and had houses and farms. In the
interval from the previous year, the Bear's band had built several
houses, and made enclosures for farming. Eventually, the Indians
were made to comprehend the extent of land they were really
entitled to, but the Governor intimated that the land was for all,
and that he would divide the band into three, each with a Chief
and councillors, and that he would give each band a portion of the
whole number of acres, proportionate to their numbers--the Bear at
the Round Plain, the White Mud Indians at their place of residence,
and the Yellow Quill band wherever they might select, in unoccupied
territory. After long consultations among themselves the Indians
accepted the proposal. The Bear was recognized as a Chief, and a
Chief selected by the White Mud River band was accepted as such.
The Indians also agreed to accept the revised terms of Treaty
Number One, and an agreement in accordance with the understanding
was prepared and signed by the Lieutenant-Governor, and the Chief
and head men. The Indians preferred a request to receive the two
dollars, increased amount, which, as they said, "had slipped
through their fingers last year," which was granted, and also that
the councillors should be paid yearly, as in the other treaties,
subsequently made. This the Governor promised to recommend, and it
was eventually granted, being made applicable to all the bands in
Treaties Numbers One and Two.
Thus was so far closed, a controversy which had lasted for
some years, and had been fruitful of unpleasant feelings, the
negotiations terminating in that result having been from a variety
of causes more difficult to bring to a satisfactory solution than
the actual making of treaties, for the acquisition of large extents
of territory. On the leaving of the Lieutenant-Governor, the
morning after the conclusion of the arrangement, the Indians
assembled and gave three cheers for the Queen and Governor, and
fired a feu de joie. Mr. Reid at once proceeded to set aside the
reserves for the Bear and White Mud bands, but the selection of a
reserve by the Yellow Quill band was attended with still further
further difficulty, although it was eventually pointed out by them,
and surveyed by Mr. Reid, it being in a very desirable locality.
The despatches of the Lieutenant-Governor to the Minister of the
Interior, giving an account in full of the negotiations for the
revision of the Treaties Numbers One and Two, will complete this
record, and will be found to give a clear narrative of them. These
are as follows:
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 5th October, 1875.
Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in pursuance of your
request that I should meet the Indians of Treaties Numbers One
and Two, with a view to a revision of the terms thereof, and
an adjustment of the disputed questions connected therewith,
I proceeded to the St. Peter Reserve on the 5th of August and
encamped near the Indian tents.
On the 6th I met Chief Prince and his band, being accompanied by
the Hon. James McKay, who at my request gave me the benefit of
his valuable services, and by Mr. Provencher. I explained to the
Indians the terms offered to them by the Government, and obtained
their written assent thereto, endorsed on a parchment copy of the
Order in Council of date the 30th April, 1875. As however there
are in the bands of Treaties Numbers One and Two, four councillors,
i.e., head men, and two braves, we were under the necessity of
agreeing that they should continue at that number, instead of two,
as specified in the report of the Privy Council. We then brought
before them your request that the portion of the reserve embraced
in the proposed new town near the Pacific Railway crossing should
be sold for their benefit, to which they agreed, and the formal
instrument of surrender will be enclosed to you by the Indian
Commissioner.
The Indians living at Nettley Creek asked to have a reserve
assigned them there, and I promised to bring their request under
your notice.
I did not bring up the question of the division of the band into
two, as my experience with the Portage band, arising from a similar
difficulty, led me to fear that complications might arise from the
proposal which might prevent the settlement of the more important
matter of the disposal of the open questions relating to the
treaty. I was therefore of opinion that the division of the band
should be postponed to next year, and acted upon that opinion. A
party of Norway House Indians were present and asked for a reserve
at the Grassy Narrows. I informed them that one could not be
granted at that place, and learning from them that the Chief at
Norway House was about leaving there with a party of Indians to
confer with me, I engaged three of the Indians present to proceed
at once to Norway House and inform the Indians that I would meet
them there about the middle of September.
I have since learned that they met the Chief after he had left
Norway House or Fort Garry, and caused him to return.
I have the honor to be, etc.,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Governor.
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 4th October, 1875.
Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that after my return from St.
Peters, finding that in view of my contemplated mission to Lake
Winnipeg it would be impossible for me to visit all the bands of
Indians included in Treaties Numbers One and Two, I requested
the Indian Commissioner, Mr. Provencher, to proceed to meet them
at Fort Alexander and the Broken Head and Roseau rivers, while
I should proceed to Lake Manitoba and meet at Manitoba House
the various bands of Indians included in Treaty Number Two. In
pursuance of this arrangement, I left here on the 17th of August
for Oak Point, on Lake Manitoba, where I was to take a boat for
Manitoba Post.
I was accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, whose presence enabled
me to dispense with an interpreter, and was of importance
otherwise, as he had assisted my predecessor in the making of the
treaty originally at Manitoba Post. Mr. Graham, of the Indian
Department, also accompanied me to make the payments and distribute
the pensions. I reached Oak Point on the afternoon of the 18th, and
left there on the afternoon of the 20th, arriving at Manitoba House
on the evening of the 21st. The next day being Sunday, nothing of
course was done relating to my mission, but on Monday morning I
met the Indians at ten o'clock on the lake shore. The six bands
included in the treaty were all represented by their Chiefs and
head men and a large number of their people.
I explained to them the object of our mission, my remarks being
fully interpreted by Mr. McKay, and obtained their assent in
writing to the Order in Council of the 30th April last, the terms
of which were accepted with cordiality and good feeling by the
Indians.
The new medals and uniforms were distributed to the Chiefs and head
men, and the payments under the revised treaty were then commenced
by Mr. McKay and Mr. Graham, and continued until 12.30 p.m.
On the 24th, the payments were resumed and concluded, but owing to
heavy rain and high winds, we were unable to leave Manitoba Post
until the 25th. The Indians on our departure again firing their
guns in token of their respect and good will. Owing to stormy
weather, which obliged us to encamp on Bird Island, we did not
return to Oak Point until the afternoon of the 27th.
On the 28th, the Indians residing in that vicinity, and belonging
to Sousanye's band, were paid by Messrs. McKay and Graham. I
returned to Fort Garry on the 1st September, in the afternoon, my
journey having been protracted by unfavorable weather, and by the
fact that owing to the prevalence of shoals, the navigation of Lake
Manitoba is difficult in stormy weather.
As only a small portion of the Riding House Indians were present, I
informed them that Mr. Graham would proceed to the mountains after
our return, to make the payments, and that I would send by him a
reply to their requests, as to the retention by them of the reserve
originally designated in the treaty, and this I have since done
affirmatively with your sanction. Mr. Provencher succeeded in
obtaining the adhesion of the bands at Fort Alexander, Broken Head
and Roseau rivers to the new terms, and has handed me the copies of
the Order in Council with their assents endorsed thereon.
You will therefore perceive that with the exception of the Portage
band with regard to whom I wrote you fully on the 2nd of August
last, the assent of all the Indians interested therein to the
proposed mode of settlement of the unrecorded promises made at the
conclusion of Treaties Numbers One and Two, has been obtained, and
I feel that I have reason to congratulate the Privy Council on the
removal of a fruitful source of difficulty and discontent. But I
would add, that it becomes all the more important that a better
system of Indian administration should be devised so as to secure
the prompt and rigid carrying out of the new terms in their
entirety.
You are already in possession of my views on this subject, and
I trust that local agents will be appointed to be supervised by
the Indian Commissioner and that an Indian Council of advice
and control, sitting at Fort Garry, will be entrusted with the
direction of the Treaties One, Two, and the upper portion of Three,
and the new Treaty Number Five, so as to secure prompt and
effective administration of Indian Affairs.
Under the system of local agents, the necessity of large gatherings
of the Indians will be avoided, and much expense to the Government,
and inconvenience to the Indians, avoided. I have further to record
my sense of the services rendered to me by Messrs. McKay and
Graham. The latter discharged his duties with promptitude and
efficiency, and Mr. McKay and he introduced a mode of distribution
of the provisions to which I would call your attention.
I have the honor to be, etc.,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Governor.
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 2nd August, 1875.
Sir,--In accordance with your request I have commenced my visits to
the Indian bands included in Treaties Numbers One and Two, with a
view to settling the matters in dispute. I left here on the 22nd
inst., and was accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, whom I had
invited to accompany me in consequence of his having been present
at the making of the treaties, and by the Indian Commissioner.
I reached the Round Plain on the Assiniboine river, where Yellow
Quill's band of Saulteaux had assembled on the 26th, and met the
Indians next day, explaining to them our mission, and telling them
what I was empowered to promise them. This band, as you are aware,
has always been dissatisfied, and have been difficult to deal with
I found them in an intractable frame of mind, and the difficulty of
the position was enhanced by a division amongst themselves.
The original Chief of the Portage band was Pee-quah-kee-quah, who
was a party to the treaty with Lord Selkirk. On his death he was
succeeded by his son, who died some years ago leaving a boy, who
has now grown up. Yellow Quill was appointed chief by the Hudson's
Bay Company when Pee-quah-kee-quah's son died. The grandson is now
grown up and has returned from the plains, where he has been, and
claims to be recognized as an hereditary chief, and about half
the band have followed his lead. After we had been in conference
some time, an Indian rose and told me that when the chief of the
Portage died, he charged him to keep the land for his son, and that
they wished a reserve at the Portage. Another rose and produced
Pee-quah-kee-quah's King George medal, and said the chief had
placed it in his keeping and charged him to deliver it to his son,
when he was old enough to be a chief, and then placed it round the
neck of Kes-kee-maquah, or the Short Bear. They then asked that I
should receive him as a chief, in place of Yellow Quill. I told
them that could not be done. That Yellow Quill must remain a chief,
but that I would report their request on behalf of the young chief
to the Government at Ottawa and let them know their decision,
but that they could get no reserve at the Portage as only that
mentioned in the treaty would be given, and with this they were
satisfied. The conference then went on, the two parties sitting
apart and holding no intercourse with each other. I spent two days
with them making no progress, as they claimed that a reserve thirty
miles by twenty was promised them as shewn in the rough sketch
enclosed, made at their dictation and marked "A." I produced the
plan of the reserve, as proposed to be allotted to them, containing
34,000 acres, but Yellow Quill said it was not in the right place,
and was not what was promised, and morever it was not surrounded
by the belt of five miles, mentioned in the treaty, but was only
partially so and did not cross the river. I told them they could
get no more land than was promised in the treaty. They appealed to
Mr. McKay whether the Reserve was not promised to be on both sides
of the river, and he admitted that it was. I told them it was not
so written in the treaty, and that if the Government should allow
it to cross the river, the rights of navigation must be conserved,
but I would consult the Queen's Councillors. They replied that they
would go to the "Grand Father" and get him to intercede for them,
meaning the "President of the United States," as I afterwards
discovered, an American Indian having persuaded them to take this
course.
They refused to discuss or accept anything until the Reserve
Question was settled, and while I was speaking on the afternoon of
the second day, Yellow Quill's Councillors went away, and left him
alone, when he followed. I then left the Council tent, leaving word
that I would depart in the morning. Yellow Quill came back and said
that he would accept the five dollars, but Mr. McKay told him he
had not taken my hand, and that it would not be paid, as my offer
was conditioned on a settlement of all questions between them and
the Government. About six o'clock, Yellow Quill and his Councillors
sent me the following message which had been written for them by
Mr. Deputy Sheriff Setter from their dictation.
"They didn't come to see you. You came to see them, and if you
choose to come and speak to them again, you can come if you like."
I felt that I must now deal firmly with them, and therefore
prepared the following reply:
"It is not right, for they came to see me at my request, as their
Governor, and I came to meet them. After spending two days with
them, their Chief insulted me by rising and going out while I was
speaking, and breaking up the Conference. I represent the Queen,
and his action was disrespectful to her. I will not go to meet you
again. If you are sorry for the way I have been treated you can
come and see me."
I charged Mr. McKay to deliver it to them in their Council, which
he did, when they denied having meant to send the message in the
terms in which it was, and disclaimed all intended offence. The
message had its desired effect, but their disclaimer was not
correct, as Mr. Setter informs me that he had originally written
a welcome to me, which they caused him to strike out, and to say
that "I could come if I chose." Next morning I struck my tents and
loaded my waggons and prepared to leave. Seeing this, Yellow Quill
and his Councillors came to Mr. McKay, and asked if I would not see
them again, to which I consented. On proceeding to Mr. Provencher's
pay tent, I met the Chief, Yellow Quill. His spokesman rose, saying
"that they were glad to have met me, that they had found my words
good; that they had not desired to offend the Queen or me, and
were sorry; that God had watched us during two days, and He was
again looking on." I accepted their apology, and then proceeded
to practical business, the whole tone and demeanor of the Indians
being changed, having become cordial and friendly. I may mention
here, that Yellow Quill reproached his Councillors for their
conduct. He also informed Mr. McKay privately, that he could not
act otherwise as he was in danger of his life from some of his own
"braves." He was guarded all the time by a man armed with a bow and
steel-pointed arrows. I promised to state their claims as to the
reserve, but told them it would not be granted, but that I would
change the location of the reserve, as it had been selected without
their approval, and would represent their view as to its locality,
and as to crossing the river, the navigation of which, however,
could not be interfered with. They asked to be paid three dollars
per head or one dollar per year for the following transaction:
In 1868 a number of Ontario farmers had settled on Rat Creek.
Yellow Quill's band drove them off and trouble was impending.
Governor McTavish sent Mr. McKay up to arrange the difficulty, in
anticipation of the advent of Canadian power. He made a lease for
three years of their rights, assuring them that before that time
the Canadian Government would make a treaty with them and recognize
the temporary arrangement, and in consequence the settlers were
unmolested. The question was not raised at the "Stone Fort" Treaty,
and I told them I had not known of it before, but supposed the
Government would hold that the treaty had covered it, and that
the extra two dollars would compensate for it, but that I would
represent their news and give them an answer. They complained
of the mode of payment, as my predecessor assured them that their
children who were absent should be paid when they presented
themselves, and that they only got two years payment instead of the
full amount. As these were Mr. Provencher's instructions I promised
to report it. They expressed themselves quite satisfied with the
arrangements as to the outside promises, and would gladly accept of
it, if the reserve question was settled, but that they could not
receive that as surveyed. I took the opportunity of explaining to
them that the "President of the United States" had no power here,
and that the Queen and Her Councillors were the only authorities
they had to deal with, and that I would state their wishes as fully
as they could do themselves. They asked if I would come back,
but I said not this year, but next year either I or some other
Commissioner would meet them. Eventually they cheerfully agreed to
accept the three dollars annuity as usual, and to defer a final
adjustment of the question between us until next year, and promised
to accompany any one I sent to select the reserve and agree on
its locality. They again thanked me for my kindness and patience
with them, and I took leave of them. I regard the result as very
satisfactory, as I left the band contented, and you are aware
of their intimate relation with the "Plain Indians," and the
difficulty their message to Qu'Appelle, "that the white man had
not kept his promises," caused us then, and it is very important
that they should be satisfied. I returned to the Portage, and Mr.
Provencher proceeded to Totogan, and paid the White Mud section
of the band, numbering one hundred and thirty, who are nominally
included in it, but do not recognize Yellow Quill's authority, the
usual annuities, which they accepted without demur.
I would now make the following recommendations:
1st. That you should write to Yellow Quill declining to entertain
his demands for the large reserve but offering to them a reserve
including the "Eagle's Nest" on the north side of the river, and
laid off in the terms of the treaty, with the land comprised in the
one hundred and sixty acres for each family, surrounded by the belt
mentioned in the treaty, in the manner suggested in the enclosed
rough sketch "B," reserving the rights of navigation and access to
the river. The land is of inferior quality to that already offered
them.
2nd. I would propose that the young chief should be recognized as
head of the section of the band adhering to him. He and his section
are ready to accept the terms and the reserve as described in
the treaty. They behaved very well and told Mr. McKay that they
were glad I had not recognized him then, as it would have led to
bloodshed, and they would be content if the recognition came when
the reserve was settled. The young chief is an intelligent, well
disposed man, aged about twenty-six.
3rd. I would propose that the White Mud Indians, who live there
constantly, should be recognized as a distinct band and should
elect a Chief.
4th. I would recommend that the arrears due to Indians who have not
yet received their annuities, should be paid in full at once, but
that a period of two years should be fixed for those bona fide
members of the band to come in and be paid, and that after that
they should only receive one year's payment. If these steps are
taken, I think we shall have no more trouble with these Indians.
In conclusion I have to express my obligations to the Hon. Mr.
McKay for the valuable services he rendered me. The Indians told me
they would not have come into the Stone Fort Treaty but for him,
and I know it was the case.
I have the honor to be, etc.,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Governor.
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 8th July 1876.
TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR.
Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that, in compliance with your
request, I left this on the 14th ult. with the view of proceeding
to the Long Plain on the Assiniboine, in order to meet the Indians
of the Portage Band, to arrange the dispute with regard to the
reserve, and to settle the outside promises. Mr. Graham, of the
Indian Department, and Mr. Reid, P.L.S., also went there at my
request, the one to act as paymaster, and the other, as you wished,
to survey the reserve. Owing to the prevalence of heavy rain the
roads were in so bad a condition that I was four days in reaching
the Long Plain, while we were also subjected to inconvenience and
expense by the detention of the provisions, owing to the same
cause. Added to my other discomforts was the presence of mosquitoes
in incredible numbers, so that the journey and the sojourn at the
Plain were anything but pleasurable. I had taken the precaution
to request Mr. Cummings, the interpreter, to summon the White Mud
Indians as well as Yellow Quill's band, and those who adhered to
the Short Bear.
On my arrival at the Long Plains, which I accomplished on the 17th,
I found about five hundred Indians assembled, but camped in three
separate encampments. On arriving, I was saluted by a feu de joie.
At the Portage, Mr. Graham had obtained some provisions, which he
had sent forward in carts.
On our way we met some carts sent by the Indians to relieve my
waggons of the tents and baggage, the Indian trail being almost
impracticable; but instead of so using them I sent them on toward
the Portage to meet the loaded carts, and was thus enabled to
get the temporary supply of provisions to the Plain, which was
fortunate, as the Indians were without food. The evening of my
arrival the Councillors of Yellow Quill came to talk with me, but
I declined to do so, telling them that the Chief had not come, and
I would only speak with him. I acted thus, in consequence of the
conduct of their head men, last year, when they controlled the
Chief and coerced the whole band. In a short time Yellow Quill
came with them to see me, and finding that they had come about
provisions, I referred them to Mr. Graham, who, I informed them,
had charge of the provisions and payments. The incident had a
marked effect in giving tone to the following negotiations.
On Monday I met the Indians, who ranged themselves in three
parties. I explained to them the proposed arrangement of the
outside promises very fully, and told them that as they were
willing to accept of the settlement last year, I did so for their
information only. I then took up the question of the reserve, read
the terms in which it was referred to in the Stone Fort Treaty,
explained to them that they were getting double the land any other
Indians in Treaties Numbers One and Two were doing, but told them
the reserve belonged to all of them, and not to Yellow Quill's band
alone. I then called on them to speak to me, asking Yellow Quill
first. He said he did not understand the extent of the reserve. I
then asked Mr. Reid to shew them a diagram of it, and to explain to
them its length in ordinary miles, and otherwise, which he did very
satisfactorily, and at length they comprehended it. I then called
on Short Bear's band to express their views. They said they wanted
a reserve at the Long Plain, if it was only a little piece of land;
that they liked the place, that they had built houses and planted
gardens, had cut oak to build more houses, and wished to farm
there. I then called on the White Mud Indians. They said that they
were Christians and had always lived at the White Mud River; that
they did not wish to join either Yellow Quill's or Short Bear's
reserve, but desired a reserve at the Big Point. I told them they
could not have it there, as there were settlers, and the Government
wished them to join one of the other bands, and explained to them
that their holdings would be respected, except where inadvertently
sold. I took this course, as I had ascertained that the plan of
Yellow Quill's head men was to make no settlement this year, and
that they had induced the other Indians to agree to act in that
way. I accordingly so shaped my opening speech and my dealings with
the Indians as to defeat this project, by securing the support of
Short Bear's and the White Mud Indians, which I succeeded in doing,
though Yellow Quill's spokesman taunted the others with having
broken their agreement. As the conference proceeded, Yellow Quill's
councillors said they did not want the band broken up, as they
wished all to live together. I told Yellow Quill he would have his
reserve on both sides of the river, reserving the navigation, and
that if they could agree to go to one reserve, I would be pleased;
but if not, that I would settle the matter. Yellow Quill said his
councillors were willing that the other Indians should have a
separate reserve provided they retained the belt of twenty-five
miles, in addition to their proportion of the reserve. I informed
them this could not be done; the reserve belonged to all. They then
asked for an adjournment, in order that they might meet together
and have a smoke over it, to assemble again when I hoisted my flag.
After a couple of hours interval I again convened them. The Short
Bears and White Mud Indians adhered to what they stated to me, but
Yellow Quill's band insisted on one reserve for all, but admitted
that the objections of Short Bear's band to the place asked by them
were well founded, and that it was sandy and unfit for farming,
and that they would like to select a reserve higher up the River
Assiniboine. I then adjourned the conference until morning, and
asked them to meet together and be prepared for settlement.
On Tuesday, the 20th June, the Indians again responded to the
hoisting of my flag, and met at 9 o'clock. Yellow Quill told me
that his band were now willing to separate from the others, and
wished to select a reserve higher up the river. I informed them
that I would accede to their request, but that they must do it at
once, and on the approval thereof by the Privy Council it would be
laid off. Short Bear's band still desired a reserve at the Long
Plain, to which I assented. The White Mud River Indians asked for
a separate reserve where they could farm, and I informed them that
under the discretionary powers I possessed I would have a reserve
selected for them, giving them their proportion of the original
reserve. The Indians then asked that the two dollars per head,
which had, as they said, slipped through their fingers last year,
should be paid to them, and I told them that I had been authorized
to do so, which gave them much satisfaction. In anticipation of a
settlement I had prepared a draft agreement, which was being copied
for me by Mr. Graham. I informed them of this, and stated that
I would sign it, and that the Chiefs and Councillors must do so
likewise, so that there could be no misunderstanding. When the
agreement was completed, I asked Mr. Cummings, the Interpreter,
to read it to them, which he did. Three Indians, who understood
English, and who had at an early period been selected by the
Indians to check the interpretation of what was said, standing by,
and Mr. Cummings being assisted by Mr. Cook, of St. James, who, at
Mr. Cummings' request, I had associated with him, on the Indians
choosing their interpreters. I then signed the agreement, and
called upon Yellow Quill to do so. He came forward cheerfully and
said he would sign it, because he now understood what he never
did before, viz., what was agreed to at the Stone Fort. I then
called on his Councillors to sign, but they refused, saying
they had agreed by the mouth. I then told the Indians that
unless the Councillors signed nothing could be done, and that the
Councillors who refused would be responsible for the failure of the
negotiations. One of them then signed, but the other persistently
refused. I repeated my warning, and at length he reluctantly came
forward and said he wished to ask me a question, "Would the head
men be paid?" I told him I had no authority to do so, but would
report his request. He said he did not expect it this year, but
hoped for it next. Eventually he signed the agreement. I then said
I would recognize Short Bear as a Chief, and asked him to select
his Councillors and braves. He did so at once, making a judicious
choice, and came forward to touch the pen, saying "I thank you for
my people." His Councillors promptly followed, one of them asking
for a part of the reserve on the other side of the river, which I
refused. I then called on the White Mud River Indians to select a
Chief and one Councillor, being under the impression at the time
that they were the least numerous band, which, however, has turned
out not to be the case, which they did at once, and on their being
presented to me they signed the agreement. I then gave a medal to
Yellow Quill, and promised to send the other two Chiefs medals
when procured from Ottawa, the supply here being exhausted. To the
Chiefs and Councillors suits of clothing were then distributed,
Yellow Quill and his head men having hitherto refused to accept
either medals or coats, but now taking them. Yellow Quill then
presented me with a skin coat, and said that he parted with the
other Indians as friends, and that there would be no hard feelings.
The conference then broke up, and thus terminated a difficulty
which has existed for several years, and the influence of which
was felt as an obstacle, as you are aware, at Qu'Appelle when the
treaty was made there. Mr. Graham at once commenced the payments,
and during the evening the three Chiefs and their Councillors
called on me, evidently being on the most friendly terms with each
other, a state of things which had not existed for a considerable
period. In the morning, as I was leaving for the Portage, the
Indians assembled near my waggon and gave three cheers for the
Queen and three for the Governor, and I then drove off amid a
salute of firearms from all sections of the encampment. I left
Mr. Graham to complete the payments, and here record my sense of
the efficient services he rendered me. He understands the Indian
character, and gets on well with them. I requested Mr. Reid to
visit the White Mud region and ascertain what persons are entitled
to holdings under the terms of your instructions, and also to
survey Short Bear's reserve.
Yellow Quill is to go without delay to look up a reserve, and as
there are no settlers in the region in question, I propose that if
Mr. Reid sees no objection to the locality he should at once lay
it off, so as to effectually terminate the chronic difficulty with
this band. I shall be glad to receive by telegram your approval
of his doing so. The interpreters, Mr. Cummings, Mr. Cook, of St.
James, a trader, and Kissoway, an Indian trader belonging to the
band, rendered me much service; the latter trades in the west,
and was passing the Portage on his way to Fort Garry, and as he
belonged to Yellow Quill's band, and is a relative of his, being
a son of the deceased Pecheto, (another of whose sons was the
spokesman at Qu'Appelle, as you will recollect) he came to the
Long Plains to advise the band to come to terms. He remained at
my request until the negotiations were concluded, and exerted a
most beneficial influence over Yellow Quill's band. I call your
attention to the request of Yellow Quill's Councillors, that they
should be paid. As in Treaties Three, Four and Five, they are paid,
and as the expense would not be large, I am of opinion that before
the Superintendent of Indian Affairs for the Superintendency of
Manitoba proceeds to make the payments in Treaties One and Two, he
should be authorized to pay the head men. It will be difficult to
explain why the difference is made, and it will secure in every
band, men who will feel that they are officers of the Crown and
remunerated as such. I returned to Fort Garry on the 23rd inst.,
encountering on the way a very severe thunder storm, which
compelled me to take advantage of the very acceptable shelter of
the kindly proffered residence of the Hon. Mr. Breland, at White
Horse Plains, instead of a tent on the thoroughly-drenched
prairie. I congratulate you that with the successful issue of
this negotiation is closed, in Treaties One and Two, the vexed
question of the open promises. I forward by this mail a copy of
the agreement I have above alluded to, retaining the original for
the present, and will be pleased to hear of its speedy approval
by the Privy Council.
I have the honor to be, etc.,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Governor.
CHAPTER VIII
THE WINNIPEG TREATY, NUMBER FIVE
This treaty, covers an area of approximately about 100,000 square
miles. The region is inhabited by Chippewas and Swampy Crees.
The necessity for it had become urgent. The lake is a large and
valuable sheet of water, being some three hundred miles long. The
Red River flows into it and the Nelson River flows from it into
Hudson's Bay. Steam navigation had been successfully established by
the Hudson's Bay Company on Lake Winnipeg. A tramway of five miles
in length was being built by them to avoid the Grand Rapids and
connect that navigation with steamers on the River Saskatchewan. On
the west side of the lake, a settlement of Icelandic immigrants had
been founded, and some other localities were admirably adapted for
settlement. Moreover, until the construction of the Pacific Railway
west of the city of Winnipeg, the lake and Saskatchewan River are
destined to become the principal thoroughfare of communication
between Manitoba and the fertile prairies in the west. A band of
Indians residing at Norway House, who had supported themselves by
serving the Hudson's Bay Company as boatmen on the route from Lake
Winnipeg to the Hudson Bay, by way of the Nelson River, but whose
occupation was gone, owing to supplies being brought in by way of
the Red River, desired to migrate to the western shore of Lake
Winnipeg, and support themselves there by farming.
For these and other reasons, the Minister of the Interior reported
"that it was essential that the Indian title to all the territory
in the vicinity of the lake should be extinguished so that
settlers and traders might have undisturbed access to its waters,
shores, islands, inlets and tributary streams." The mouth of
the Saskatchewan River especially seemed to be of importance,
as presenting an eligible site for a future town. For these
reasons the Privy Council of Canada, in the year 1875, appointed
Lieut.-Gov. Morris, and the Hon. James McKay, to treat with these
Indians. It may be here stated that this remarkable man, the
son of an Orkneyman by an Indian mother, has recently died at a
comparatively early age. Originally in the service of the Hudson's
Bay Company, he became a trader on his own account. Thoroughly
understanding the Indian character, he possessed large influence
over the Indian tribes, which he always used for the benefit and
the advantage of the Government.
The Hudson's Bay Company, to resume this narrative, kindly placed
their propeller steamer, the Colville, at the service of the
Commissioners, and the Board in London, in view of the public
service rendered by its use by the Commissioners, eventually
declined to make any charge for its employment. A full report
of the voyage of the Commissioners, and of the results of their
mission, will be found in the despatch of the Lieutenant-Governor,
which will be found at the end of this chapter. Suffice it to say,
that the Commissioners proceeded first to Berens River, on the east
side of the lake, and made a treaty with the Indians of that side
of the lake, thence they sailed to the head of Lake Winnipeg,
descended the Nelson River to Norway House, where no steamer had
ever before been, and concluded a treaty with the Indians there.
They also promised the Indians to give those of them who chose to
remove, a reserve on the west side of Lake Winnipeg, at Fisher's
River, about forty miles from the Icelandic settlement.
A considerable number of families have since removed there, and
have formed a very promising settlement.
From Nelson River the Commissioners proceeded to the mouth of the
Great Saskatchewan River, and met the Indians who live there. Their
houses were built at the foot of the Grand Rapids, and in the
immediate vicinity of the Hudson's Bay, Tramway, some seven miles
from the mouth of the river. The river is here deep to the very
shore, so that the steamer ran long aside the bank, and was moored
by ropes attached to the Chief's house. The Commissioners met
the Indians and informed them of the desire of the Government
to control the land where they had settled, and to give them a
reserve, instead, on the opposite side of the river. They said,
they would surrender the locality in question, and go to the south
side of the river, if a small sum was given them, to aid them in
removing their houses or building others. To this the Commissioners
willingly acceded, and promised that the next year a sum of five
hundred dollars would be paid them for that purpose. The treaty was
then signed, the Commissioners having extended the boundaries of
the treaty limits, so as to include the Swampy Cree Indians at the
Pas or Wahpahpuha, a settlement on the Saskatchewan River, and
recommended that Commissioners should be sent in the ensuing summer
to complete the work. The Commissioners then returned to Winnipeg,
after a voyage, on and around the lake, of about one thousand
miles. The terms of the treaty were identical with those of
Treaties Numbers Three and Four, except that a smaller quantity of
land was granted to each family, being one hundred and sixty, or in
some cases one hundred acres to each family of five, while under
Treaties Numbers Three and Four the quantity of land allowed was
six hundred and forty acres to each such family. The gratuity paid
each Indian in recognition of the treaty was also five dollars per
head, instead of twelve dollars the circumstances under which the
treaty was made being different. The area covered by these treaties
was approximately about 100,000 square miles and has been described
as lying north of the territory covered by Treaties Numbers Two and
Three, extending west to Cumberland House (on the Saskatchewan
River) and including the country east and west of Lake Winnipeg,
and of Nelson River as far north as Split Lake.
In 1876, Lieut.-Gov. Morris, in accordance with his suggestions to
that effect, was requested by the Minister of the Interior, to take
steps for completing the treaty, and entrusted the duty to the Hon.
Thomas Howard, and J. Lestock Reid, Esq., Dominion Land Surveyor.
He gave them formal instructions, and directed them to meet the
Indians together at Dog Head Point, on the lake, to treat with the
Island Indians there and thence to proceed to Berens River to meet
the Indians of the rapids of that river who had not been able to be
present the previous year, and thereafter directed Mr. Howard to
proceed to the mouth of the Saskatchewan and pay the Indians the
five hundred dollars for removal of the houses, and thence to go up
the Saskatchewan to the Pas and deal with the Indians there, while
Mr. Reid was to proceed from Berens River to Norway House, and
arrange with the Indians for the removal of such of them as desired
it, to Fisher's River, on Lake Winnipeg.
These gentlemen accordingly in July, 1876, proceeded in York boats
(large sail boats) to their respective destinations, and were very
successful in accomplishing the work confided to them.
I now append the official despatch of Lieut.-Gov. Morris, dated
11th October, 1875, giving an account of the making of the treaty
and of the journey, and his despatch of the 17th November, 1876,
relating to the completion of the treaty, together with extracts
from the reports of Messrs. Howard and Reid.
FORT GARRY, October 11th, 1875.
TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR.
Sir,--I have the honor to inform you, that under authority of the
Commission of the Privy Council to that effect, I proceeded to
Lake Winnipeg for the purpose of making a treaty with the Saulteaux
and Swampy Cree Indians, in company with my associate, the Hon.
James McKay, leaving Fort Garry for Chief Prince's Landing on
the Red River, on the 17th September last, in order to embark on
the Hudson's Bay Company's new propeller, the Colville, which
Chief Commissioner Graham had kindly placed at our disposal on
advantageous terms. We selected this mode of conveyance, as
travelling and conveyance of provisions in York boats would, at the
advanced period of the season, have occupied at least eight weeks,
if at all practicable.
The steamer left the landing at five o'clock on the 18th September,
but owing to the prevalence of a gale of northerly wind was
compelled to be anchored at the three channels of the Red River,
inside of the bar which obstructs the entrance of the lake. The
wind continued during the 18th and 19th, but on the afternoon of
the latter day, Captain Hackland, a sailor of much practical
experience on the Northern Seas decided to risk going out, as the
water on the bar was running down so fast that he feared that the
steamer would be unable to cross over the bar. I may remark that
the wind causes the waters of the lake to ebb and flow into the
river with great rapidity, and that the bar is so serious an
obstruction to an important navigation, that it ought to be
examined with a view to ascertain the cost and practicability of
its removal. Leaving our anchorage, we crossed the bar at three in
the afternoon with difficulty, and proceeded on our voyage;
anchored opposite the mouth of the Berens River on Monday, the
20th, at nine a.m., to await the arrival of a pilot, as no steamer
had ever before entered the river. Under the pilotage of a Chief
and a Councillor, we reached Berens River Post, the Indians
greeting us with volleys of firearms, and at once summoned the
Indians to meet us in the Wesleyan Mission School House, which the
Rev. Mr. Young kindly placed at our disposal. We met the Indians at
four o'clock, and explained the object of our visit. The question
of reserves was one of some difficulty, but eventually this was
arranged, and the Indians agreed to accept our offer, and the
indenture of treaty was signed by the Chiefs and head men about
eleven p.m. The payment of the present of five dollars per head,
provided by the treaty, was immediately commenced by Mr. McKay and
the Hon. Thomas Howard, who accompanied me as Secretary and Pay
Master, and was continued until one a.m., when the payment was
concluded.
The steamer left next day, the 21st, for Norway House, but the
captain was obliged to anchor at George's Island in the evening,
owing to the stormy weather. The Colville remained at anchor all
the next day, the 22nd, but left at midnight for Nelson River. We
sighted the Mossy and Montreal points, at the mouth of that river,
about nine a.m. on the 23rd, and arrived at the old or abandoned
Norway House at eleven o'clock, under the guidance of Roderick
Rose, Esquire, of the Hudson's Bay Company's Service, at Norway
House, who had been engaged for some days in examining the channel,
in anticipation of our visit.
The Nelson River expands into Play Green Lake, a large stream of
water studded with islands, presenting a remarkable resemblance to
the Thousand Islands of the St. Lawrence River. The distance from
the mouth of the river to Norway House is twenty miles. We arrived
at Norway House at three o'clock and were welcomed there by the
Indians, who fired a salute.
On the 24th we met the Indians in a large store-house of the
Hudson's Bay Company, and asked them to present their Chiefs and
head men. We found that there were two distinct bands of Indians,
the Christian Indians of Norway House, and the Wood or Pagan
Indians of Cross Lake. Each elected their Chiefs by popular vote in
a most business-like manner, and the Chiefs, after consulting the
bands, selected the head men. We then accepted the Chiefs, and I
made an explanation of the object of our visit in English, and the
Hon. James McKay in the Indian dialect. We severed the questions of
terms and reserves, postponing the latter till we had disposed of
the former. The Indians gratefully accepted of the offered terms,
and we adjourned the conference to enable them to consult as to
reserves. On re-assembling, the Christian Chief stated that as they
could no longer count on employment in boating for the Hudson's Bay
Company, owing to the introduction of steam navigation, he and a
portion of his band wished to migrate to Lake Winnipeg, where they
could obtain a livelihood by farming and fishing. We explained why
we could not grant them a reserve for that purpose at the Grassy
Narrows as they wished, owing to the proposed Icelandic settlement
there, but offered to allot them a reserve at Fisher River, about
forty miles north of the Narrows, and this they accepted. It is
supposed that some eighty or ninety families will remove there
in spring, and it was arranged that those who remain, instead
of receiving a reserve, should retain their present houses and
gardens. The Chief of the Pagan band, who has, however, recently
been baptized, stated that the Wood Indians wished to remain at
Cross Lake, and we agreed that a reserve should be allotted them
there. The treaty was then signed and the medals and uniforms
presented. The Chiefs, on behalf of their people, thanked Her
Majesty and her officers for their kindness to the Indian people,
which I suitably acknowledged, and the payment of the presents was
commenced by Messrs. McKay and Howard, and completed on the 15th.
We left that day at half-past three amidst cheering by the Indians
and a salute of fire-arms, and came to anchor in Play Green Lake,
at Kettle Island, at half-past five.
The steamer left Kettle Island next morning at six o'clock for the
Grand Rapids of the Saskatchewan, which we reached at four o'clock.
The original post of the Hudson's Bay Company, at the mouth of
the river, has been abandoned, and a new one established on their
reserve, some six miles higher up the river, at the head of the
portage, which the river steamer descends to. The Colville, at our
request ran up to the Chiefs house, situated on the shore of a deep
bay, and was moored and gangways laid out to the shore. We found an
Indian village on the north side, and also the Chief's house, which
was built on the only spot where good and inexpensive wharfage can
be had, and ascertained afterwards that the Indians claimed the
whole north shore for a reserve.
On the 27th we met the Indians near the Chief's house in the open
air, at a spot where a large fire had been lighted by them, as the
weather was cold. We took a similar course as at Norway House in
severing the question of terms of the treaty and reserves, and with
like satisfactory results. After a lengthy discussion the Indians
agreed to accept the terms, and we then entered upon the difficult
question of the reserves. They complained of the Hudson's Bay
Company's reserve, and wished to have the land covered by it,
but we explained whatever had been promised the Company would be
given just as promises made to them would be kept. They said the
Company's reserve should be at the abandoned post at the mouth of
the river, and not at the end of the portage. We informed them that
we would inquire as to this. They then claimed a reserve on both
sides of the river of large extent, and extending up to the head of
the Grand Rapids, but this we declined to accede to. Eventually, as
the locality they had hitherto occupied is so important a point,
controlling as it does the means of communication between the mouth
of the river, and the head of the rapids, and where a "tram-way"
will no doubt ere long require to be constructed, presenting also
deep-water navigation and excellent wharfage, and evidently being
moreover the site where a town will spring up, we offered them
reserve on the south side of the river. They objected, that they
had their houses and gardens on the north side of the river, but
said that as the Queen's Government were treating them so kindly,
that they would go to south side of the river, if a small sum was
given them to assist in removing their houses, or building others,
and this as will be seen by the terms of the treaty, we agreed to
do, believing it to be alike in the interests of the Government
to have the control of so important a point as the mouth of the
great internal river of the Saskatchewan, and yet only just to the
Indians, who were making what was to them so large a concession to
the wishes of the Commissioners. On our agreeing to the proposal,
the treaty was cheerfully signed by the Chief and head men, and
the payment of the present was made to them, together with a
distribution of some provisions. I enclose a tracing of the mouth
of the river, copied from a sketch thereof kindly made for me by
Mr. Ross, which will enable you to understand the actual position
of the locality in question, and the better appreciate our reasons
for our action in the matter.
The steamer left the Grand Rapids in the afternoon of the 27th, and
the captain took his course for the mouth of the Red River, but
anchored, as the night became very dark, between George's Island
and Swampy Island.
On the 28th, resuming our course at half past five a.m., we sighted
Berens River Mission House at eight o'clock, and passed into the
channel between Black Bear Island and Dog Head or Wapang Point,
at 12.30; then observing a number of Indians on the shore making
signals to us by firing guns, we requested the captain to approach
the shore. The water being very deep the steamer went close inshore
and anchored--the Indians coming off to us in their canoes. We
found them to be headed by Thickfoot, a principal Indian of the
band inhabiting the islands, and some of those and the Jack Head
band of the West Shore, and explained to them the object of our
visit. They told us they had heard of it, and had been waiting to
see us. Thickfoot said the Island Indians at Big Island, Black
Island, Wapang and the other islands in the vicinity had no chief;
that they numbered one hundred and twenty-eight, and those at
Jack-Fish Head sixty. Thickfoot said he had cattle and would like
to have a place assigned to his people on the main shore, where
they could live by farming and fishing. We suggested Fisher River
to them, which they approved of. Eventually we decided on paying
these Indians--took Thickfoot's adhesion to the treaty, of which I
enclose a copy, and authorized him to notify the Indians to meet at
the Dog Head Point next summer, at a time to be intimated to them,
and to request them in the mean time to select a Chief and
Councillors. Thickfoot expressed gratitude for the kindness of the
Government, and his belief that Indians of the various Islands and
of Jack Head Point would cheerfully accept the Queen's benevolence
and settle on a reserve. After paying this party, and distributing
a small quantity of provisions among them, we resumed our voyage,
and, owing to the character of the navigation, again came to anchor
in George's Channel at seven o'clock, p.m. On the 29th, we left our
anchorage at five o'clock a.m., and entered the mouth of the Red
River at twelve o'clock, crossing the bar without difficulty, as
the weather was calm. We arrived at the Stone Fort at three o'clock
in the afternoon, but had to remain there till next day, awaiting
the arrival of conveyances from Winnipeg. Mr. McKay and I left the
Stone Fort on the 30th at seven a.m. leaving our baggage and a
portion of the provisions which had not been used to be forwarded
by the steamer Swallow, and reached Fort Garry at ten o'clock,
thus terminating a journey of over one thousand miles, and having
satisfactorily closed a treaty with the Saulteaux and Swampy Crees,
which will prove of much importance in view of the probable rapid
settlement of the west coast of Lake Winnipeg. The journey,
moreover, is of interest, as having been the first occasion on
which a steam vessel entered the waters of Berens River and of the
Nelson River, the waters of which river fall into the Hudson's Bay,
and as having demonstrated the practicability of direct steam
navigation through a distance of three hundred and sixty miles from
the city of Winnipeg to Norway House. I may mention here that the
prevalence of timber suitable for fuel and building purposes, of
lime and sandstone, of much good soil, and natural hay lands on the
west shore of the lake, together with the great abundance of white
fish, sturgeon and other fish in the lake, will ensure, ere long,
a large settlement.
The east coast is much inferior to the west coast, as far as
I could learn, but appeared to be thickly wooded, and it is
understood that indications of minerals have been found in several
places.
I now beg to call your attention to the boundaries of the treaty,
which, you will observe, vary somewhat from those suggested in your
memorandum to the Privy Council. The Commissioners adopted as the
southern boundary of the treaty limits, the northern boundary of
Treaties Numbers Two and Three. They included in the limits all the
territory to which the Indians ceding, claimed hunting and other
rights, but they fixed the western boundary as defined in the
treaty, for the following reasons:
1st. The extension of the boundary carries the treaty to the
western limit of the lands claimed by the Saulteaux and Swampy Cree
Tribes of Indians, and creates an eastern base for the treaties to
be made with the Plain Crees next year.
2nd. The Swampy Crees at the Pas, on the Saskatchewan, would
otherwise have had to be included in the western treaties.
3rd. That the extension of the boundaries will add some six hundred
to the number of Indians in the suggested limits, of whom three
hundred at Wahpahhuha or the Pas on the Saskatchewan would have had
to be treated with owing to the navigation of the Saskatchewan, in
any event.
4th. The inclusion of the Norway House Indians in the treaty, and
the surrender of their rights, involved a larger area of territory.
5th. That a number of the Norway House Indians came from Moose Lake
and the Cumberland region, and possessed rights there which have
been included in the boundaries.
6th. Unless the boundaries had been properly defined, in conformity
with known geographical points, a portion of the country lying
between the territories formerly ceded and those comprised in
Treaty Number Five, would have been left with the Indian title
unextinguished.
For these reasons, the Commissioners defined the boundaries as they
are laid down in the treaty, and it will remain with the Government
to send a Commissioner to the Pas to obtain the adhesion of the
Indians there to the treaty next summer, or not as they shall
decide, though the Commissioners strongly urge that step to be
taken as a necessity.
I forward the original of the treaty to you by the Hon. Mr.
Christie, and in order to the better understanding of the treaty
area, I enclose a very valuable map copied from one made for me at
my request on board of the Colville, by Roderick Ross, Esq., who
accompanied me from Norway House to the Stone Fort, and to whom
I was indebted for much valuable assistance and co-operation, as
we were in fact to the Company's officers generally. This map is
prepared from actual observation, and locates many places not
indicated on any existing map, and covering as it does an area of
over 100,000 square miles, which, exclusive of the great waters,
has been included in the treaty, possesses much value.
I enclose herewith duplicates of the pay sheets, a statement of the
cash expenditure, shewing the balance on hand of the credit which
was given me for the purposes of the treaty, and statements of the
distribution of the provisions and of the clothing, and medals,
as given to the chiefs and head men. These statements will shew
that every arrangement was made to secure the utmost economy in
effecting the treaty, and yet to give satisfaction to the Indians
concerned.
I mention here that the Indians were uniformly informed that no
back payments of the present would be made to those who did not
attend the meetings with the Commissioners, but that next year
those not present would receive payment with the others, if they
presented themselves.
I have to express my sense of the services rendered to the
Government by my associate the Hon. James McKay, and the Hon.
Thomas Howard, who acted as Secretary and Pay Master to the
Commissioners as well as of the many kind services we received from
Captain Hackland, and the other officers of the Colville, from the
Wesleyan Missionaries, and from the officers of the Hudson's Bay
Company.
I take this opportunity of suggesting that the supervision of
Treaty Number Five, and the carrying out of the treaty obligations
with the Indians of the St. Peter's Band, and of those of Fort
Alexander and the River Roseau and Broken Head, which fall into
Lake Winnipeg, should be entrusted to a local agent, stationed at
the Stone Fort or in the vicinity of St. Peter's, and who would
thence supervise the whole District.
In conclusion, I have only to express the hope that the action of
the Commissioners, which in every respect was governed by a desire
to promote the public interest, will receive the approval of the
Privy Council, and be regarded by them as the satisfactory
discharge of an onerous and responsible duty.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient servant,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T.
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
FORT GARRY 17th November, 1876.
TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR.
Sir,--I recommended in my despatch of the 7th June, that measures
should be adopted to secure the adhesion of the Indians, who had
not been met with when Treaty Number Five was concluded, and was
requested by you to entrust the duty to Mr. Graham, of the Indian
Department here, or to the Hon. Thomas Howard, Mr. Graham was
unable to leave the office. I therefore entrusted the matter to Mr.
Howard and J. Lestock Reid, D.L.S. I gave these gentleman written
instructions, a copy of which will be found appended to the report
of Mr. Howard, in which I directed them to meet the Island Indians
and those of Berens River together, and then to separate, Mr. Reid
proceeding to Norway House and Mr. Howard to the Grand Rapids of
the Saskatchewan and the Pas, this course being necessary to enable
the work to be accomplished during the season. I have pleasure in
informing you that these gentlemen discharged their mission most
successfully and satisfactorily, as will be seen from the following
reports, which I enclose, viz:--
A. Joint report of Messrs. Howard and Reid as to the Island Indians
of Lake Winnipeg and those of Berens River.
B. Report of Mr. Howard as to the band at the Grand Rapids, and as
to his negotiations with the Indians at the Pas.
C. Report of Mr. Reid with regard to the Norway House Indians.
D. Report of Mr. Howard, submitting the accounts of the expenditure
incurred in carrying out my instructions.
1. It will appear from these reports that the Commissioners
obtained the assent of the scattered bands among the islands and
shores of Lake Winnipeg, and had them united in a band with one
Chief and his Councillors.
2. That the Indians of the Grand Rapids of the Berens River
accepted the treaty, being received as part of the band of Jacob
Berens, and that the latter band wish their reserves to be allotted
them and some hay lands assigned.
3. That the Norway House Indians contemplate removal to Fisher's
River, on Lake Winnipeg.
4. That the Indians of Grand Rapids have removed, as they agreed
to do last year from the point where they had settled on the
Saskatchewan, and which had been set apart as the site of a town.
5. That the Indians of the Pas, Cumberland, and Moose Lake gave
their adhesion to the treaty and, subject to the approval of the
Privy Council, have agreed upon the localities for their reserves.
6. That the bands at the Grand Rapids, the Pas, and Cumberland are
in a sufficiently advanced position to be allowed the grant for
their schools.
I forward herewith the balance sheet of Mr. Howard for the receipts
and disbursements connected with the completion of the treaty and
the payments, as also the various vouchers in support thereof. I
placed the charge of the financial arrangements in the hands of Mr.
Howard, on whom also fell the longest period of service in the work
entrusted to the Commissioners.
I also forward by parcel post, registered, the original of the
assents to the treaty of the various bands.
To prevent complications and misunderstandings, it would be
desirable that many of the reserves should be surveyed without
delay, and, from Mr. Reid's connection with the treaty, and his
fitness for the work, I think that he would be a suitable person
to be employed in the duty.
I would remark in conclusion, that I requested Mr. Provencher to
obtain the assent to the treaty of the band at the mouth of the
Black River, and that be informs me that he obtained their adhesion
and has so reported to you. The having obtained the assent of the
whole of the Indians within the region treated for so far, is a
most satisfactory feature of the year's operations.
I have, &c.,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Governor.
A.
WINNIPEG, October 10th, 1876.
TO THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieutenant-Governor, Fort Garry.
Sir,--Under instructions received from you, dated 14th July last,
we were directed to proceed to the Dog Head Point and Berens River,
on Lake Winnipeg, and there obtain the adhesion of certain Indians
to the treaty that was made and concluded at Norway House last
year, and we have now the honor to report....
With a fair wind and fine weather we reached the Narrows on Monday
afternoon, the 24th, at half-past four. Mr. Howard called at the
Hudson's Bay Company's post to see about the provisions stored
there, where he found Thickfoot and the Jack-Fish Head Indians
encamped, about twenty-five families in all, and learned from them
that they were desirous to meet and speak to us where they were,
and not across the Narrows at the Dog Head; but as the place of
meeting was distinctly fixed, Mr. Howard informed them that they
would have to move their camps.
Mr. Reid having, in the meantime, gone to the Dog Head Point, was
received with a salute from the Indians there encamped, viz.: the
Blood Vein River, Big Island and Sandy Bar bands, and, almost
simultaneously with Mr. Howard's arrival there, the Indians
belonging to Thickfoot and the Jack-Fish Head arrived also.
We hardly had time to make our camp before being waited upon by
a representative from all the bands except Thickfoot's, and they
desired to know when we would be prepared to have a conference;
and, having told them that the following day, the 25th, was the day
appointed, and that we would meet them at eleven o'clock in the
morning, we gave them some provisions and they withdrew. Thickfoot
subsequently called upon us and stated that he was prepared at
any time to meet us and sign the treaty, that he had learned that
it was our intention to make only one Chief for all the Indians
gathered there; that he had felt when the paper was placed in his
hands last year by the Governor, that he was making him the Chief;
that he had notified all the Indians that were there as he had
agreed, and that they had threatened him with violence for saying
he was to be Chief, and that he was afraid now to join them in any
way, and that he and his band wished to be spoken to by themselves.
Upon hearing this, we informed him that he need not be afraid of
violence, that the paper the Governor gave him merely stated that
he was a principal Indian, and we would certainly recognize him as
such, and if the Indians desired him to be their Chief it would be
a great pleasure to us.
The following morning the Indians sent word by a representative
from each band, except Thickfoot's, that they desired another day
to meet in council before having a conference; but, feeling they
had sufficient time already, yet not wishing to hurry them too
much, we extended the hour of meeting to four o'clock on the same
day, which satisfied them, and when they promised to be ready.
About three o'clock, we were informed that the Indians had
gathered, so we at once proceeded to meet them. The place we had
chosen for the conference was on a granite plateau, and at one end
our crews had erected a covering with boughs; a more suitable spot
for the meeting could not be found.
After inquiring if they had all gathered, and, being assured that
they had, we began to explain the object of our mission, but
immediately saw that the bands were determined to be considered
distinct and wished to be treated with separately, when we informed
them that only one Chief would be allowed, and that before we could
proceed any further we would require them all to meet together
in council and there select one Chief and three Councillors, and
be prepared to present them to us on the following day. This
evidently gave great satisfaction to the Island Band, of which
Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais was head man, but they all withdrew; before doing
so, agreeing to be ready the next day at noon to meet us.
Before the hour appointed for the meeting the next day, another
delegation came over and informed us that the Indians were not yet
prepared, that they could not come to any decision as to who should
be Chief, and again asked to have the hour of meeting extended to
three o'clock, which we did upon the understanding that if they
were not then prepared we would return and report the facts to you.
Shortly after, we noticed Thickfoot and his Indians sitting near
our tents, and evidently taking no part in the selection of a
Chief, so we called him over and found him still disinclined to
join the other Indians. He stated that they would not have him as
Chief, and that he would therefore remain away. We then explained
that he could be head man of his band by being elected a Councillor
to whoever would be appointed Chief, and at last prevailing upon
him to go with his Indians to the Council tent, we requested the
Rev. Mr. Cochrane to proceed to the Indian encampment and state to
them that from each band other than the one from which the chief
was chosen, a Councillor would have to be taken. By this means
we saw our way to satisfy all the bands, and Mr. Cochrane having
notified the Indians accordingly, we felt confident the choice of
a chief would soon be made; but in this we were disappointed, as a
messenger shortly after arrived and said no choice could be made,
as Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais would do nothing unless he was chosen Chief. On
hearing this Mr. Cochrane decided to visit the Indians in Council,
and, having done so, proposed to them that they should elect
a Chief by ballot, and having got them all to agree to this
proposition, they proceeded to the election. Several ballots had
to be taken, and at last resulted in favor of the chief Indian of
the Blood Vein River band, Sa-ha-cha-way-ass, and the Councillors
elected were the head men from the Big Island, Doghead and
Jack-Fish Head bands.
At three o'clock p.m., we were notified that the Indians had again
gathered, when we proceeded to the place of meeting, and were
presented to the Chief and two of his Councillors. Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais,
the third Councillor, coming forward, said his band did not want him
to act as Councillor; that he had seen the Governor the other day, and
had been told by him that he would be the Chief of the Island Indians.
Whereupon we informed him that no such promise had been made by you,
and that we could only recognize the choice of the majority. He then
desired to withdraw from the negotiations, and wait until he saw you,
before signing the treaty; but as we had learned that out of the
twenty-two families that were in his band, all, with one or two
exceptions, had received the annuity since 1870, with the St. Peter's
Band, we made them sit by themselves, and then explained that by
receiving the annuity as a large number of them had done, they had
really agreed to the treaty and that we were there only to deal with
those of the band that had at no time received money from the Queen.
Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais then said that there were very few of his Indians
that had not received money from the Queen, but that he never had;
that he was quite prepared to sign the treaty now, only some of his
people did not want him to do so, unless we agreed to give them the
Big Island for a reserve. This we at once refused, and at the same
time told them that unless he and all his band agreed to the terms
we offered them without further delay, they might return to their
homes. Hearing this, they all withdrew, but soon returned, when
Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais said one or two of his people did not want him to
sign any treaty, but most of them did, and that he was going to do so.
He then took his seat along with the Chiefs and other Councillors,
and we proceeded to explain the terms of the treaty. When we came to
the clause referring to the reserves, each band was anxious that the
places where they are in the habit of living should be granted them
as reserves, and the locations of the same mentioned in the treaty;
but as our instructions were positive on this point, we refused but
assured them that the names of the places they asked for, we would
certainly forward with our report to you, and we stated that with the
exception of the location asked for by the Sandy Bar Indians, we felt
sure the Government would grant their request, and give them their
reserves where they desired. The following were the localities
mentioned:--
DOG HEAD BAND.--The point opposite the Dog Head.
BLOOD VEIN RIVER BAND.--At mouth of Blood Vein River.
BIG ISLAND BAND.--At mouth of Badthroat River.
JACK-FISH HEAD BAND.--The north side of Jack Head Point, at the
Lobstick, and the
SANDY BAR BAND.--White Mud River, west side of Lake Winnipeg.
It must be remembered that four bands out of the above named,
viz.:--Big Island, Jack-Fish Head, Dog Head and Blood Vein River,
are distinct bands, those at Sandy Bar really belonging to the St.
Peter's Band of Indians and that they have always lived at the
different points upon the lake from which they take their names,
and they therefore look upon these points as their homes. We would,
therefore, beg to recommend that the request of of all, with the
exception of the Sandy Bar Indians, be granted, although in doing
so we are aware of the desire of the Government that Indians should
not be encouraged to break up into small bands, yet we feel sure in
this instance it would be impossible to get them all upon any one
reserve.
The adhesion we had signed on Wednesday evening, July 26th, and
we then arranged to begin the payments of annuities the following
morning at nine o'clock, which was done, and the payments
completed by four o'clock on the same day. We then distributed
the implements, ammunition, twine, and balance of provisions.
As already stated, the Indians at Sandy Bar, were formerly paid
with the St. Peter's band. They are now included in the limits of
Treaty Five, and desire to receive their annuity with the Island
band.
Having distributed the presents, we immediately moved our camp
to an island about a quarter of a mile from the Point, and
there remained until Saturday morning, the 29th, when, having a
favourable wind, we set sail and arrived off the mouth of Berens
River, and camped on Lobstick Island the following morning, Sunday,
at half-past nine o'clock.
We remained there until Tuesday, and then moved our camp to the
Methodist Mission. The next day we went over in one of our boats
to the Hudson's Bay Company's post, where we met Mr. Flett, the
officer in charge and received from him the provisions that had
been previously forwarded and which he had in store, and then
returned to our camp.
Mr. Flett informed us that the Indians from the Narrows of Berens
River, he expected would arrive that evening, and on Thursday,
visited us to say that they had arrived and were then holding a
council. The same afternoon the Chief and Councillors called upon
us and desired to know when we would be prepared to meet them, and
though the 5th was the day appointed, we thought it advisable, as
all the Indians were then gathered there, and were anxious to
return to their homes, to appoint the following day, the 4th
August.
The next morning the Indians came over from where they were
encamped near the Hudson's Bay post, in York boats; and when we
learned that they were all in the school-house we proceeded there,
and met, in addition to the Berens River band, about thirty Indians
from the Grand Rapids of Berens River. We explained the object of
our mission, and found the Indians from the Rapids most anxious to
accept the Queen's bounty and benevolence, some of them had already
accepted the annuity with the Lac Seule Indians we found, so we
immediately told them that it was only to those that had not
previously received money or presents from the Queen, that the
first part of our mission extended, and with whom it was necessary
we should first speak. The head man, Num-ak-ow-ah-nuk-wape, then
said that he was fully prepared, on behalf of all his Indians, to
accept the same terms as given to the Berens River band, only be
wanted his reserve where he then lived, at the Grand Rapids; upon
which we told him that before we could speak further, we must be
assured by the band that he was their head man, and this the band
at once did. We then thought it advisable to recommend that they
should make the Chief of the Berens River band their Chief,
and make their head man a Councillor to him, and although our
proposition was not at once received satisfactorily, we ultimately
prevailed upon them to accept it, and the Chief was at once
elected. By this means we saved the expenses necessarily incurred
in maintaining one Chief and two Councillors. We then stated that
we were prepared to grant them their reserve where they asked for
it; and having explained the treaty to them, clause by clause, and
mentioned in the adhesion where the reserve should be, the adhesion
was duly signed by the Chief and Councillors. The payment of the
annuity was then gone on with and finished that afternoon at four
o'clock.
We then distributed the implements, ammunition, twine and
provisions. When we had finished, the Chief and Councillors came
forward, and thanked us for all that had been done for them; they
said they were well pleased with what they had received and desired
us to inform you of the fact, which we accordingly promised. They
then returned in the same boats they had come over in: before
leaving the bank, giving three cheers for the Queen and three for
the Governor.
We are very much pleased to inform you that the best possible
feeling appears to exist between the Indians in this region. They
all appeared anxious to farm and settle down, and we heard that a
number of houses had been built at Poplar River, and considerable
clearing done there since the treaty was made with them last year;
the implements and tools we brought them were therefore most
acceptable. As these bands live at a considerable distance from
each other, we would recommend that an extra supply of tools be
allowed them. We also feel satisfied that the animals promised by
the treaty might be furnished, as we certainly consider them in a
position to take care of the same.
As you directed, we informed them that their application for hay
lands had been forwarded to the Government, and this gave them
great satisfaction. The following morning, Saturday, August 5th,
Mr. Reid left for Norway House, and during the afternoon of the
same day, Mr. Howard sailed for the Stone Fort on the Red River.
Having obtained the adhesion of the Indians at the Dog Head, and at
Berens River, our duties as Joint Commissioners under your
instructions ceased....
We were fortunate enough to secure the services of the Rev. Henry
Cochrane, who kindly acted as interpreter. Being in the Province on
a visit from his mission at the Pas, and desirous of returning, Mr.
Howard gave him a passage in his boat, and he rendered us the most
valuable assistance throughout.
Having thus referred to the different matters connected with our
mission while acting together, and assuring you that our aim and
desire was to fulfill it to your entire satisfaction, which we
trust we have done,
We have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient servants,
THOS. HOWARD,
J. LESTOCK REID,
Commissioners.
B.
WINNIPEG, October 10th, 1876.
TO THE HONORABLE ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieutenant-Governor, Fort Garry.
Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in compliance with your
instructions, a copy of which I hereunto annex, I proceeded,
accompanied by Mr. Reid, to the Dog Head and Berens River on Lake
Winnipeg, and there successfully secured the adhesion of the Island
and Grand Rapids of Berens River Bands of Indians to Treaty Number
Five, and, having paid the annuities to the Berens River Indians,
returned to the Stone Fort. As mentioned in the joint report
submitted to you by Mr. Reid and myself, I had the greatest
difficulty in procuring a boat to take me on my mission, and only
through the kindness of Mr. Flett, of the Hudson's Bay Company, at
the Stone Fort, was I able to obtain even the loan of one as far as
Berens River, from where I had to return it....
I left the Stone Fort for the Grand Rapids, on the morning of the
17th of August, and after a very fast, though rough and dangerous
passage, reached the mouth of the Saskatchewan river, early on the
morning of the 26th. I found, on entering the river, that the
Indians were encamped near its mouth, on the south bank, where
I landed, and arranged to meet them at noon that day. As the
provisions were stored at the Hudson's Bay Company's post, about a
mile and a half up the river, I decided to camp at the foot of the
road leading across the four-mile Portage, and having done so, and
in the meantime sent the provisions to the Indian camp, I returned
there at the time agreed upon.
The band having assembled, I stated to them the object of my
mission--that I had been directed to pay them the annuity and
deliver some of the tools and implements granted them by the
treaty, and also to distribute amongst those that formerly had
houses and gardens on the north bank of the river, and had moved to
where they were then living, as stipulated in the treaty, the sum
of five hundred dollars.
To my surprise, the Chief at once expressed his astonishment at my
saying that the treaty had been made last year, and said he had
only a talk then with the Governor preliminary to making the treaty
this year, and that they were only then prepared to be treated
with. I explained to the band how I had been present myself when
it was made, and that I would have it read to them. I accordingly
requested Mr. Cochrane to do so, explaining it thoroughly; yet, it
was only after a great deal of talking on their part, during which
they made most unreasonable demands, and many explanations on my
part, that the Indians were satisfied that a treaty had been made,
when they requested me to go on with the payments; at the same time
a number of them stated that they had been misled by one of the
counsellors, Joseph Atkinson by name. I then paid the annuity,
distributed the provisions, tools, implements, etc., and gave the
Chief a copy of the treaty, and, arranging to meet them again on
Monday the 28th, I returned to my camp at midnight.
On Monday, I met them as agreed, and at once began and made
inquiries as to who had houses and gardens on the north bank and
had moved their houses to the south bank, and I found that all
those that had formerly lived on the north bank had removed from
there. I noticed that great feeling existed amongst them all as to
the division of the five hundred dollars granted. All the band
congregated round me and the large majority desired that the amount
should be divided equally between them all, and claimed that every
one belonging to the band was entitled to participate in the
division; so I thought it best to leave it to themselves to decide
how the amount should be distributed, and they only succeeded in
doing so after a great deal of talking, and, I regret to say,
quarrelling; but they at last arranged it, and I was requested by
the Chief and Councillors to divide it amongst the whole band in
such proportions as I thought right, so I proceeded at once to what
turned out to be a long and troublesome undertaking; but having as
I considered made a fair and equitable distribution of the amount,
I paid the same, had the document witnessed by the Chief and
Councillors, and only got back to my camp again at midnight. As I
before said, all the Indians had removed to the south bank of the
river, but had made no preparations to build, and were merely
living in tents. Close to the encampment, at the mouth of the
river, the Church Missionary Society have put up a large building
to answer the purposes of a church and school-house. Care must be
taken and strict watch kept over this band. Living as they do on
the bank of a navigable river, where people are constantly passing,
they can give great trouble and annoyance, and, I am sorry to say,
are inclined to do so. Several complaints were made to me while
there, and I spoke to the Indians regarding them. They promised me
to abide faithfully by the terms of the treaty henceforth and not
give any further annoyance.
While occupied paying the Indians there, my crew were engaged in
taking my boat and supplies across the Portage. They left the camp
early on Monday morning, and with the assistance kindly rendered
them by Mr. Matheson, of the Hudson's Bay Company, succeeded in
reaching the north end of the Portage on Tuesday evening. That same
afternoon I walked over the four-mile Portage and found there a
number of buildings belonging to the Hudson's Bay Company. To this
point the Saskatchewan River steamer Northcote descends and
receives the supplies for the different posts belonging to the
Company to the West and North-West.
On Wednesday morning, the 30th, I left for the Pas. From the Grand
Rapids to the Narrows, before entering Cedar Lake, a distance of
eighteen or twenty miles, a continuous rapid extends, and it is
only by tracking and poling simultaneously that you are at all able
to ascend the river. The first day I made only nine miles on my way
and camped at the Demi Charge, and it was late in the evening on
the second day when I reached Cedar Lake. This lake is about
thirty-five miles in length and is very shallow and dangerous in
stormy weather. I was fortunate enough to have very calm weather,
and, therefore, crossed it without any delay and entered the
Saskatchewan again at the Che-ma-wa-win or "Seining place," early
on Saturday morning, September 2nd. Noticing a large encampment of
Indians there, I landed and found they were part of the Moose Lake
band. They desired that I should treat with them where they were,
and not bring them to the Pas, but upon my telling them that I
could only treat with them at the appointed place of meeting, they
readily assented to follow me up, and having given them some
provisions to take them there, and secured the services of one of
them to act as guide, I again started on my journey.
I was then three days and two nights ascending the river, and on
Tuesday morning, the 5th September, the day appointed for me to
meet the Indians, I arrived at the Pas or Devon Mission, on my way
up having been passed by the Indians from the Che-ma-wa-win.
On entering the river after leaving Cedar Lake the whole aspect of
the country changes, and from there to the Pas, and, I understand,
for fully one hundred miles above it, nothing but marsh can be
seen; so much so that it was difficult along the bank of the river
to find a spot dry enough to camp upon, and I was, consequently,
obliged to eat and sleep in my boat. The dreariness of this voyage
can hardly be realized, and it was with feelings of delight that I
landed at the Mission at the Pas where the Rev. Mr. Cochrane
received me.
Mr. Cochrane had accompanied me from the Stone Fort and had been in
my boat up to the night before I arrived, when, meeting some
Indians that were on the look-out for us, he returned with them in
their canoe and reached his home shortly before I arrived.
The Pas or Devon Mission is situated on the south bank of the
Saskatchewan, distant, I should say, one hundred and forty miles
from Grand Rapids. The Church Missionary Society have a very nice
church, school-house and parsonage there; and the Hudson's Bay
Company one of their posts. There are also a large number of houses
belonging to the Indians of the place; and on the other bank the
firm of Kew, Stobart & Co., have erected a store for trading
purposes. There are also several dwelling-houses on the north bank.
Altogether, the appearance of the place, on my arrival, was most
prepossessing. The banks were covered with Indians with their
canoes, and immediately the boat rounded the point below the
Mission and came in view a salute was fired, the like of which, I
was subsequently told, had never been heard in the "Ratty Country".
Having landed at the Mission, Mr. Cochrane informed me that he had,
as I requested, summoned the Indians to meet in the school-house at
three o'clock that afternoon, and when the hour arrived I proceeded
there and found upwards of five hundred Indians gathered. I stated
the object of my mission to them, and was at once assured of their
desire to accept of, and their gratitude for, the Queen's bounty
and benevolence.
I found that the Pas and Cumberland bands of Indians had acknowledged
Chiefs, but that the Moose Lake band had none, owing to a division
amongst them. It appeared that the Indians from the Che-ma-wa-win
desired to be a distinct band and have their reserves where I had
seen them at the entrance of the river from Cedar Lake; but noticing,
on my way up, the unfitness of the locality for a reserve, and having
learned that at Moose Lake, where part of the band desired to live,
a most suitable locality could be had, I had decided before meeting
them upon the course I should take, which was, not to encourage the
division in the band, and allow only one Chief; and this I did, and
succeeded, without much trouble, in getting the band to unite. I then
requested all the Indians to meet in council and select their Chief
and head men, and be prepared the following morning to present them
to me, when I would be ready to speak to them.
The next morning at eleven o'clock I met them and found they had
done as I requested, and having been presented to the Chiefs and
Councillors I proceeded to explain the terms of the treaty that I
desired to receive their adhesion to. The Chiefs immediately stated
that they wanted to make a treaty of their own, and it was only
after great difficulty that I could make them understand that in
reality it was not a new treaty they were about to make.
They had heard of the terms granted the Indians at Carlton, and
this acted most prejudicially at one time against the successful
carrying out of my mission; but I at last made them understand the
difference between their position and the Plain Indians, by
pointing out that the land they would surrender would be useless to
the Queen, while what the Plain Indians gave up would be of value
to her for homes for her white children. They then agreed to accept
the terms offered if I would agree to give them reserves where they
desired; and to their demands I patiently listened, and having at
last come to a satisfactory understanding I adjourned the meeting
to the following day.
Before proceeding further, I would draw your attention to the
localities I granted for reserves, subject to the approval of the
Government, and beg to inform you that I made every inquiry as to
the extent of farming land in each locality mentioned.
At the Narrows, at Moose Lake, there is considerable good land, and
a suitable place for a reserve can be had for the Moose Lake band.
For the Pas and Cumberland Indians I had to mention several
localities. At the Pas all the land obtainable is now cultivated,
and consists of a vegetable garden and one field attached to the
Mission, and a few patches of potatoes here and there. A short
distance from the river the marsh begins, and extends to the south
for miles; and the same thing occurs to the north. In fact, on both
banks of the river at this point, and from the Che-ma-wa-win up to
it, one hundred and fifty acres of land fit for cultivation cannot
be found; and about Cumberland the country in every respect is
similar.
The following day, Thursday the 7th, I met the Indians at three
p.m., and had the adhesion read to them and signed. I then
presented the medals and clothing to the Chiefs and Councillors,
with which they were greatly pleased, and having congratulated them
upon wearing the Queen's uniform, and having in return been
heartily thanked by them for what had been done, I proceeded to pay
them, and continued to do so up to seven o'clock, when the funds at
my disposal being exhausted, I directed them to meet me again the
following morning at nine o'clock, which they did, and I completed
the payments the same evening at five o'clock. I then distributed
the balance of provisions and the ammunition and twine. The
implements and tools I had been unable to bring from Grand Rapids,
my boat being very heavily laden; but Mr. Belanger, of the Hudson's
Bay Company, kindly promised to have them brought up free of charge
in a boat that was going to the Grand Rapids in a few days; I
therefore gave the Chief of the Pas band an order for the chest of
tools and the implements.
The following day, Saturday, having again seen all the Chiefs and
Councillors and received their thanks, and after many expressions
of gratitude from the Indians gathered, I left the Pas at half-past
two o'clock p.m., and with rowing and floating alternately during
the afternoon and night, reached the Che-ma-wa-win on Sunday
evening; crossed Cedar Lake on Monday, and landed at the head of
Grand Rapids on Tuesday morning. I then ran the rapids and hoisted
the sail at the mouth of the river at two p.m., having called upon
Mr. Matheson and seen the Chief of the Indians there on my way
down. I then made all haste to return here, but, owing to contrary
winds, only succeeded in reaching the Stone Fort on the 20th
September, yet, having made a very quick trip, unprecedented in
fact, and in carrying out the mission entrusted to me, travelled in
an open boat, thirteen hundred miles.
I would now inform you that three out of the four bands of Indians
I met on the Saskatchewan, viz., the Grand Rapids, Pas and
Cumberland, are in a position to receive at once from the
Government the grant allowed for the maintenance of schools of
instruction; at the Grand Rapids a huge school-house is by this
time entirely completed; and at the Pas and Cumberland, schools,
under the charge of the Church Missionary Society, have been in
existence some years. The Indians belonging to the bands I have
named desired that the assistance promised should be given as soon
as possible.
I would now mention the very valuable services rendered the
Government by the Rev. Mr. Cochrane, who acted as interpreter at
the Dog Head, Berens River, Grand Rapids and the Pas, and who was
at all times ready to give his advice and assistance; as well as by
Mr. A. M. Muckle, who accompanied me and assisted in making the
payments; and by Mr. Nursey, who took charge of the boat with
supplies for the Pas. To Mr. Matheson, of the Hudson's Bay Company,
Grand Rapids, and Mr. Belanger, of Cumberland House, I am deeply
indebted, and take this opportunity of tendering these gentlemen my
sincere thanks for the assistance rendered me and the many
kindnesses I received from them. I enclose herewith the pay-sheet
of the different bands I paid, a statement of the cash expenditure,
and statements shewing quantities of provisions, implements, etc.,
received and how distributed, with a statement of clothing, medals,
etc., given to the Chiefs and Councillors, and a report I received
from Mr. Bedson.
And, trusting that the manner in which I have carried out the
mission entrusted to my care, may meet with your approval,
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient servant,
THOMAS HOWARD,
Commissioner.
FORT GARRY, July 14th, 1876.
TO THE HON. THOS. HOWARD AND J. LESTOCK REID, ESQ.
Dear sirs,--Under authority from the Minister of the Interior, I
have to request you to proceed to Lake Winnipeg for the purpose
of--on behalf of the Privy Council of Canada--securing the adhesion
to Treaty Number Five of the Indians who have not yet been dealt
with, and to make the necessary payments to the others.
1st. You will, if possible, together proceed to or meet at the
following places, being there on the days named, viz.: Dog Head
Point, 25th July, and Berens River on the 5th August.
2nd. Mr. Howard will then proceed to the mouth of the Saskatchewan,
so as to reach there on the 25th of August, and then arrive at the
Pas on the 5th of September.
3rd. Mr. Reid will proceed from Berens River to Norway House, to
arrive there on or before the 25th of August.
4th. You or either of you will secure the adhesion of the Island
Indians to the treaty after the form annexed, and will request them
to select a Chief and three Councillors, and will be authorized to
promise them a reserve of one hundred and sixty acres to each
family of five, or that proportion for larger or smaller families,
to be selected for them by the person chosen for that end by the
Privy Council with their approval.
5th. You or either of you will obtain the adhesion of the Indians
of the Grand Rapids of Berens River to the treaty according to the
form annexed. You will ask them to select a Chief and three
Councillors. A similar provision will be made as to a reserve, but
if necessary you can fix the locality at the Sandy Narrows above
the rapids on the Berens River, reserving free navigation and
access to the shores to all Her Majesty's subjects.
6th. Mr. Reid will pay the Norway House and Cross Lake Indians, and
will ascertain the intentions of the Norway House Indians as to the
time of their removal to Fisher River, of which I am unadvised.
7th. Mr. Howard will pay the Indians at the mouth of the
Saskatchewan, and if the Indians have removed their houses, as
agreed by the treaty, will pay them five hundred dollars, but if
not and some have removed, will pay such their proportionate share
of the five hundred dollars.
8th. You will distribute the implements, tools, etc. sent among the
Indians, as also the ammunition and twine. Cattle cannot be given
till the Indians are sufficiently settled on the reserves to make
it seem that they will be cared for. You will report any cases
where you find this to be the case, for future action.
9th. You will inform the Berens River Indians that their application
for a hay reserve has been forwarded to the Privy Council by me, and
that they will receive a reply hereafter.
10th. Mr. Howard will secure the adhesion of the Indians at the
Pas to the treaty providing that reserves of one hundred and sixty
acres to each family of five will be granted at places selected for
them by an officer of the Privy Council, with their approval; but
it will probably be necessary to give them a reserve at the Pas
where they reside, reserving carefully free navigation and access
to the shores. As the extent of land there is very narrow, it may
be desirable to indicate localities where farming reserves will be
granted subject to the approval of the Privy Council.
11th. The Moose Lake Indians are a distinct band, and will probably
desire the recognition of two separate Chiefs and the allotment of
separate reserves to them.
12th. The Cumberland House Indians are another band, but very much
scattered; the question of a reserve will have to be considered,
and, in connection with it, as in other cases, respect for actual,
bona fide, substantial improvements, and for the rights of
settlers.
13th. In all cases the places indicated for reserves to be subject
to Her Majesty's approval in Council, and free navigation and
access to the shores to be reserved.
14th. In the case of new adhesions to the treaty, which are in fact
new treaties, only five dollars is to be paid, but persons
belonging to bands treated with last year are to receive last
year's payment, if then absent, if necessary.
15th. You will each take with you a suitable person, to be approved
of by me, to assist you in the payment.
I have the honor to be,
Your obedient servant,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Governor.
C.
WINNIPEG, October 14th 1876.
TO THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Governor.
Sir,--Referring to your letter of instructions under date of the
14th of July, relative to the payment of the Norway House and Cross
Lake bands of Indians, I have the honor to submit the following
report:--
Having, in co-operation with the Hon. Thomas Howard, paid the
Indians of Berens River and successfully secured the adhesion of
the Island and Upper Berens River bands of Indians to Treaty Number
Five, on the morning of Saturday, the 5th of August, I left for
Norway House, which place, owing to stormy weather and strong head
winds, I did not succeed in reaching until the morning of the 12th.
On the way I was met by Indians proceeding to inspect their reserve
at Fisher's River, who brought a letter from the Chiefs of Norway
House and Cross Lake, stating that the Indians were all assembled,
and requesting to be paid at the earliest possible date.
On reaching this place, Norway House, after having camp pitched at
a short distance from the fort, I dispatched messengers to the
several camps and villages, notifying the Indians of my arrival and
desiring the Chiefs to meet me on the Monday morning following. On
Sunday evening divine service was held within the fort by the Rev.
Mr. Ruttan, Wesleyan missionary, at which a large number of Indians
were present.
On Monday morning, the Chiefs and most of the Indians of both bands
having assembled at my camp, the Cross Lake band requested to be
paid there, and the Norway House Chief asked that his people might
he paid in the school-house in their village about two miles from
the fort. On hearing that all the Indians that could come were
assembled, I consented to pay them where they desired, and told the
Cross Lake Chief to bring his people at noon to receive their
gratuities, the payment which was satisfactorily completed the same
day.
The next day I crossed over to the Indian village and paid the
Norway House bands their annuities....
The following morning, Wednesday, August 16th, the Chiefs and
Indians of the two bands having assembled at my camp, I distributed
the provisions implements, &c., which were received with the
greatest degree of gratification and satisfaction.
On my inquiring of the Chief of Norway House when his band would be
prepared to remove to their reserve at the Fisher River, he
informed me that he had sent two of his people to that locality to
report on the same, and that he could not say anything definite on
the matter until their return. I might here state that, on my way
back to Winnipeg I met these men returning from Fisher's River, who
expressed themselves as highly pleased with the proposed location,
and that the band in all probability would remove there in the
spring.
Whilst at Norway House I was waited upon by a Chief and four
Councillors from the vicinity of Oxford House, who were anxious to
know if the same bounties would be extended to them as were being
extended to their brethren of Norway House and Cross Lake, and
also whether they could obtain a reserve on Lake Winnipeg, as
the country in which they were living was totally unfit for
cultivation, and that they had the greatest difficulty in procuring
a livelihood. I told them that I had no idea what were the
intentions of the Government with regard to those Indians living
north of the present Treaty, but that I would make known their
requests to Your Excellency, and that they would be duly notified
of any action the Government might take in the matter.
I left Norway House on my return trip, on the morning of the 18th,
arriving at Winnipeg on the afternoon of Saturday the 26th, having
that morning paid my boat's crew off at Selkirk.
I would here mention that previous to my departure from Norway
House there was a very hearty and apparently sincere expression of
gratitude, on the part of all the Indians present, for the
liberality extended to them, and a general and spoken wish that
their thanks be conveyed to the Queen's Representative in this
Province for his kind interest in their welfare.
I cannot conclude without bearing testimony to the kindness of Mr.
Ross, Hudson's Bay Company's Factor, and the Rev. Mr. Ruttan,
Wesleyan missionary, for services rendered during the few days
occupied in my making the payments at Norway House.
I enclose herewith statement of expenditure, &c., &c., with
vouchers attached.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient servant,
J. LESTOCK REID,
Commissioner.
CHAPTER IX
THE TREATIES AT FORTS CARLTON AND PITT
The treaties made at Forts Carlton and Pitt in the year 1876, were
of a very important character.
The great region covered by them, abutting on the areas included in
Treaties Numbers Three and Four, embracing an area of approximately
120,000 square miles, contains a vast extent of fertile territory
and is the home of the Cree nation. The Crees had, very early after
the annexation of the North-West Territories to Canada, desired a
treaty of alliance with the Government. So far back as the year
1871, Mr. Simpson, the Indian Commissioner, addressing the
Secretary of State in a despatch of date, the 3rd November, 1871,
used the following language:
"I desire also to call the attention of His Excellency to the state
of affairs in the Indian country on the Saskatchewan. The
intelligence that Her Majesty is treating with the Chippewa Indians
has already reached the ears of the Cree and Blackfeet tribes. In
the neighborhood of Fort Edmonton, on the Saskatchewan, there is a
rapidly increasing population of miners and other white people, and
it is the opinion of Mr. W. J. Christie, the officer in charge of
the Saskatchewan District, that a treaty with the Indians of that
country, or at least an assurance during the coming year that a
treaty will shortly be made, is essential to the peace, if not the
actual retention, of the country. I would refer His Excellency, on
this subject, to the report of Lieut. Butler, and to the enclosed
memoranda of Mr. W. J. Christie, the officer above alluded to."
He also enclosed an extract of a letter from Mr. Christie, then
Chief Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, and subsequently one of
the Treaty Commissioners, in which, he forwarded the messages of
the Cree Chiefs to Lieut.-Gov. Archibald, "our Great Mother's
representative at Fort Garry, Red River Settlement." This extract
and messages are as follows.
EDMONTON HOUSE, 13th April, 1871.
On the 13th instant (April) I had a visit from the Cree Chiefs,
representing the Plain Crees from this to Carlton, accompanied by
a few followers.
The object of their visit was to ascertain whether their lands
had been sold or not, and what was the intention of the Canadian
Government in relation to them. They referred to the epidemic
that had raged throughout the past summer, and the subsequent
starvation, the poverty of their country, the visible diminution
of the buffalo, their sole support, ending by requesting certain
presents at once, and that I should lay their case before Her
Majesty's representative at Fort Garry. Many stories have reached
these Indians through various channels, ever since the transfer of
the North-West Territories to the Dominion of Canada, and they were
most anxious to hear from myself what had taken place.
I told them that the Canadian Government had as yet made no
application for their lands or hunting grounds, and when anything
was required of them, most likely Commissioners would be sent
beforehand to treat with them, and that until then they should
remain quiet and live at peace with all men. I further stated that
Canada, in her treaties with Indians, heretofore, had dealt most
liberally with them, and that they were now in settled houses and
well off, and that I had no doubt in settling with them the same
liberal policy would be followed.
As I was aware that they had heard many exaggerated stories about
the troops in Red River, I took the opportunity of telling them why
troops had been sent, and if Her Majesty sent troops to the
Saskatchewan, it was as much for the protection of the red as the
white man, and that they would be for the maintenance of law and
order.
They were highly satisfied with the explanations offered, and said
they would welcome civilization. As their demands were complied
with, and presents given to them, their immediate followers, and
for the young men left in camp, they departed well pleased for the
present tune, with fair promises for the future. At a subsequent
interview with the Chiefs alone, they requested that I should write
down their words, or messages to their Great Master in Red River. I
accordingly did so, and have transmitted the messages as delivered.
Copies of the proclamation issued, prohibiting the traffic in
spirituous liquors to Indians or others, and the use of strychnine
in the destruction of animal life, have been received, and due
publicity given to them. But without any power to enforce these
laws, it is almost useless to publish them here; and I take this
opportunity of most earnestly soliciting, on behalf of the
Company's servants, and settlers in this district, that protection
be afforded to life and property here as soon as possible, and that
Commissioners be sent to speak with the Indians on behalf of the
Canadian Government.
MEMORANDA:
Had I not complied with the demands of the Indians--giving them
some little presents--and otherwise satisfied them, I have no doubt
that they would have proceeded to acts of violence, and once that
had commenced, there would have been the beginning of an Indian
war, which it is difficult to say when it would have ended.
The buffalo will soon be exterminated, and when starvation comes,
these Plain Indian tribes will fall back on the Hudson's Bay Forts
and settlements for relief and assistance. If not complied with, or
no steps taken to make some provision for them, they will most
assuredly help themselves; and there being no force or any law up
there to protect the settlers, they must either quietly submit to
be pillaged, or lose their lives in the defence of their families
and property, against such fearful odds that will leave no hope for
their side.
Gold may be discovered in paying quantities, any day, on the
eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains. We have, in Montana, and in
the mining settlements close to our boundary line, a large mixed
frontier population, who are now only waiting and watching to hear
of gold discoveries to rush into the Saskatchewan, and, without any
form of Government or established laws up there, or force to
protect whites or Indians, it is very plain what will be the
result.
I think that the establishment of law and order in the Saskatchewan
District, as early as possible, is of most vital importance to the
future of the country and the interest of Canada, and also the
making of some treaty or settlement with the Indians who inhabit
the Saskatchewan District.
W. J. CHRISTIE, Chief Factor,
In charge of Saskatchewan District,
Hudson's Bay Company.
Messages from the Cree Chiefs of the Plains, Saskatchewan, to His
Excellency Governor Archibald, our Great Mother's representative at
Fort Garry, Red River Settlement.
1. The Chief Sweet Grass, The Chief of the country.
GREAT FATHER,--I shake hands with you, and bid you welcome. We
heard our lands were sold and we did not like it; we don't want to
sell our lands; it is our property, and no one has a right to sell
them.
Our country is getting ruined of fur-bearing animals, hitherto our
sole support, and now we are poor and want help--we want you to
pity us. We want cattle, tools, agricultural implements, and
assistance in everything when we come to settle--our country is no
longer able to support us.
Make provision for us against years of starvation. We have had
great starvation the past winter, and the small-pox took away many
of our people, the old, young, and children.
We want you to stop the Americans from coming to trade on our
lands, and giving firewater, ammunition and arms to our enemies the
Blackfeet.
We made a peace this winter with the Blackfeet. Our young men are
foolish, it may not last long.
We invite you to come and see us and to speak with us. If you can't
come yourself, send some one in your place.
We send these words by our Master, Mr. Christie, in whom we have
every confidence.--That is all.
2. Ki-he-win, The Eagle.
GREAT FATHER,--Let us be friendly. We never shed any white man's
blood, and have always been friendly with the whites, and want
workmen, carpenters and farmers to assist us when we settle. I want
all my brother, Sweet Grass, asks. That is all.
3. The Little Hunter.
You, my brother, the Great Chief in Red River, treat me as a
brother, that is, as a Great Chief.
4. Kis-ki-on, or Short Tail.
My brother, that is coming close, I look upon you, as if I saw you;
I want you to pity me, and I want help to cultivate the ground for
myself and descendants. Come and see us.
The North-West Council, as already elsewhere stated, had urged
the making of treaties with these Indians, and the necessity
of doing so, was also impressed upon the Privy Council, by the
Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, and Col. French,
then in command of the Mounted Police therein. The Minister of the
Interior, the Hon. David Mills, in his Report for the year 1876,
thus alluded to this subject:
"Official reports received last year from His Honor Governor Morris
and Colonel French, the officer then in command of the Mounted
Police Force, and from other parties, showed that a feeling of
discontent and uneasiness prevailed very generally amongst the
Assiniboines and Crees lying in the unceded territory between the
Saskatchewan and the Rocky Mountains. This state of feeling, which
had prevailed amongst these Indians for some years past, had been
increased by the presence, last summer, in their territory of the
parties engaged in the construction of the telegraph line, and
in the survey of the Pacific Railway line, and also of a party
belonging to the Geological Survey. To allay this state of feeling,
and to prevent the threatened hostility of the Indian tribes to the
parties then employed by the Government, His Honor Governor Morris
requested and obtained authority to despatch a messenger to convey
to these Indians the assurance that Commissioners would be sent
this summer, to negotiate a treaty with them, as had already been
done with their brethren further east.
"The Rev. George McDougall, who had been resident as a missionary
amongst these Indians for upwards of fourteen years, and who
possessed great influence over them, was selected by His Honor to
convey this intelligence to the Indians, a task which he performed
with great fidelity and success: being able to report on his return
that although he found the feeling of discontent had been very
general among the Indian tribes, he had been enabled entirely to
remove it by his assurance of the proposed negotiations during the
coming year.
"For the purpose of negotiating this treaty with the Indians, Your
Excellency availed yourself of the services of His Honor Governor
Morris, who had been formerly employed in negotiating Treaties
Numbers Three, Four and Five. With him were associated the Hon.
James McKay and W. J. Christie, Esq., both of whom had had
considerable experience in such work, and possessed moreover an
intimate acquaintance with the Indians of the Saskatchewan, their
wants, habits and dialects."
With reference to the Rev. George McDougall, [Footnote: This
faithful missionary came to an untimely death on the plains during
the succeeding winter. Having missed his way to his camp, he was
found lying dead on the snow, and there in the lonely wilds was
closed a most useful career.] I may here state, that when the
application was made to him, to visit the Indians of the Plains, in
the Sask atchewan Valley, he was on his way, with his family, to his
distant mission, among the Assiniboines, near the Rocky Mountains,
after a brief sojourn in the Province of Ontario, but on the
request being made to him, to explain to the Indians the intentions
of the Government, he at once undertook the duty, and leaving
his family to follow him, went upon the long journey, which his
mission involved, carrying with him a letter missive from the
Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, promising the
Indians, that Commissioners would visit them during the ensuing
summer, to confer with them as to a treaty. The result of his
tour, and of the tidings which he bore was very gratifying, as the
Indians were at once tranquilized, and awaited in full confidence,
the coming of the Commissioners. The way in which he discharged his
important duties and the success which followed his exertions, will
be best set forth by giving place to his Report, addressed to the
Lieutenant-Governor, of the results of his arduous mission:
MORLEYVILLE, BOW RIVER, ROCKY MOUNTAINS,
October 23rd, 1875.
TO HIS HONOR LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR MORRIS.
Sir,--In accordance with my instructions, I proceeded with as
little delay as possible to Carlton, in the neighborhood of which
place I met with forty tents of Crees. From these I ascertained
that the work I had undertaken would be much more arduous than I
had expected, and that the principal camps would be found on the
south branch of the Saskatchewan and Red Deer Rivers. I was also
informed by these Indians that the Crees and Plain Assiniboines
were united on two points: 1st. That they would not receive any
presents from Government until a definite time for treaty was
stated. 2nd. Though they deplored the necessity of resorting to
extreme measures, yet they were unanimous in their determination
to oppose the running of lines, or the making of roads through
their country, until a settlement between the Government and them
had been effected. I was further informed that the danger of a
collision with the whites was likely to arise from the officious
conduct of minor Chiefs who were anxious to make themselves
conspicuous, the principal men of the large camps being much more
moderate in their demands. Believing this to be the fact, I
revolved to visit every camp and read them your message, and in
order that your Honor may form a correct judgment of their
disposition towards the Government, I will give you a synopsis of
their speeches after the message was read. Mistahwahsis, head Chief
of the Carlton Indians, addressing the principal Chief of the
Assiniboines and addressing me, said: "That is just it, that is all
we wanted." The Assiniboines addressing me, said: "My heart is full
of gratitude, foolish men have told us that the Great Chief would
send his young men to our country until they outnumbered us, and
that then he would laugh at us, but this letter assures us that the
Great Chief will act justly toward us."
Beardy, or the Hairy Man, Chief of the Willow Indians, said: "If I
had heard these words spoken by the Great Queen I could not have
believed them with more implicit faith than I do now." The Sweet
Grass was absent from camp when I reached the Plain Crees, but
his son and the principal men of the tribe requested me to convey
to the Great Chief, at Red River, their thanks for the presents
received, and they expressed the greatest loyalty to the government.
In a word, I found the Crees reasonable in their demands, and
anxious to live in peace with the white men. I found the Big Bear,
a Saulteaux, trying to take the lead in their council. He formerly
lived at Jack Fish Lake, and for years has been regarded as a
troublesome fellow. In his speech he said: "We want none of the
Queen's presents; when we set a fox-trap we scatter pieces of meat
all round, but when the fox gets into the trap we knock him on the
head; we want no bait, let your Chiefs come like men and talk to
us." These Saulteaux are the mischief-makers through all this
western country, and some of them are shrewd men.
A few weeks since, a land speculator wished to take a claim at the
crossing on Battle River and asked the consent of the Indians, one
of my Saulteaux friends sprang to his feet, and pointing to the
east, said: "Do you see that great white man (the Government)
coming?" "No," said the speculator. "I do," said the Indian, "and I
hear the tramp of the multitude behind him, and when he comes you
can drop in behind him and take up all the land claims you want;
but until then I caution you to put up no stakes in our country."
It was very fortunate for me that Big Bear and his party were a
very small minority in camp. The Crees said they would have driven
them out of camp long ago, but were afraid of their medicines, as
they are noted conjurers.
The topics generally discussed at their council and which will be
brought before the Commissioner are as follows in their own
language. "Tell the Great Chief that we are glad the traders are
prohibited bringing spirits into our country; when we see it we
want to drink it, and it destroys us; when we do not see it we do
not think about it. Ask for us a strong law, prohibiting the free
use of poison (strychnine). It has almost exterminated the animals
of our country, and often makes us bad friends with our white
neighbors. We further request, that a law be made, equally
applicable to the Half-breed and Indian, punishing all parties who
set fire to our forest or plain. Not many years ago we attributed a
prairie fire to the malevolence of an enemy, now every one is
reckless in the use of fire, and every year large numbers of
valuable animals and birds perish in consequence. We would farther
ask that our chiefships be established by the Government. Of late
years almost every trader sets up his own Chief and the result is
we are broken up into little parties, and our best men are no
longer respected." I will state in connection with this, some of
the false reports I had to combat in passing through this country,
all calculated to agitate the native mind. In the neighborhood of
Carlton an interested party went to considerable trouble to inform
the Willow Indians that I had $3,000 for each band, as a present
from the Government, and nothing in my long journey gave me greater
satisfaction than the manner in which these Indians received my
explanation of the contents of my letter of instructions. At the
Buffalo Lake I found both Indians and Half-breeds greatly agitated.
A gentlemen passing through their country had told them that the
Mounted Police had received orders to prevent all parties killing
buffalo or other animals, except during three months in the year,
and these are only samples of the false statements made by parties
who would rejoice to witness a conflict of races.
That your Honor's message was most timely, these are ample proofs.
A report will have reached you before this time that parties have
been turned back by the Indians, and that a train containing
supplies for the telegraph contractors, when west of Fort Pitt,
were met by three Indians and ordered to return. Now after
carefully investigating the matter and listening to the statements
of all parties concerned, my opinion is, that an old traveller
amongst Indians would have regarded the whole affair as too trivial
to be noticed. I have not met with a Chief who would bear with the
responsibility of the act....
Personally I am indebted both to the missionaries, and the Hudson's
Bay Company's officials for their assistance at the Indian
councils.
Believing it would be satisfactory to your Honor and of service to
the Commissioners, I have kept the number of all the tents visited
and the names of the places where I met the Indians. [Footnote: The
number of Indians, as estimated by Mr. McDougall, as being visited
by him, was 3,976.]
By reckoning eight persons to each tent, we will have a very close
approximate to the number of Indians to be treated with at Carlton,
and Fort Pitt. There may have been a few tents in the forest, and I
have heard there are a few Crees at Lesser Slave Lake and Lac la
Biche, but the number cannot exceed twenty tents.
All of which is respectfully submitted.
G. McDOUGALL.
The Commissioners, in the discharge of their task, had to travel
through the prairie district in going to their destination and
returning to Winnipeg, a distance of over 1,800 miles. They
first met the Indians in the vicinity of Fort Carlton, on the
Saskatchewan, in the month of August, 1876, and eventually
succeeded on the 23rd day of that month, in effecting a treaty with
the Plain and Wood Crees, and on the 28th of the same month with
the tribe of Willow Crees. The negotiations were difficult and
protracted. The Hon. David Mills, then Minister of the Interior,
in his Annual Report thus characterizes them:--"In view of the
temper of the Indians of the Saskatchewan, during the past year,
and of the extravagant demands which they were induced to prefer
on certain points, it needed all the temper, tact, judgment and
discretion, of which the Commissioners were possessed, to bring
the negotiations to a satisfactory issue." The difficulties were
encountered chiefly at Carlton: The main body of the Crees were
honestly disposed to treat, and their head Chiefs, Mistowasis and
Ah-tuk-uh-koop, shewed sound judgment, and an earnest desire to
come to an understanding.
They were embarrassed, however, by the action of the Willow Crees,
who, under the guidance of one of their Chiefs, Beardy, interposed
every obstacle to the progress of the treaty, and refused to attend
the Council, unless it was held at the top of a hill some miles
off, where the Chief pretended it had been revealed to him in a
vision that the treaty was to be made. The Willow Crees were,
moreover, under the influence of a wandering band of Saulteaux,
the chief portion of whom resided within the limits of the other
treaties, and who were disposed to be troublesome. Before the
arrival of the Commissioners, the Saulteaux conceived the idea of
forming a combination of the French Half-breeds, the Crees, and
themselves, to prevent the crossing of the Saskatchewan by the
Lieutenant-Governor, and his entrance into the Indian territories.
They made the proposal first to the French Half-breeds, who
declined to undertake it, and then to the Crees, who listened to it
in silence. One of them at length arose, and pointing to the River
Saskatchewan, said, "Can you stop the flow of that river?" The
answer was, "No," and the rejoinder was "No more can you stop the
progress of the Queen's Chief." When the Commissioners arrived at
the Saskatchewan, a messenger from the Crees met them, proffering a
safe convoy, but it was not needed. About a hundred traders' carts
were assembled at the crossing, and Kissowayis, a native Indian
trader, had the right of passage, which he at once waived, in
favor of Messrs. Christie and Morris, the Commissioners. The other
Commissioner, Mr. McKay, met them at Duck Lake next day, having
proceeded by another route, and there they encountered Chief
Beardy, who at once asked the Lieutenant-Governor to make the
treaty at the hill, near the lake. On his guard, however, he
replied, that he would meet the Cree nation wherever they desired,
but must first go on and see them at Carlton, as he had appointed.
An escort of Mounted Police also met the Commissioners at Duck
Lake, having been sent from Carlton, in consequence of the
information given by the Crees of the threatened interference
with their progress. After several days' delay the Commissioners
were obliged to meet the Crees without the Willow Crees. But after
the conference had opened, the Beardy sent a message asking to
be informed of the terms the Commissioners intended to offer in
advance. The reply was that the messenger could sit with the other
Indians, and report to his Chief what he heard, as it was his own
fault that the Chief was not there to take part in the proceedings.
The negotiations then went on quietly and deliberately, the
Commissioners giving the Indians all the time they desired. The
Indians were apprehensive of their future. They saw the food
supply, the buffalo, passing away, and they were anxious and
distressed. They knew the large terms granted to their Indians by
the United States, but they had confidence in their Great Mother,
the Queen, and her benevolence.
They desired to be fed. Small-pox had destroyed them by hundreds
a few years before, and they dreaded pestilence and famine.
Eventually the Commissioners made them an offer. They asked this
to be reduced to writing, which was done, and they asked time to
consider it, which was of course granted. When the conference
resumed, they presented a written counter-proposal. This the
Commissioners considered, and gave full and definite answers of
acceptance or refusal to each demand, which replies were carefully
interpreted, two of the Commissioners, Messrs. Christie and McKay,
being familiar with the Cree tongue, watching how the answers were
rendered, and correcting when necessary. The food question, was
disposed of by a promise, that in the event of a National famine or
pestilence such aid as the Crown saw fit would be extended to them,
and that for three years after they settled on their reserves,
provisions to the extent of $1,000 per annum would be granted them
during seed-time.
The other terms were analogous to those of the previous treaties.
The Crees accepted the revised proposals. The treaty was
interpreted to them carefully, and was then signed, and the payment
made in accordance therewith. After the conclusion of the treaty,
the Commissioners were unwilling that the Willow Crees should
remain out of the treaty, and sent a letter to them by a messenger,
Pierre Levailler, that they would meet them half way, at the
camp of the Hon. James McKay, and give them the opportunity of
accepting the terms of the treaty already concluded. The letter
was translated to the Indians by the Rev. Pere Andre, a Catholic
missionary, who, as well as M. Levailler, urged the Indians to
accede to the proposal made to them, which they agreed to do. The
Commissioners met the Indians accordingly, at the place proposed,
and received, after a full discussion, the adhesion of the three
Chiefs and head men of the Willow Crees to the treaty, and the
payments were then made to them.
The Commissioners then prepared to leave for Fort Pitt, but having
been apprised by the Rev. Mr. Scollan, a Catholic missionary, who
had been sent by Bishop Grandin, to be present at the making of the
treaty, that Sweet Grass, the principal Chief of the Plain Crees,
at Fort Pitt, was unaware of the place and time of meeting, they
despatched a messenger to apprise him of them, and request him to
be present.
The Commissioners crossed the Saskatchewan and journeyed to Fort
Pitt. Near it they were met by an escort of Mounted Police, who
convoyed them to the fort.
There they found a number of Indians assembled, and, during the
day, Sweet Grass arrived. In the evening the Chief and head men
waited upon the Commissioners. Delay was asked and granted before
meeting. Eventually the conference was opened. The ceremonies which
attended it were imposing. The national stem or pipe dance was
performed, of which a full narrative will be found hereafter. The
conference proceeded, and the Indians accepted the terms made at
Carlton with the utmost good feeling, and thus the Indian title
was extinguished in the whole of the Plain country, except a
comparatively small area, inhabited by the Black Feet, comprising
about 35,000 square miles, I regret to record, that the Chief Sweet
Grass, who took the lead in the proceedings, met with an accidental
death a few months afterwards, by the discharge of a pistol. The
Indians, in these two treaties, displayed a strong desire for
instruction in farming, and appealed for the aid of missionaries
and teachers.
The latter the Commissioners promised, and for the former they were
told they must rely on the churches, representatives of whom were
present from the Church of England, the Methodist, the Presbyterian
and the Roman Catholic Church. The Bishop (Grandin) of the latter
Church travelled from Edmonton to Fort Pitt and Battleford to see
the Commissioners and assure them of his good will. After the
conclusion of the treaty, the Commissioners commenced their long
return journey by way of Battleford, and arrived at Winnipeg on the
6th day of October, with the satisfaction of knowing that they had
accomplished a work which, with the efficient carrying out of the
treaties, had secured the good will of the Cree Nation, and laid
the foundations of law and order in the Saskatchewan Valley.
The officers of the Hudson's Bay Company, the missionaries of the
various churches, Colonel McLeod of the Mounted Police Force, his
officers and men, and the Half-breed population, all lent willing
assistance to the commissioners, and were of substantial service.
I now submit the despatch of the Lieutenant-Governor, giving an
account of the journey and of the negotiations attending the
treaty, and I include a narrative of the proceedings taken down,
day by day, by A. G. Jackes, Esq., M.D., Secretary to the
Commission, which has never before been published, and embraces an
accurate account of the speeches of the Commissioners and Indians.
It is satisfactory to be able to state, that Lieut.-Gov. Laird,
officers of the police force and Mr. Dickieson have since obtained
the adhesion to the treaty, of, I believe, all but one of the
Chiefs included in the treaty area, viz.: The Big Bear, while the
head men even of his band have ranged themselves under the
provisions of the treaty.
GOVERNMENT HOUSE,
FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 4th. December, 1876.
Sir,--I beg to inform you that in compliance with the request of
the Privy Council that I should proceed to the west to negotiate
the treaties which I had last year, through the agency of the late
Rev. George McDougall, promised the Plain Crees, would be
undertaken, I left Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 27th of July
last, with the view of prosecuting my mission. I was accompanied by
one of my associates, the Hon. J. W. Christie, and by A. G. Jackes,
Esq., M.D., who was to act as secretary. I selected as my guide Mr.
Pierre Levailler. The Hon. James McKay, who had also been
associated in the commission, it was arranged, would follow me and
meet me at Fort Carlton.
On the morning of the 4th of August, I forded the Assiniboine about
five miles from Fort Ellice, having accomplished what is usually
regarded as the first stage of the journey to Fort Carlton, about
two hundred and twenty miles. After crossing the river, I was
overtaken by a party of the Sioux who have settled on the reserve
assigned to them at Bird Tail Creek, and was detained the greater
part of the day.
I am sanguine that this settlement will prove a success, as these
Sioux are displaying a laudable industry in cutting hay for their
own use and for sale, and in breaking up ground for cultivation. I
resumed my journey in the afternoon, but a storm coming on, I was
obliged to encamp at the Springs, having only travelled eight miles
in all during the day.
On the 5th I left the Springs, and after traversing much fine
country, with excellent prairie, good soil, clumps of wood,
lakelets, and hay swamps, in the Little and Great Touchwood Hills
and File Mountain region, I arrived at the South Saskatchewan, at
Dumont's crossing, twenty miles from Fort Carlton, on the afternoon
of the 14th of August.
Here I found over one hundred carts of traders and freighters,
waiting to be ferried across the river. The scow was occupied in
crossing the carts and effects of Kis-so-wais, an enterprising
Chippewa trader, belonging to the Portage la Prairie band, who at
once came forward and gave up to me his right of crossing.
I met, also, a young Cree who had been sent by the Crees to hand me
a letter of welcome in the name of their nation.
The reason of this step being taken was, that a few wandering
Saulteaux or Chippewa, from Quill Lake, in Treaty Number Four, had
come to the Crees and proposed to them to unite with them and
prevent me from crossing the river and entering the Indian country.
The Crees promptly refused to entertain the proposal, and sent a
messenger, as above stated, to welcome me.
I also received from their messenger a letter from Lawrence Clarke,
Esq., Chief Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company at Carlton, offering
the Commissioners the hospitalities of the fort.
I sent replies in advance, thanking the Crees for their action, and
accepting the kind offer of Mr. Clarke, to the extent of the use of
rooms in the fort.
It was late in the evening before our party crossed the river, so
that we encamped on the heights near it.
On the morning of the 15th we left for Fort Carlton, Mr. Christie
preceding me to announce my approaching arrival at Duck Lake. About
twelve miles from Carlton I found the Hon. James McKay awaiting me,
having travelled by way of Fort Pelly.
Here also a Chief, Beardy of the Willow Crees, came to see me.
He said that his people were encamped near the lake, and that as
there were fine meadows for their horses they wished the treaty to
be made there.
I was at once on my guard, and replied to him, that after I reached
Carlton, which was the place appointed, I would meet the Indians
wherever the great body of them desired it.
He then asked me to stop as I passed his encampment, and see his
people. This I agreed to do, as I was leaving Duck Lake I met
Captain Walker with his troop of mounted police, coming to escort
me to Carlton which they did.
When I arrived at Beardy's encampment, the men came to my carriage
and holding up their right hands to the skies, all joined in an
invocation to the deity for a blessing on the bright day which had
brought the Queen's messenger to see them, and on the messenger and
themselves; one of them shook hands with me for the others.
The scene was a very impressive and striking one, but as will be
seen hereafter, this band gave me great trouble and were very
difficult to deal with.
Leaving the Indian encampment I arrived at Fort Carlton, where Mr.
Christie, Dr. Jackes and myself were assigned most comfortable
rooms, Mr. McKay preferring to encamp about four miles from the
fort.
In the evening, Mist-ow-as-is and Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the two head
Chiefs of the Carlton Crees, called to pay their respects to me,
and welcomed me most cordially.
On the 16th the Crees sent me word that they wished the day to
confer amongst themselves.
I acceded to their request, learning that they desired to bring the
Duck Lake Indians into the negotiations.
I sent a messenger, Mr. Peter Ballenden, to Duck Lake to inform the
Indians that I would meet them at the encampment of the Carlton
Crees, about two miles from the fort.
On the 17th, on his return, he informed me that the Chief said "He
had not given me leave to meet the Indians anywhere except at Duck
Lake, and that they would only meet me there." The Carlton Indians,
however, sent me word, that they would be ready next morning at ten
o'clock.
On the 18th, as I was leaving for the Indian encampment, a
messenger came to me from the Duck Lake Indians, asking for
provisions. I replied, that Mr. Christie was in charge of the
distribution of provisions, but that I would not give any to the
Duck Lake Indians, in consequence of the unreasonableness of their
conduct, and that provisions would only be given to the large
encampment.
I then proceeded to the Indian camp, together with my fellow
Commissioners, and was escorted by Captain Walker and his troop.
On my arrival I found that the ground had been most judiciously
chosen, being elevated, with abundance of trees, hay marshes and
small lakes. The spot which the Indians had left for my council
tent overlooked the whole.
The view was very beautiful: the hills and the trees in the
distance, and in the foreground, the meadow land being dotted with
clumps of wood, with the Indian tents clustered here and there to
the number of two hundred.
On my arrival, the Union Jack was hoisted, and the Indians at once
began to assemble, beating drums, discharging fire-arms, singing
and dancing. In about half an hour they were ready to advance and
meet me. This they did in a semicircle, having men on horseback
galloping in circles, shouting, singing and discharging fire-arms.
They then performed the dance of the "pipe stem," the stem was
elevated to the north, south, west and east, a ceremonial dance was
then performed by the Chiefs and head men, the Indian men and women
shouting the while.
They then slowly advanced, the horsemen again preceding them on
their approach to my tent. I advanced to meet them, accompanied by
Messrs. Christie and McKay, when the pipe was presented to us and
stroked by our hands.
After the stroking had been completed, the Indians sat down in
front of the council tent, satisfied that in accordance with their
custom we had accepted the friendship of the Cree nation.
I then addressed the Indians in suitable terms, explaining that I
had been sent by the Queen, in compliance with their own wishes and
the written promise I had given them last year, that a messenger
would be sent to them.
I had ascertained that the Indian mind was oppressed with vague
fears; they dreaded the treaty; they had been made to believe that
they would be compelled to live on the reserves wholly, and abandon
their hunting and that in time of war, they would be placed in the
front and made to fight.
I accordingly shaped my address, so as to give them confidence in
the intentions of the Government, and to quiet their apprehensions.
I impressed strongly on them the necessity of changing their
present mode of life, and commencing to make homes and gardens for
themselves, so as to be prepared for the diminution of the buffalo
and other large animals, which is going on so rapidly.
The Indians listened with great attention to my address, and at
its close asked an adjournment that they might meet in council to
consider my words, which was of course granted.
The Rev. C. Scollen, a Roman Catholic Missionary amongst the
Blackfeet, arrived soon after from Bow River, and informed me that
on the way he had learned that Sweet Grass, the principal Chief of
the Plain Crees, was out hunting and would not be at Fort Pitt,
and that he was of opinion that his absence would be a great
obstruction to a treaty.
After consulting with my colleagues, I decided on sending a
messenger to him, requesting his presence, and succeeded in
obtaining, for the occasion, the services of Mr. John McKay, of
Prince Albert, who had accompanied the Rev. George McDougall on his
mission last year.
In the evening, Lieut.-Col. Jarvis arrived with a reinforcement of
the Mounted Police, and an excellent band, which has been
established at the private cost of one of the troops.
On the 19th, the Commissioners, escorted by the Mounted Police,
headed by the band, proceeded to the Indian encampment.
The Indians again assembled, following Mist-ow-as-is and
Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the recognised leading Chiefs.
I asked them to present their Chiefs; they then presented the two
head Chiefs, and the minor ones.
At this juncture, a messenger arrived from the Duck Lake Indians,
asking that I should tell them the terms of the Treaty. I replied
that if the Chiefs and people had joined the others they would have
heard what I had to say, and that I would not tell the terms in
advance, but that the messenger could remain and hear what I had to
say. He expressed himself satisfied and took his seat with the
others. I then fully explained to them the proposals I had to make,
that we did not wish to interfere with their present mode of
living, but would assign them reserves and assist them as was being
done elsewhere, in commencing to farm, and that what was done would
hold good for those that were away.
The Indians listened most attentively, and on the close of my
remarks Mist-ow-as-is arose, took me by the hand, and said that
"when a thing was thought of quietly, it was the best way," and
asked "this much, that we go and think of his words."
I acquiesced at once, and expressed my hope that the Chiefs would
act wisely, and thus closed the second day.
The 20th being Sunday, the Rev. Mr. John McKay, of the Church of
England, conducted divine service at the fort, which was largely
attended; the Rev. Mr. Scollen also conducted service.
At noon a messenger came from the Indian camp, asking that there
should be a service held at their camp, which Mr. McKay agreed to
do; this service was attended by about two hundred adult Crees.
On Monday, 21st, the head Chiefs sent word that, as the previous
day was Sunday, they had not met in council, and wished to have the
day for consultation, and if ready would meet me on Tuesday
morning. I cheerfully granted the delay from the reasonableness of
the request; but I was also aware that the head Chiefs were in a
position of great difficulty.
The attitude of the Duck Lake Indians and of the few discontented
Saulteaux embarrassed them, while a section of their own people
were either averse to make a treaty or desirous of making
extravagant demands. The head Chiefs were men of intelligence, and
anxious that the people should act unitedly and reasonably.
We, therefore, decided to give them all the time they might ask, a
policy which they fully appreciated.
On the 22nd the Commissioners met the Indians, when I told them
that we had not hurried them, but wished now to hear their Chiefs.
A spokesman, The Pond Maker, then addressed me, and asked
assistance when they settled on the land, and further help as they
advanced in civilization.
I replied that they had their own means of living, and that we
could not feed the Indians, but only assist them to settle down.
The Badger, Soh-ah-moos, and several other Indians all asked help
when they settled, and also in case of troubles unforeseen in the
future. I explained that we could not assume the charge of their
every-day life, but in a time of a great national calamity they
could trust to the generosity of the Queen.
The Honourable James McKay also addressed them, saying that their
demands would be understood by a white man as asking for daily
food, and could not be granted, and explained our objects, speaking
with effect in the Cree tongue.
At length the Indians informed me that they did not wish to be fed
every day, but to be helped when they commenced to settle, because
of their ignorance how to commence, and also in case of general
famine; Ah-tuk-uk-koop winding up the debate by stating that
they wanted food in the spring when they commenced to farm, and
proportionate help as they advanced in civilization, and then
asking for a further adjournment to consider our offers.
The Commissioners granted this, but I warned them not to be
unreasonable, and to be ready next day with their decision, while
we on our part would consider what they had said.
The whole day was occupied with this discussion on the food
question, and it was the turning point with regard to the treaty.
The Indians were, as they had been for some time past, full of
uneasiness.
They saw the buffalo, the only means of their support, passing
away. They were anxious to learn to support themselves by
agriculture, but felt too ignorant to do so, and they dreaded that
during the transition period they would be swept off by disease or
famine--already they have suffered terribly from the ravages of
measles, scarlet fever and small-pox.
It was impossible to listen to them without interest, they were not
exacting, but they were very apprehensive of their future, and
thankful, as one of them put it, "a new life was dawning upon
them."
On the 23rd the conference was resumed, an Indian addressed the
people, telling them to listen and the interpreter, Peter Erasmus,
would read what changes they desired in the terms of our offer.
They asked for an ox and a cow each family; an increase in the
agricultural implements; provisions for the poor, unfortunate,
blind and lame; to be provided with missionaries and school
teachers; the exclusion of fire water in the whole Saskatchewan; a
further increase in agricultural implements as the band advanced in
civilization; freedom to cut timber on Crown lands; liberty to
change the site of the reserves before the survey; free passages
over Government bridges or scows; other animals, a horse, harness
and waggon, and cooking stove for each chief; a free supply of
medicines; a hand mill to each band; and lastly, that in case of
war they should not be liable to serve.
Two spokesmen then addressed us in support of these modifications
of the terms of the Treaty.
I replied to them that they had asked many things some of which had
been promised, and that the Commissioners would consult together
about what they had asked that day and the day before, and would
reply, but before doing so wished to know if that was the voice of
the whole people, to which the Indians all assented.
After an interval we again met them, and I replied, going over
their demands and reiterating my statements as to our inability to
grant food, and again explaining that only in a national famine did
the Crown ever intervene, and agreeing to make some additions to
the number of cattle and implements, as we felt it would be
desirable to encourage their desire to settle.
I closed by stating that, after they settled on the reserves, we
would give them provisions to aid them while cultivating, to the
extent of one thousand dollars per annum, but for three years only,
as after that time they should be able to support themselves.
I told them that we could not give them missionaries, though I was
pleased with their request, but that they must look to the
churches, and that they saw Catholic and Protestant missionaries
present at the conference. We told them that they must help their
own poor, and that if they prospered they could do so. With regard
to war, they would not be asked to fight unless they desired to do
so, but if the Queen did call on them to protect their wives and
children I believed they would not be backward.
I then asked if they were willing to accept our modified proposals.
Ah-tuk-uk-koop then addressed me, and concluded by calling on the
people, if they were in favour of our offers, to say so. This they
all did by shouting assent and holding up their hands.
The Pond Maker then rose and said he did not differ from his
people, but he did not see how they could feed and clothe their
children with what was promised. He expected to have received that;
he did not know how to build a house nor to cultivate the ground.
Joseph Toma, a Saulteaux, said he spoke for the Red Pheasant, Chief
of the Battle River Crees, and made demands as follows: Men to
build houses for them, increased salaries to the Chiefs and head
men, etc. He said what was offered was too little; he wanted enough
to cover the skin of the people, guns, and also ten miles of land
round the reserves in a belt.
I asked the Red Pheasant how it was that he was party to the
requests of his people and how, when I asked if that was their
unanimous voice he had assented, and yet had now put forward new
and large demands.
I said it was not good faith, and that I would not accede to the
requests now made; that what was offered was a gift as they had
still their old mode of living.
The principal Chiefs then rose and said that they accepted our
offers, and the Red Pheasant repudiated the demands and remarks of
Toma, and stated that he had not authorized him to speak for him.
Mist-ow-as-is then asked to speak for the Half-breeds, who wish to
live on the reserves.
I explained the distinction between the Half-breed people and the
Indian Half-breeds who lived amongst the Indians as Indians, and
said the Commissioners would consider the case of each of these
last on its merits.
The treaty was then signed by myself, Messrs. Christie and McKay,
Mist-ow-as-is and Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the head Chiefs, and by the other
Chiefs and Councillors, those signing, though many Indians were
absent, yet representing all the bands of any importance in the
Carlton regions, except the Willow Indians.
On the 24th the Commissioners again met the Indians, when I
presented the Head Chiefs with their medals, uniforms and flags,
and informed them that Mr. Christie would give the other Chiefs and
Councillors the same in the evening.
Some half a dozen of Saulteaux then came forward, of whom I found
one was from Qu'Appelle, and had been paid there, and the others
did not belong to the Carlton region. I told them that I had heard
that they had endeavoured to prevent me crossing the river and to
prevent a treaty being made, but that they were not wiser than the
whole of their nation, who had already been treated with.
They did not deny the charge, and their spokesman becoming
insolent, I declined to hear them further, and they retired, some
stating that they would go to Fort Pitt, which I warned them not to
do.
Besides these Saulteaux, there were others present who disapproved
of their proceedings, amongst them being Kis-so-way-is, already
mentioned, and Pecheeto, who was the chief spokesman at Qu'Appelle,
but is now a Councillor of the Fort Ellice Band.
I may mention here that the larger part of the Band to whom these
other Saulteaux belonged, with the Chief Yellow Quill, gave in
their adhesion to Treaty Number Four, at Fort Pelly about the time
that their comrades were troubling me at Fort Carlton.
Mr. Christie then commenced the payments, assisted by Mr. McKay, of
Prince Albert, and was engaged in so doing during the 24th and
25th. Amongst those paid were the few resident Saulteaux, who were
accepted by the Cree Chiefs as part of their bands.
The next morning, the 26th, the whole band, headed by their Chiefs
and Councillors, dressed in their uniforms, came to Carlton House
to pay their farewell visit to me.
The Chiefs came forward in order, each addressing me a few remarks,
and I replied briefly.
They then gave three cheers for the Queen, the Governor, one for
the Mounted Police, and for Mr. Lawrence Clarke, of Carlton House,
and then departed, firing guns as they went.
Considering it undesirable that so many Indians should be excluded
from the treaty, as would be the case if I left the Duck Lake
Indians to their own devices, I determined on sending a letter to
them. I, therefore, prepared a message, inviting them to meet me at
the Hon. Mr. McKay's encampment about three miles from the large
Indian encampment about half way to Duck Lake, on Monday, the 28th,
if they were prepared then to accept the terms of the treaty I had
made with the Carlton Indians. My letter was entrusted to Mr.
Levailler, who proceeded to Duck Lake.
On entering the Indian Council room, he found they had a letter
written to me by the Rev. Mr. Andre, offering to accept the terms
of the treaty, if I came to Duck Lake.
The Indians sent for Mr. Andre to read my letter to them, which was
received with satisfaction; both he and Mr. Levailler urged them to
accept my proposal, which they agreed to do, and requested Mr.
Levailler to inform me that they would go to the appointed place.
Accordingly, on the 28th, the Commissioners met the Willow Indians.
After the usual handshaking, and short speeches from two of the
Chiefs, I addressed them, telling them I was sorry for the course
they had pursued, and that I did not go away without giving them
this opportunity to be included in the treaty.
Kah-mee-yes-too-waegs, the Beardy, spoke for the people. He said
some things were too little. He was anxious about the buffalo.
Say-sway-kees wished to tell our mother, the Queen, that they were
alarmed about the buffalo. It appeared as if there was only one
left.
The Beardy again addressed me and said,--"You have told me what you
have done with the others you will do with us. I accept the terms;
no doubt it will run further, according to our numbers; when I am
utterly unable to help myself I want to receive assistance."
I replied to them, explaining, with regard to assistance that we
could not support or feed the Indians, and all that we would do
would be to help them to cultivate the soil.
If a general famine came upon the Indians the charity of the
Government would come into exercise. I admitted the importance of
steps being taken to preserve the buffalo, and assured them that it
would be considered by the Governor-General and Council of the
North-West Territories, to see if a wise law could be framed such
as could be carried out and obeyed.
The three Chiefs and their head men then signed the treaty, and the
medals and flags were distributed, when Mr. Christie intimated that
he was ready to make the payments.
They then asked that this should be done at Duck Lake, but Mr.
Christie informed them that, as we had to leave for Fort Pitt, this
was impossible; and that, moreover their share of the unexpended
provisions and the clothing and presents were at the fort, where
they would require to go for them.
They then agreed to accept the payment, which was at once proceeded
with.
The persistency with which these Indians clung to their endeavor to
compel the Commissioners to proceed to Duck Lake was in part owing
to superstition, the Chief Beardy having announced that he had a
vision, in which it was made known to him that the treaty would be
made there.
It was partly, also, owing to hostility to the treaty, as they
endeavored to induce the Carlton Indians to make no treaty, and
urge them not to sell the land, but to lend it for four years.
The good sense and intelligence of the head Chiefs led them to
reject their proposals, and the Willow Indians eventually, as I
have reported, accepted the treaty.
The 29th was occupied by Mr. Christie in settling accounts, taking
stock of the clothing, and preparing for our departure.
An application was made to me by Toma, the Saulteaux, who took part
in the proceedings on the 23rd, to sign the treaty as Chief of the
Saulteaux band.
As I could not ascertain that there were sufficient families of
these Indians resident in the region to be recognized as a distinct
band, and as I had no evidence that they desired him to be their
Chief, I declined to allow him to sign the treaty, but informed him
that next year, if the Saulteaux were numerous enough, and
expressed the wish that he should be Chief, he would be recognized.
He was satisfied with this, and said that next year they would come
to the payments.
His daughter, a widow, with her family, was paid, but he preferred
to remain until next year, as he did not wish to be paid except as
a Chief.
On the morning of the 31st, the previous day having been wet, Mr.
Christie and I left for Fort Pitt, Mr. McKay having preceded us by
the other road--that by way of Battle River.
We arrived on the 5th September, the day appointed, having rested,
as was our custom throughout the whole journey, on Sunday, the 3rd.
About six miles from the fort we were met by Col. Jarvis and the
police, with their band, as an escort, and also by Mr. McKay, the
Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, who informed us that he had
rooms ready for our occupation.
We found over one hundred lodges of Indians already there, and
received a message from them, that as their friends were constantly
arriving, they wished delay until the 7th.
On the morning of the 6th, Sweet Grass, who had come in, in
consequence of my message, accompanied by about thirty of the
principal men, called to see me and express their gratification at
my arrival.
Their greeting was cordial, but novel in my experience, as they
embraced me in their arms, and kissed me on both cheeks, a
reception which they extended also to Mr. Christie and Dr. Jackes.
The Hon. James McKay arrived from Battle River in the evening, and
reported that he had met there a number of Indians, principally
Saulteaux, who had been camped there for some time. There had been
about seventy lodges in all, but as the buffalo had come near, the
poorer Indians had gone after them.
They expressed good feeling, and said they would like to have
waited until the 15th, the day named for my arrival there, to see
me and accept the treaty, but that the buffalo hunt was of so much
consequence to them that they could not wait so long.
This band is a mixed one, composed of Crees and Saulteaux from Jack
Fish Lake, their Chief being the Yellow Sky.
On the 7th the Commissioners proceeded to the council tent, which
was pitched on the high plateau above the fort, commanding a very
fine view, and facing the Indian encampment.
They were accompanied by the escort of the police, with their band.
The Indians approached with much pomp and ceremony, following the
lead of Sweet Grass.
The stem dance was performed as at Fort Carlton, but with much more
ceremony, there being four pipes instead of one, and the number of
riders, singers and dancers being more numerous. After the pipes
were stroked by the Commissioners, they were presented to each of
them to be smoked, and then laid upon the table to be covered with
calico and cloth, and returned to their bearers.
After the conclusion of these proceedings I addressed them, telling
them we had come at their own request, and that there was now a
trail leading from Lake Superior to Red River, that I saw it
stretching on thence to Fort Ellice, and there branching off, the
one track going to Qu'Appelle and Cypress Hills, and the other by
Fort Pelly to Carlton, and thence I expected to see it extended, by
way of Fort Pitt to the Rocky Mountains; on that road I saw all the
Chippewas and Crees walking, and I saw along it gardens being
planted and houses built.
I invited them to join their brother Indians and walk with the
white men on this road. I told them what we had done at Carlton,
and offered them the same terms, which I would explain fully if
they wished it.
On closing Sweet Grass rose, and taking me by the hand, asked me to
explain the terms of the treaty, after which they would all shake
hands with me and then go to meet in council.
I complied with this request, and stated the terms fully to them,
both addresses having occupied me for three hours. On concluding
they expressed satisfaction, and retired to their council.
On the 8th the Indians asked for more time to deliberate, which was
granted, as we learned that some of them desired to make exorbitant
demands, and we wished to let them understand through the avenues
by which we had access to them that these would be fruitless.
On the 9th, the Commissioners proceeded to the council tent, but
the Indians were slow of gathering, being still in council,
endeavoring to agree amongst themselves.
At length they approached and seated themselves in front of the
tent, I then asked them to speak to me. The Eagle addressed the
Indians, telling them not to be afraid, and that I was to them as a
brother, and what the Queen wished to establish was for their good.
After some time had passed, I again called on them to tell me their
minds and not to be afraid. Sweet Grass then rose and addressed me
in a very sensible manner. He thanked the Queen for sending me; he
was glad to have a brother and a friend who would help to lift them
up above their present condition. He thanked me for the offer and
saw nothing to be afraid of. He therefore accepted gladly, and took
my hand to his heart. He said God was looking down on us that day,
and had opened a new world to them. Sweet Grass further said, he
pitied those who had to live by the buffalo, but that if spared
until this time next year, he wanted, this my brother (i.e. the
Governor), to commence to act for him in protecting the buffalo;
for himself he would commence at once to prepare a small piece of
land, and his kinsmen would do the same.
Placing one hand over my heart, and the other over his own, he
said: "May the white man's blood never be spilt on this earth. I am
thankful that the white man and red man can stand together. When I
hold your hand and touch your heart, let us be as one; use your
utmost to help me and help my children so that they may prosper."
The Chief's speech, of which the foregoing gives a brief outline in
his own words, was assented to by the people with a peculiar
guttural sound which takes with them the place of the British
cheer.
I replied, expressing my satisfaction that they had so unanimously
approved of the arrangement I had made with the nation at Carlton,
and promised that I would send them next year, as I had said to the
Crees of Carlton, copies of the treaty printed on parchment.
I said that I knew that some of the Chiefs were absent, but next
year they would receive the present of money as they had done.
The Commissioners then signed the treaty, as did Sweet Grass, eight
other Chiefs and those of their Councillors who were present, the
Chiefs addressing me before signing. James Senum, Chief of the
Crees at White Fish Lake, said that he commenced to cultivate the
soil some years ago.
Mr. Christie, then chief factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, gave
him a plough, but it was now broken. He had no cattle when he
commenced, but he and his people drew the plough themselves, and
made hoes of roots of trees. Mr. Christie also gave him a pit-saw
and a grind-stone, and he was still using them. His heart was sore
in spring when his children wanted to plough and had no implements.
He asked for these as soon as possible, and referring to the
Wesleyan mission at that place, he said by following what I have
been taught it helps me a great deal.
The Little Hunter, a leading Chief of the Plain Crees, said he was
glad from his very heart; he felt in taking the Governor's hand as
if it was the Queen's. When I hear her words that she is going to
put this country to rights, it is the help of God that put it into
her heart. He wished an everlasting grasp of her hand; he was
thankful for the children who would prosper. All the children who
were settling there, hoped that the Great Spirit would look down
upon us as one. Other Chiefs expressed themselves similarly.
Ken-oo-say-oo, or The Fish, was a Chippewayan or mountaineer, a
small band of whom are in this region.
They had no Chief, but at my request they had selected a Chief and
presented the Fish to me. He said, speaking in Cree, that he
thanked the Queen, and shook hands with me, he was glad for what
had been done, and if he could have used his own tongue he would
have said more.
I then presented Sweet Grass his medal, uniform, and flag, the band
playing "God Save the Queen" and all the Indians rising to their
feet.
The rest of the medals, flags, and uniforms, were distributed, as
soon as possible, and Mr. Christie commenced to make the payments.
On Sunday, the 10th, the Rev. Mr. McKay conducted the service for
the police and others, who might attend, and in the afternoon the
Rev. Mr. McDougall had a service in Cree; Bishop Grandin and the
Rev. Mr. Scollen also had services for the Crees and Chippewayans.
On Monday, the 11th, Mr. Christie completed the payments and
distribution of provisions. The police commenced crossing the
Saskatchewan, with a view to leaving on Tuesday, the 12th, for
Battle River. We therefore sent our horses and carts across the
river, and had our tents pitched with the view of commencing our
return journey, early in the morning. Just as we were about to
leave Port Pitt, however, the Great Bear, one of the three Cree
Chiefs who were absent, arrived at the fort and asked to see me.
The Commissioners met him, when he told me that he had been out on
the plains hunting the buffalo, and had not heard the time of the
meeting; that on hearing of it he had been sent in by the Crees and
by the Stonies or Assiniboines to speak for them. I explained to
him what had been done at Carlton and Pitt, he expressed regret
that I was going away as he wished to talk to me. I then said we
would not remove until the next day, which gratified him much.
On the 13th, Sweet Grass and all the other Chiefs and Councillors
came down to the fort with the Great Bear to bid me farewell.
Sweet Grass told me the object of their visit. The Bear said the
Indians on the plains had sent him to speak for them, and those who
were away were as a barrier before what he would have to say.
Sweet Grass said, addressing him, "You see the representative of
the Queen here. I think the Great Spirit put it into their hearts
to come to our help. Let there be no barrier, as it is with great
difficulty that this was brought about. Say yes and take his hand."
The White Fish spoke similarly.
The Bear said, "Stop, my friends. I never saw the Governor before;
when I heard he was to come, I said I will request him to save me
from what I most dread--hanging; it was not given to us to have the
rope about our necks." I replied, that God had given it to us to
punish murder by death, and explained the protection the police
force afforded the Indians.
Big Bear still demanded that there should be no hanging, and I
informed him that his request would not be granted. He then wished
that the buffalo might be protected, and asked why the other Chiefs
did not speak.
The Fish, the Chippewayan replied, "We do not because Sweet Grass
has spoken, and what he says we all say."
I then asked the Bear to tell the other two absent Chiefs Short
Tail and Sagamat, what had been done; that I had written him and
them a letter, and sent it by Sweet Grass, and that next year they
could join the treaty; with regard to the buffalo, the North-West
Council were considering the question, and I again explained that
we would not interfere with the Indian's daily life except to
assist them in farming.
I then said I never expected to see them again. The land was so
large that another Governor was to be sent, whom I hoped they would
receive as they had done me, and give him the same confidence they
had extended to me. The Chiefs and Councillors, commencing with
Sweet Grass, then shook hands with Mr. Christie and myself, each
addressing me words of parting.
The Bear remained sitting until all had shaken hands, he then took
mine and holding it, said, "If he had known he would have met me
with all his people. I am not an undutiful child, I do not throw
back your hand, but as my people are not here I do not sign. I will
tell them what I have heard, and next year I will come." The
Indians then left, but shortly afterwards the Bear came to see me
again, fearing I had not fully understood him, and assured me that
he accepted the treaty as if he had signed it, and would come next
year with all his people and accept it.
We crossed the river, and left for Battle River in the afternoon,
where we arrived on the afternoon of the 15th. We found no Indians
there except Red Pheasant and his band, whom we had already met at
Carlton.
On the 16th, the Red Pheasant saw the Commissioners. He said he was
a Battle River Indian; his fathers had lived there before him, but
he was glad to see the Government coming there, as it would improve
his means of living. He wished the claims of the Half-breeds who
had settled there before the Government came to be respected, as
for himself he would go away and seek another home, and though it
was hard to leave the home of his people, yet he would make way for
the white man, and surely, he said, "if the poor Indian acts thus,
the Queen, when she hears of this, will help him." He asked, that a
little land should be given him to plant potatoes in next spring,
and they would remove after digging them, to their reserve, which
he thought he would wish to have at the Eagle Hills.
I expressed my satisfaction with their conduct and excellent
spirit, and obtained the cheerful consent of Mr. Fuller, of the
Pacific telegraph line, who is in occupation of a large cultivated
field, that the band should use three acres within the fenced
enclosure, and which, moreover, Mr. Fuller kindly promised to
plough for them gratuitously.
The 17th being Sunday we remained at our camp, and on Monday
morning, the 18th, we commenced our long return journey, with the
incidents of which I will not trouble you further than to state
that, on arriving on the 4th of October at an encampment about
thirty miles from Portage la Prairie, we found it necessary to
leave our tents and carts to follow us leisurely (many of the
horses having become completely exhausted with the long journey of
sixteen hundred miles) and push on to the Portage; on the 5th we
reached the Portage, where Mr. Christie and Dr. Jackes remained,
their horses being unable to go farther, and I went on to Poplar
Point, forty-five miles from Fort Garry, where I found accommodation
for the night from Mr. Chisholm, of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post
there.
I arrived at Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 6th of October
having been absent for over two months and a half. Mr. McKay,
having taken another road, had arrived before me; Mr. Christie
and Dr. Jackes reached here subsequently. Having thus closed the
narrative of our proceedings, I proceed to deal with the results of
our mission, and to submit for your consideration some reflections
and to make some practical suggestions.
1st. The Indians inhabiting the ceded territory are chiefly Crees,
but there are a few Assiniboines on the plains and also at the
slope of the mountains. There are also a small number of Saulteaux
and one band of Chippewayans.
2nd. I was agreeably surprised to find so great a willingness on
the part of the Crees to commence to cultivate the soil, and so
great a desire to have their children instructed. I requested Mr.
Christie to confer with the Chief while the payments were going on,
as to the localities where they would desire to have reserves
assigned to them, and with few exceptions they indicated the
places, in fact most of them have already commenced to settle.
It is, therefore important that the cattle and agricultural
implements should be given them without delay.
I would, therefore, recommend that provision should be made for
forwarding these as soon as the spring opens. I think it probable
that cattle and some implements could be purchased at Prince Albert
and thus avoid transportation.
3rd. I would further represent that, though I did not grant the
request, I thought the desire of the Indians, to be instructed in
farming and building, most reasonable, and I would therefore
recommend that measures be adopted to provide such instruction for
them. Their present mode of living is passing away; the Indians are
tractable, docile and willing to learn. I think that advantage
should be taken of this disposition to teach them to become
self-supporting, which can best be accomplished with the aid of a
few practical farmers and carpenters to instruct them in farming
and house building.
The universal demand for teachers, and by some of the Indians for
missionaries, is also encouraging. The former, the Government can
supply; for the latter they must rely on the churches, and I trust
that these will continue and extend their operations amongst them.
The field is wide enough for all, and the cry of the Indian for
help is a clamant one.
4th. In connection with the aiding of the Indians to settle, I have
to call attention to the necessity of regulations being made for
the preservation of the buffalo. These animals are fast decreasing
in numbers, but I am satisfied that a few simple regulations would
preserve the herds for many years. The subject was constantly
pressed on my attention by the Indians, and I promised that the
matter would be considered by the North-West Council. The council
that has governed the territories for the last four years was
engaged in maturing a law for this purpose, and had our regime
continued we would have passed a statute for their preservation. I
commend the matter to the attention of our successors as one of
urgent importance.
5th. There is another class of the population in the North-West
whose position I desire to bring under the notice of the Privy
Council. I refer to the wandering Half-breeds of the plains, who
are chiefly of French descent and live the life of the Indians.
There are a few who are identified with the Indians, but there is a
large class of Metis who live by the hunt of the buffalo, and have
no settled homes. I think that a census of the numbers of these
should be procured, and while I would not be disposed to recommend
their being brought under the treaties, I would suggest that land
should be assigned to them, and that on their settling down, if
after an examination into their circumstances, it should be found
necessary and expedient, some assistance should be given them to
enable them to enter upon agricultural operations.
If the measures suggested by me are adopted, viz., effective
regulations with regard to the buffalo, the Indians taught to
cultivate the soil, and the erratic Half-breeds encouraged to
settle down, I believe that the solution of all social questions of
any present importance in the North-West Territories will have been
arrived at.
In conclusion, I have to call your attention to the report made to
me by the Hon. Mr. Christie, which I forward herewith; that
gentleman took the entire charge of the payments and administration
of matters connected with the treaty, and I have to speak in the
highest terms of the value of his services.
Accompanying his report will be found the pay sheets, statements of
distribution of provisions and clothing, memoranda as to the
localities of the reserves, suggestions as to the times and places
of payment next year, and a general balance sheet.
A credit of $60,000 was given to me, and I have placed as a refund
to the credit of the Receiver-General, $12,730.55. This arises from
the fact that owing to the proximity of the buffalo, many of the
Indians did not come into the treaty.
I have to acknowledge the benefit I derived from the services of
the Hon. James McKay, camping as he did near the Indian encampment.
He had the opportunity of meeting them constantly, and learning
their views which his familarity with the Indian dialects enabled
him to do. Dr. Jackes took a warm interest in the progress of our
work, and kept a record of the negotiations, a copy of which I
enclose and which I think ought to be published, as it will be of
great value to those who will be called on to administer the
treaty, showing as it does what was said by the negotiators and by
the Indians, and preventing misrepresentations in the future. The
Commissioners are under obligations to Lieut.-Colonel McLeod, and
the other officers and men of the police force for their escort.
The conduct of the men was excellent, and the presence of the force
as an emblem and evidence of the establishment of authority in the
North-West was of great value.
I have to record my appreciation of the kindness of Messrs. Clarke,
of Fort Carlton, and McKay of Fort Pitt, and of the other officials
of the Hudson's Bay Company, and of the hearty assistance they
extended towards the accomplishment of our mission. I have also to
mention the interest taken in the negotiations by His Lordship
Bishop Grandin, and by the various missionaries, Protestant and
Catholic.
On this occasion, as on others, I found the Half-breed population
whether French or English generally using the influence of their
relationship to the Indians in support of our efforts to come to a
satisfactory arrangement with them.
We also had the advantage of good interpreters, having secured the
services of Messrs. Peter Ballendine and John McKay, while the
Indians had engaged Mr. Peter Erasmus to discharge the same duty.
The latter acted as chief interpreter, being assisted by the
others, and is a most efficient interpreter.
I transmit herewith a copy of the treaty, and have only in
conclusion to express my hope that this further step in the
progress of the work of the Dominion amongst the Indian tribes will
prove beneficial to them, and of advantage to the realm.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient servant,
ALEXANDER MORRIS,
Lieut.-Governor.
Narrative of the proceedings connected with the effecting of the
treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt, in the year 1876, together with
a report of the speeches of the Indians and Commissioners, by A. G.
Jackes, Esq., M.D., Secretary to the Commission.
The expedition for the proposed Treaty Number Six, reached the
South Saskatchewan on the afternoon of August 14th, where they were
met by a messenger from the Cree Indians expressing welcome, also a
messenger from Mr. L. Clarke, of Carlton House, offering to the
Governor and party the hospitality of the Fort.
The next morning, when about ten miles from Carlton, the
Commissioners were met by a detachment of Mounted Police under
Major Walker, who escorted them to the Fort; on the way the
Commissioners passed an encampment of Crees whose Chief had
previously seen the Governor at Duck Lake and asked him to make the
treaty there; he replied that he could not promise, that he would
meet the Indians where the greater number wished. These Crees
joined in an invocation to the deity for a blessing on the
Governor, and deputed one of their number to welcome him by shaking
hands.
Near the Fort were encamped about two hundred and fifty lodges of
Crees, to whom the Commissioners at once served out two days'
allowance of provisions.
On the 16th the Crees reported that they wanted another day to
confer amongst themselves, this was granted and the Governor
requested them to meet him and the Commissioners on the 18th at 10
a.m., to commence the business of the treaty.
FIRST DAY
August 18th.
At half-past ten His Honor Lieut.-Gov. Morris, the Hon. W. J.
Christie and Hon. Jas. McKay, accompanied by an escort of
North-West Mounted Police, left the Fort for the camp of the Cree
Indians, who had selected a site about a mile and a half from the
Hudson's Bay Fort. There were about two hundred and fifty lodges,
containing over two thousand souls. The Governor's tent was pitched
on a piece of rising ground about four hundred yards from the
Indian camp, and immediately facing it.
As soon as the Governor and party arrived, the Indians who were to
take part in the treaty, commenced to assemble near the Chief's
tents, to the sound of beating drums and the discharge of small
arms, singing, dancing and loud speaking, going on at the same
time.
In about half an hour they were ready to advance and meet the
Governor; this they did in a large semi-circle; in their front
were about twenty braves on horseback, galloping about in
circles, shouting, singing and going through various picturesque
performances. The semi-circle steadily advanced until within fifty
yards of the Governor's tent, when a halt was made and further
peculiar ceremonies commenced, the most remarkable of which was the
"dance of the stem." This was commenced by the Chiefs, medicine
men, councillors, singers and drum-beaters, coming a little to the
front and seating themselves on blankets and robes spread for them.
The bearer of the stem, Wah-wee-kah-nich-kah-oh-tah-mah-hote (the
man you strike on the back), carrying in his hand a large and
gorgeously adorned pipe stem, walked slowly along the semi-circle,
and advancing to the front, raised the stem to the heavens, then
slowly turned to the north, south, east and west, presenting the
stem at each point; returning to the seated group he handed the
stem to one of the young men, who commenced a low chant, at the
same time performing a ceremonial dance accompanied by the drums
and singing of the men and women in the background.
This was all repeated by another of the young men, after which the
horsemen again commenced galloping in circles, the whole body
slowly advancing. As they approached his tent, the Governor,
accompanied by the Hon. W. J. Christie and Hon. Jas. McKay,
Commissioners, went forward to meet them and to receive the stem
carried by its bearer. It was presented first to the Governor, who
in accordance with their customs, stroked it several times, then
passed it to the Commissioners who repeated the ceremony.
The significance of this ceremony is that the Governor and
Commissioners accepted the friendship of the tribe.
The interpreter then introduced the Chiefs and principal men; the
Indians slowly seating themselves in regular order in front of the
tent. In a few minutes there was perfect quiet and order, when His
Honor the Lieutenant-Governor addressed them as follows:
"My Indian brothers, Indians of the plains, I have shaken hands
with a few of you, I shake hands with all of you in my heart. God
has given us a good day, I trust his eye is upon us, and that what
we do will be for the benefit of his children.
"What I say and what you say, and what we do, is done openly before
the whole people. You are, like me and my friends who are with me,
children of the Queen. We are of the same blood, the same God made
us and the same Queen rules over us.
"I am a Queen's Councillor, I am her Governor of all these
territories, and I am here to speak from her to you. I am here now
because for many days the Cree nation have been sending word that
they wished to see a Queen's messenger face to face. I told the
Queen's Councillors your wishes. I sent you word last year by a
man who has gone where we will all go by and by, that a Queen's
messenger would meet you this year. I named Forts Carlton and Pitt
as the places of meeting, I sent a letter to you saying so, and my
heart grew warm when I heard how well you received it.
"As the Queen's chief servant here, I always keep my promises; the
winter came and went but I did not forget my word, and I sent a
messenger to tell you that I would meet you at Carlton on the 15th
of August, and at Fort Pitt on the 5th of September.
"During the winter I went to Ottawa to consult with the other
Queen's Councillors about you amongst other matters, and they said
to me, 'you promised a Queen's messenger to the Crees, you have
been so much with the Indians, that we wish you to go yourself;'
I said 'the journey is long and I am not a strong man, but when a
duty is laid upon me I will do it, but,' I said, 'you must give
with me two friends and councillors whom I can trust, to help me in
the duty;' and now I have with me two friends whom you and I have
known long; one of them is of your own blood, the other has been
many years amongst you.
"I will, in a short time, give you a message from the Queen, and my
Councillors will tell you that the words are true. Before I do so,
there are so many things I want to say to you that I scarcely know
where to begin. I have been nearly four years Governor of Manitoba
and these territories, and from the day I was sworn, I took the
Indian by the hand, and those who took it have never let it go.
"Three years ago I went to the north-west angle of Lake of the
Woods, and there I met the Chippewa nation, I gave them a message
and they talked with me and when they understood they took my hand.
Some were away, next year I sent messengers to them and I made a
treaty between the Queen and them; there are numbered of those
altogether four thousand. I then went to Lake Qu'Appelle the year
after, and met the Crees and Chippewas there, gave them my message,
and they took my hand. Last summer I went to Lake Winnipeg and gave
the Queen's message to the Swampy Crees and they and I, acting for
the Queen, came together heart to heart; and now that the Indians
of the east understand the Queen and her Councillors, I come to
you. And why is all this done? I will tell you; it is because you
are the subjects of the Queen as I am. She cares as much for one of
you as she does for one of her white subjects. The other day a
party of Iroquois Indians were taken to England across the ocean;
the Queen heard of it and sent to them, saying, 'I want to see my
red children,' took their hands and gave each of them her picture,
and sent them away happy with her goodness.
"Before I came here I was one of the Queen's Councillors at Ottawa.
We have many Indians there as here, but for many years there has
been friendship between the British, and the Indians. We respect
the Indians as brothers and as men. Let me give you a proof it.
Years ago there was war between the British and the Americans;
there was a great battle; there were two brave Chief warriors on
the British side, one wore the red coat, the other dressed as you
do, but they fought side by side as brothers; the one was Brock and
the other was Tecumseth whose memory will never die; the blood of
both watered the ground; the bones of Tecumseth were hid by his
friends; the remains of Brock by his, and now a great pile of stone
stands up toward heaven in his memory. And now the white man is
searching for the remains of Tecumseth, and when found they will
build another monument in honour of the Indian.
"I hope the days of fighting are over, but notwithstanding the
whites are as much your friends in these days of peace, as in war.
"The many Indians in the place that I have left are happy,
prosperous, contented and growing in numbers. A meeting of the
Grand Council of the Six Nation Indians was held a month ago; they
now number six thousand souls. They met to thank the Queen and to
say that they were content, and why are they content? Because many
years ago the Queen's Councillors saw that the Indians that would
come after, must be cared for, they saw that the means of living
were passing away from the Indians, they knew that women and
children were sometimes without food; they sent men to speak to the
Indians, they said your children must be educated, they must be
taught to raise food for themselves. The Indians heard them, the
Councillors gave them seed, land, food, taught their children and
let them feel that they were of one blood with the whites. Now,
what we have found to work so well where I came from we want to
have here in our territories, and I am happy to say that my heart
is gladdened by the way the Indians have met me.
"We are not here as traders, I do not come as to buy or sell horses
or goods, I come to you, children of the Queen, to try to help you;
when I say yes, I mean it, and when I say no, I mean it too.
"I want you to think of my words, I want to tell you that what we
talk about is very important. What I trust and hope we will do is
not for to-day or to-morrow only; what I will promise, and what I
believe and hope you will take, is to last as long as that sun
shines and yonder river flows.
"You have to think of those who will come after you, and it will be
a remembrance for me as long as I live, if I can go away feeling
that I have done well for you. I believe we can understand each
other, if not it will be the first occasion on which the Indians
have not done so. If you are as anxious for your own welfare as I
am, I am certain of what will happen.
"The day is passing. I thank you for the respectful reception you
have given me. I will do here as I have done on former occasions. I
hope you will speak your minds as fully and as plainly as if I was
one of yourselves.
"I wish you to think of what I have said. I wish you to present
your Chiefs to me to-day if you are ready, if not then we will wait
until to-morrow."
Here the Indians requested an adjournment until next day in order
that they might meet in council; this was granted, and the first
day's proceedings terminated.
Late in the evening the escort of Mounted Police was reinforced by
a detachment, accompanied by their band, under command of Col.
Jarvis, making a force of nearly one hundred men and officers.
SECOND DAY
August 19th.
The Lieutenant-Governor and Commissioners, with the Mounted Police
escort, headed by their band, proceeded to the camp to meet the
Indians at 10:30 a.m. The Indians having assembled in regular order
with their two leading Chiefs, Mis-tah-wah-sis and Ah-tuck-ah-coop
seated in front, the Governor said:
"My friends, we have another bright day before us, and I trust that
when it closes our faces will continue as bright as the day before
us. I spoke yesterday as a friend to friends, as a brother to
brothers, as a father to his children. I did not want to hurry you,
I wanted you to think of my words, and now I will be glad if you
will do as I asked you then, present your Chiefs to me, and I shall
be glad to hear the words of the Indians through the voice of their
Chiefs, or whoever they may appoint."
The head men then brought forward Mis-tah-wah-sis, of the Carlton
Indians, representing seventy-six lodges. Ah-tuck-ah-coop, of the Wood
Indians, representing about seventy lodges. These were acknowledged as
the leading Chiefs, after them came James Smith, of the Fort-a-la-Corne
Indians, fifty lodges. John Smith, of the Prince Albert and So |
